LO Separator Manual Madhumati P646

Status: Approved Confidential Document id: DBAE891207 - Page 1 (818)
Safety 1
S and P Flex Separation System Description 2
Operating Instructions 3
STO
P Parameter List 4
d
s an
M a nual re
tion befo
n struc arnings ervice
y I
Stud ve the w eration,
e r p
s Alarms and Fault Finding 5
obs lation, o ce. ath
l n or d e
insta aintena nts and/ ons are
m i
a nd ccid
e truct Installation System
e ri o us a f the ins
S lt i
resu
can llowed.
o
Reference 6
n ot f
Only foreseeable conditions have been taken into

consideration. No warnings are given for Separator Manual 7
situations arising from unintended usage of the
system components and tools.
Separator Spare Parts
Catalogue 8
Marine & Diesel Equipment
Ancillary Spare Parts
Catalogue 9
Printed Jun 2008
Document No. 587876-02
Optional Equipment
Configuration no. 10
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB Jun 2008

This publication or any part there of may not be reproduced or
transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission of Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
S and P Flex Separation
Safety
Printed Feb 2008
Book No. 584610-02 V 1
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008.
S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Safety Instructions
Important – read this!
The centrifugal separator includes parts

that rotate at very high speeds, generating
huge forces. It is therefore essential for the
safe operation of this separator system that
you read and understand this manual,
including the warning signs and safety
P0 03 7 02 A
precautions presented in this manual.
Failure to do so may cause a fatal accident.
1.1 Key Factors for Safe

Operation
The separation system is designed and supplied
for a specific function (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density, etc.). The system
P00 3 62 3A
must be used for this function only, and strictly
within Alfa Laval´s specifications.
Incorrect operation or maintenance may result
in a heavy unbalance, reduction of material
strength, etc. that could lead to serious
breakdown with fatal injury or damage to
property.
For safe operation, strictly follow the
instructions for installation, operation and
maintenance in this manual.
584610-02 1
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY
The following is compulsory for safe

operation:
1 Never start up a separator before the bowl is
completely assembled, and all fastenings
securely tightened.
2 Never discharge a vibrating separator. Always
stop with the emergency stop button.
3 Never begin to disassemble a separator
before it has come to a complete standstill.
4 Always set the discharge intervals according
to instructions in the instruction book.
5 Never ignore alarms. Always eliminate the
cause before resuming operation.
6 Never use the separator for other liquids than
those specified by Alfa Laval.
7 Never operate a separator with a different
power supply frequency than stated on the
machine plate.
8 Clean the operating system regularly to avoid
sludge discharge malfunction.
9 Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in installation, operation,
maintenance, and emergency procedures.
10 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and
the special tools supplied.
2 584610-02
1.2 Warning Sign

Definitions
Below are definitions of the warning signs used.
Danger – serious injury or death Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction

R
indicates an imminently hazardous
! DANGE
situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
Warning – serious injury or death Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

ING
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not WARN
!
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Disintegration hazard
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
Emergency Stop button and leave the room.
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.
Caution – minor or moderate injury Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

ON
a situation which, if not avoided, could result in CAUTI
!
minor or moderate injury.
‘CAUTION’ used without the safety alert Burn hazard

symbol indicates a potentially hazardous Various machine surfaces can be hot and cause
situation which, if not avoided, could result in burns.
equipment damage.
584610-02 3
1.3 Summary of Safety

Hazards
Below follows a selection of the warnings which
have been used in the text of this instruction
manual to ensure safe installation, start-up,
operation, stop, and maintenance. Further
warnings are to be found in the appropriate
places throughout the manual.
Start-up
Check that the separator is correctly assembled
and connected to power supply of correct voltage
and frequency. The control panel must be ON.
Be specially observant during start-up. If there
is any abnormal vibration, immediately stop the
separator and investigate the cause. Clean the
bowl if it contains sediment.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Failure to do so may lead to
X0 2 47 61 A
breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding).
ING
WARN 50 Hz?
!
60 Hz?
Breakdown hazard
P 00 36 06 A
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with

the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.
4 584610-02
ING
WARN
!
Use the separation system for the purpose, and within

the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do so
could cause a violent breakdown.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start. Top up when

necessary. Do not overfill.
584610-02 5
Operation
ING
WARN
!
Excessive vibration
If vibration increases, or continues at full speed,
keep bowl filled and stop the separator.
The cause of the vibration must be determined and
corrected before starting again!
Excessive vibration may be due to incorrect
assembly or insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
If strong vibration occurs, press the emergency
stop button and evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration
P0 0 36 06 A
may then become violent and result in breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
After an emergency stop, the cause of the fault
must be identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause not
found, contact Alfa Laval for advice before
restarting the separator.
ING
WARN
!
Burning hazard
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces can be
hot and cause burns.
ING
WARN
!
Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.
6 584610-02
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.
ING
WARN
!
Do not discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration
can increase if solidified sludge is only partially
discharged.
ON
CAUTI
!
X0 23 71 6A
Burn hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid
can be hot and cause burns.
ON
CAUTI
!
Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.
If speed or starting power is not correct:
ING
WARN
!
Stop and change the belt transmission to suit the

power supply frequency.
584610-02 7
Stop
ON
CAUTI
!
Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the motor.
Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

in connection with stop.
Emergency stop
ING
WARN
!
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
X02 4 57 9A
Emergency Stop button and leave the room
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.
ING
WARN
!
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the
emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
8 584610-02
After emergency stop
R
! DANGE
Entrapment hazard
X0 24 76 4 A
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that separator has come to a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work
ING
WARN
!
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Maintenance
R
! DANGE
Entrapment hazard
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.
X 02 47 64 A
584610-02 9
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration Hazards
Separator parts that are either missing, worn
beyond their safe limits or incorrectly assembled,
may cause severe damage or fatal injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn and Corrode Hazards

Escaping hot and/or corroding process material,
which can be hazardous, may still remain in the
separator after stop.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration hazards
Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe
damage.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
I0 02 9 33 A
Make sure that the separator has come to a
work.
ING
WARN
!
The nut must not be removed before the separator

has stopped.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The top disc can adhere to the bowl hood when
lifting. Be careful not to accidentally drop it.
10 584610-02
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring

parts
The seal ring breaks when removed from the bowl
hood.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The distributor and disc stack can adhere to the top
disc. Separate them from the top disc so that they
do not accidentally drop.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator discs may cause cuts
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be pushed down
against the discharge slide, otherwise the discharge
slide may come loose from the tool.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to prevent it
from rolling.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The motor will come off if the screws are unscrewed.
584610-02 11
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during lifting.
The spindle assembly may otherwise come loose
from the lifting tool.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for dismantling of snap ring to
avoid accidental release.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor with coupling will drop
when removing the screws.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
If the cables are not disconnected during lifting
procedures, they may become damaged.
ON
CAUTI
!
Inhalation hazard
When handling friction blocks/pads wear a mask to
avoid inhalation of dust.
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO REMOVE
DUST. Remove dust using vacuum or a damp cloth.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The centrifugal clutch is heavy and can fall, causing
injury, when loosened from the motor shaft.
12 584610-02
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream.
Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally enclosed
motors can be damaged by direct hosing to the
same extent as open motors, resulting in short-
circuit and internal corrosion.
Max. 0,2 mm
ING
WARN
!
G 0 20 52 4 1
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the depth of the corrosion damage
exceeds 0.5 mm (0.2 mm for bowl body and bowl
hood) or if cracks have been found. Do not
continue to use the separator until it has been
inspected and given clearance for operation by Alfa
Laval.
ING
WARN
!
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are
totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
ING
WARN
!
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
584610-02 13
ING
WARN
!
Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing the
thickness of the material.
Pay special attention to the pillars between the
sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of affecting
strength or function.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration Hazard
If the belt pulley must be renewed, check that the
new pulley has the correct diameter. An incorrect
pulley will cause the separator bowl to run at either
an excessive or insufficient speed.
ING
WARN
!
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling any heated
parts.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for assembly of snap ring to
avoid accidental release.
ING
WARN
!
Cut hazard
Do not put fingers between the frame and air
deflector while lowering the assembly.
ON
CAUTI
!
Impact marks may cause the separator to vibrate
while running.
14 584610-02
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be pushed home
against the discharge slide, otherwise it may come
loose from the tool.
ING
WARN
!
The number of discs may have to be increased to

adjust the disc stack pressure. Always check before
operating the separator.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
A falling separator can cause accidents resulting in
serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method than
described in this manual.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
ING
WARN
!
I 0 02 93 5A
Separator parts that are either missing, worn

beyond their safe limits, or incorrectly assembled,
may cause severe damage or fatal injury.
ING
WARN
!
I 00 2 93 B A
Do not weld nor heat parts that are subject to high-
speed rotation.
584610-02 15
Separator reassembled
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Failure to do so may lead to
X0 2 47 61 A
breakdown.
Cleaning in place
ON
CAUTI
!
Health Risk
Do not forget to disconnect the CIP equipment and
re-connect connections.
ON
CAUTI
!
Use only Alfa Laval recommended CIP liquids.
16 584610-02
1.4 Optional Heaters
1.4.1 CBM heaters
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
The heater must not be used without the insulated
protection cover. This shields the hot surfaces and
also acts as a safety cover in the unlikely event of
leakage.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn Hazard
To prevent pressure or heat shocks in the system,
adjustment of the flow rate must be carried out
slowly. The heater can otherwise be damaged.
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
Shut off the oil flow and the heating medium flow
before starting maintenance.
ING
WARN
!
Corrosion Hazard
Pay strict attention to the safety instructions for the
cleaning liquid used.
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
Make sure that the relief valve outlet leads into a
collecting tank or below floor level.
584610-02 17
1.4.2 Electric heaters
R
! DANGE
Electrocution Risk
Switch off the main power before opening the heater
junction box, or dismantling the heater.
ON
CAUTI
!
It is very important that the correct heater element is

installed.
18 584610-02
P Flex separation
System description
Printed 06-2016
Book No. 9004503-02 v2
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 06-2016
Original instruction
This publication or any part there of may not

be reproduced or transmitted by any process
or means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 System Overview 5
1.1 Oil Flow 6
1.2 System Layout 8
1.3 System Components, P 605/615 10
1.4 System Components,
P 625/626/635/636/646 12
2 The Process 15
2.1 Purifying 15
2.2 Definition of Terms 17
3
1 System Overview
The Purifier System is designed for cleaning of

lubricating and fuel oils in marine and power
applications.
In the process, heated oil is fed through the

separator to clean the oil from solid particles
and water.
The basic separation unit comprises:
• A separator.
• Ancillary equipment including control unit.
• Optional equipment such as oil feed pump,
oil heating system, sludge removal kit, etc.
The separating systems can be operated as

single, parallel or serial systems.
During the process, the cleaned oil leaves the

separator through the oil outlet while separated
water and sludge accumulate at the periphery
of the rotating separator bowl.
The control unit initiates a sludge discharge at

preset intervals.
Sludge and water are then discharged through

sludge ports at the periphery of the bowl and
collected in a sludge tank.
5
1 System Overview
1.1 Oil Flow

The unprocessed oil is fed by a positive
displacement pump, operating at a constant 1 2 3
flow. Depending on the oil type, the oil may
need to be heated.
After the heater the change over valve directs

the oil to the separator. The separated oil
passes the manually operated back-pressure
regulating valve to the receiving tank.
The oil can also be directed back to the tank,

bypassing the separator. This is the case when
the oil temperature is outside the preset range,
during separator start and stop procedures, and
during alarm conditions.
4 5 6 7
P003714B
1. Settling tank
2. Change-over valve
3. Backpressure regulating valve
4. Pump
5. Heater
6. Separator
7. Daily service tank
6
1 System Overview
1 System Overview
1.2 System Layout

F
B C D E PT G
1 TT
A
3
X023717G
1. Unprocessed oil inlet

2. Oil return
3. Sludge and water outlet
4. Water inlet
A. Solenoid valve block, water : Distributes separator opening/closing water,
and conditioning water.
B. Feed pump : Feeds unprocessed oil to the separator.
C. Heater : Heats unprocessed oil to separation temperature.
D. Temperature transmitter (TT1, TT2) : Measures the oil temperature and
signals the control unit.
E. Pressure transmitter, oil (PT1) : Measures the pressure in the oil inlet,
and signals the control unit.
(The position of PT depends on separator size and design.)
F. Pneumatically controlled change-over valve
(V1) : Directs the unprocessed oil to the separator, or back to the settling
tank (recirculation – fuel oil only).
G. Separator : Cleans the oil by removing water and solid particles.
- — —.Optional equipment not part of the P Flex Separation System
8
1 System Overview
P00356uc
5. Clean oil outlet to service tank

H. Control unit : Supervises the separation system.
I. Pressure transmitter, oil (PT4) : Measures the pressure in the oil outlet,
and signals the control unit.
J. Regulating valve (RV4) : Regulates the backpressure in the clean oil
outlet.
9
1 System Overview
1.3 System Components, P 605/615
D
C
E
F G
H
4
K
3
1
2
X023760i
10
1 System Overview
1. Oil inlet E. Operating air

2. Oil recirculation F. Oil in
3. Sludge and water outlet G. Oil out
4. Clean oil outlet H. Pressure transmitters
A. EPC 60 Control unit and starter I. Regulating valve
B. EPC 60 Control unit J. Pneumatic 3-way valve
C. (Lube oil only) K. Temperature sensor
D. Operating water
11
1 System Overview
1.4 System Components, P 625/626/635/636/646
A
D
B
C
G
F H
K
3
2
J
1
X023718G
12
1 System Overview
1. Oil inlet E. Operating air

2. Oil recirculation F. Oil in
3. Sludge and water outlet G. Oil out
4. Clean oil outlet H. Pressure transmitters
A. EPC 60 Control unit and starter I. Regulating valve
B. EPC 60 Control unit J. Pneumatic 3-way valve
C. (Lube oil only) K. Temperature sensor
D. Operating water
13
1 System Overview
14
2 The Process
The terms used in this process description are

explained in section Definition of Terms on page
17.
2.1 Purifying
A water seal is added to the separator bowl
through the water inlet.
The separator is equipped with a gravity

disc, chosen according to factors such as oil
temperature, density, and feed rate. This choice
decides the position of the interface between
oil and water seal.
The separator does not use a paring disc to

pump out the separated water. Instead, the
water leaves the bowl via the gravity disc, and
leaves the separator through the water/sludge
outlet.
Process Cycle
1. A specific amount of water is added to the 1
separator bowl to form a water seal.
X025009B
1. Sealing water
2. The feeding of unprocessed oil to the

centre of the separator bowl starts.
15
2 The Process
3. During the separation process sludge and 1

water accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bowl. Cleaned oil is fed from the
separator by the integrated paring disc. 2
Excessive water leaves the bowl through 3
the water/sludge outlet to the sludge tank.
X025010B
1. Unprocessed oil
2. Processed oil
3. Water
4. After the preset time between discharge

sequences, the oil feeding stops.
5. Displacement water is added to the bowl. 1

The displacement water reduces the oil
loss at the following sludge discharge.
2
3
X025011B
1. Displacement water
2. Processed oil
3. Water
6. A sludge discharge is initiated
X025012A
The next process cycle starts with adding of

water for a new water seal.
16
2 The Process
2.2 Definition of Terms

Preset time between sludge discharge When this time has elapsed after a sludge
sequences discharge, the next discharge is initiated.
(Parameter value)
Water seal (Parameter value) Water, added to the separator bowl to prevent oil
from escaping at the water outlet.
Displacement water Water, added to the separator bowl to displace
the oil and ensure there is reduced loss of oil at
sludge discharge.
Purifier A separator that cleans the oil from water and
sludge with continuous evacuating of separated
water.
17
S and P Flex separation
Operating instructions
Printed 02-2017
Book No. 584612-02 V10
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 Operating 5
1.1 Before First Startup 5
1.2 Control Panel 8
1.3 Manual Start from Standstill 10
1.4 Automatic Start from Standstill 18
1.5 During Separation 19
1.6 Stop 22
1.7 Emergency Stop 24
1.8 After Emergency Stop 25
1.9 Manual Operation of the Separation
System 27
1.10 Cleaning In Place 31
1.10.1 CIP Start 31
1.10.2 CIP Running 33
1.10.3 CIP Stop 34
1.11 Check if separator bowl is clogged 36

1.12 Intervals Between Sludge Discharges 37
1.12.1 Background 37
1.12.2 Recommended intervals between sludge
discharges 37
1.12.3 Fuel oil cleaning 38
1.12.4 Lubricating oil cleaning 38
1.12.5 Bowl inspection 40
1.13 Heater Control (optional) 41

1.13.1 Control of the electric heater (optional) 43
1.13.2 Control of the CBM heater (optional) 44
1.13.3 If heater not controlled or external 45
1.13.4 Heater shut down 45
1.14 Cross connection/serial operation 46

1.14.1 Set up communication 46
1.14.2 Configure parameters 46
1.14.3 Cross connection 47
1.14.4 Serial operation 47
1.15 Programmable Inputs and Outputs 48

1.15.1 Inputs 48
1.15.2 Outputs 48
1.15.3 Common alarm indication 49
1.16 I/O Test Function 50
3
1.17 Operation without all sensors

(Emergency operation) 54
1.17.1 System Without Speed Sensor 54
1.17.2 System Without Vibration Sensor 54
1.17.3 System Without Cover Switch 54
1.17.4 System With PT1 Disabled 55
1.17.5 System With PT4 Disabled 55
1.17.6 System With PT5 Disabled (S-separator only) 55
1.17.7 System With TT1/TT2 Disabled 56
1.17.8 Control of Sludge Pump, Level in Sludge Tank, and
Butterfly Valve 56
1.17.9 System Without Feed Pump 57
1.17.10 System Without Water Transducer (S-separator
only) 58
1.17.11 Purifier Operation (only valid for S 805 and S 815) 59
4
1 Operating
1.1 Before First Startup

The Control Panel must be configured to suit
the system components.
1. Check that the separator is correctly

assembled and connected to power supply
of correct voltage and frequency. The
control panel must be ON.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start.
All couplings, covers and guards must be in
place and properly tightened. Failure to do so
may lead to breakdown.
X024761A
NG
WARNI
!
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation
and earthing (grounding).
NOTE
Check that the Emergency Stop Box is properly

installed and functioning correctly.
NG
WARNI 50 Hz?
!
60 Hz?
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement
with the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting
overspeed may cause breakdown. P003606B
5
1 Operating
NG
WARNI
!
Use the separation system for the purpose, and
within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure
to do so could cause a violent breakdown.
2. Check the oil sump level. If necessary, top

up until oil starts to run from the oil-filling
hole.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage the

separator bearings.
X024762A
Rotation Direction
Check the rotation of the bowl using the I/O test
function. See 1.16 I/O Test Function on page
50. The motor fan must rotate in a clockwise
direction.
ON
CAUTI
!
separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating parts
can loosen.
X023719B
Operating Air Pressure

Check that the air supply is correct (500 – 800
kPa or 5 – 8 Bar).
6
1 Operating
Operating Water Pressure

Check that the operating water pressure is
sufficient (200 – 800 kPa or 2 – 8 Bar).
NOTE
The LEDs on the water block and connectors indicate

that the valve has power on. They do not indicate if the
valve is clogged (an alarm is given if this is the case).
Emergency Stop Push Box

Check that the Emergency Stop Box is located
close to the separator system and electrically
connected to the Control Panel
NOTE
If the Emergency Stop Box is not connected, the

system will not start.
7
1 Operating
1.2 Control Panel

To start the Control Panel, switch on the main
power switch on the control cabinet.
General
The Control Panel has three main lists.
• Operation
• Alarms
• Setting
Operation List
To access the Operation List at any time during
the operation process press the ‘Return button’
repeatedly until the Operation List is reached. 7 8 9
The list gives information on the following where 4 5 6

installed: 1 2 3
• Feed Flow . 0
• Time to discharge, min REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
• Speed (SS), rpm FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
• Pressure (PT1, PT4, PT5)

X023912A
• Temperature (TT1, TT2)

• Vibration (VIB)
• Transducer value
Press the arrow buttons to go up or down in

the list.
7 8 9
4 5 6
NOTE
1 2 3
During operation, the ‘Operation’ list is active on the
. 0
display. The present stage of operation, for example
‘SEPARATION’, shows on display together with REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
operating information such as present temperature.

CIP
Press the downward ‘Arrow’ button to go down the list. FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
X023914A
For further information regarding alarms, see

the Alarms and Fault Finding booklet.
For further information regarding parameters,

see the Parameter List booklet
8
1 Operating
At any time during operation, the operator can

initiate a STOP sequence by pressing the ‘Stop’
button. 7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
FEED SLUDGE CLEANING
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023920A
NOTE
If control panel black screen appear.

See “Alarms & Fault finding” manual.
9
1 Operating
1.3 Manual Start from Standstill

Press the ‘Start’ button. The operator can
select to start the system manually by setting
parameter P130 to ‘stepwise’. 7 8 9
4 5 6
NOTE 1 2 3
. 0
First start-up is always manual and not dependant on
P130 setting. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
A rotation test must be carried out using the I/O test CIP
FEED CLEANING
function prior to first start-up. PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP IN PLACE
NOTE
First start-up after power off should always be carried

out manually!
NOTE
If a butterfly valve is installed, it must be opened

manually before that the system can start.
X023911A
ON
CAUTI
!
separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating parts
can loosen.
If speed sensor, vibration sensor, and frame

cover switch are installed (P113, P114, and
P115 = yes), the operator can select to start the
system automatically by setting parameter P130
to ‘automatic’.
10
1 Operating
If the power has been off and/or the separator

bowl cover has been removed a number of
questions which have to be answered before the
system can be started are shown on the display:
‘Has the bowl been dismantled? YES, NO’

(S-type separator only)
7 8 9
Use the ‘arrow’ buttons to move to the alternative
you want. 4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023914A
When the alternative you want is blinking, press

the ‘Enter’ button.
1. If the bowl has been dismantled choose
‘YES’ Manual start only is possible.
If no work has been carried out on the bowl, 7 8 9
choose ‘NO’.
For S-type separators ‘Proceed without 4 5 6
calibration’ appears on the display. 1 2 3
Stepwise/automatic start is possible (set
. 0
using parameter P 130).
For P-type separators the system then goes REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
to Standstill. CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
NOTE X023913A
If this is the first start, answer ‘YES’.
‘Assembled according to manual? YES, NO’
2. If the bowl has been dismantled and

assembled according to the instructions in
the Service Manual, choose ‘YES’.
(If ‘NO’ is chosen, the system goes to
‘STANDSTILL’).
‘Bowl cleaned? YES, NO’

(S-type separator only)
3. If the bowl has been cleaned choose ‘YES’.

‘Proceed with calibration’ appears on the
display. Local manual start only possible.
If the bowl has not been cleaned, choose
‘NO’. ‘Proceed without calibration’ appears
on the display. Stepwise/automatic start is
possible (set using parameter P 130).
11
1 Operating
Start
1. The feed pump (if installed) starts.
The LED on the start button flashes, the 7 8 9

LED for the feed pump lights, and text
‘Starting feed pump’ shows on the display. 4 5 6
1 2 3
The start button LED shines steadily and
the display shows either ‘To start heater, . 0
press start button’, or ‘To start separator, REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
press start button’.

CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023911A
12
1 Operating
2. Press the start button a second time.
The heater (if installed) starts. 7 8 9

LED for the heater lights, and text “Starting 1 2 3
heater” shows on the display.
. 0
Wait for increasing temperature. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
Cold Start Function FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
If the viscosity of the oil is high (low

temperature), a smooth heater start-up is
preferred. The temperature up to which the
cold-start gain factor P126 is active is set in
parameter P125. Above this temperature
the normal P-constant P123 is used.
If the temperature has not reached the

value in parameters P184 (HFO/LO low
temperature limit) within the time specified
in parameter P169 (alarm delay), alarm
‘A24 Temperature increase too slow’ will X023911A
show on the display.
If the temperature feedback is correct

(reading on temperature sensor TT1 above
value in parameter P184), the start button
LED shines steadily and the display shows
‘To start separator, press start button’.
13
1 Operating
3. Press the start button a third time.
The separator motor starts. 7 8 9

LED for the separator lights, and text 1 2 3
‘Starting separator’ shows on the display.
. 0
Wait for speed feedback (if speed sensor REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
installed), or until the separator max. start

CIP
time (4 minutes) has elapsed. FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
If the speed has not increased to over

90 rpm within 10 seconds after contactor
K2 response, alarm ‘A96 Slow start
acceleration’ shows on the display.
If the low speed limit value in parameter

P180 has not been reached before the
separator max. start time has elapsed,
alarm ‘A95 Separator motor run-up time
too long’ shows on the display.
If the separator is running above the low X023911A
speed limit, the start button LED shines

steadily, and the display shows the heading
‘RECIRCULATION’ and text ‘To start
separation, press start button’.
14
1 Operating
4. Press the start button a fourth time.
If the feed temperature is below the 7 8 9

value in P184, the controller stays in
RECIRCULATION mode. The LED on 4 5 6
the start button flashes, and text ‘Waiting 1 2 3
in RECIRCULATION for separation
. 0
temperature’ shows on the display.
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
If the correct feed temperature is reached,

CIP
the controller changes automatically FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
to SEPARATION mode via a transition

sequence which is shown on the display.
The start button LED shines steadily,
and the display shows the heading
‘TRANSITION’.
If speed sensor not installed (P113 = no)

or disabled (P148 = 0), change over to
RECIRCULATION/SEPARATION takes
place when the separator max. start time
has elapsed.
X023911A
NOTE
The time in ‘RECIRCULATION’ is limited by timer

P178 to avoid overheating of the separator.
15
1 Operating
Start S-type separator start sequence
START
command
Has the bowl been No

dismantled?
Yes
Assembled according No
to manual? STANDSTILL
Yes
Bowl cleaned? No Proceed without calibration *
local or remote **, auto ** or stepwise
start possible
Yes
Proceed with
calibration * Change to
local stepwise SEPARATION
start only
Change to
SEPARATION
Transition * consists of: Transition *
Start discharge (step 4) consists of:
Displacement (step 1) Calibration Discharge (step 2)
discharge (step 5) Discharge with P244 instead of
(step 2) with P244 instead of P231
P231 Bowl leak/water transd. Bowl leak/water
test (step 3) transd. test (step 3)
SEPARATION
16
1 Operating
Start P-type separator start sequence
START
command
Assembled according to No
STANDSTILL
manual?
Yes
Proceed with start sequence
local start only
17
1 Operating
1.4 Automatic Start from Standstill

The operator can select to start the system
automatically by setting parameter P130 to
‘automatic’.
The control panel automatically goes through

the same procedure as described under Manual
Start from Standstill.
If the bowl has not been dismantled or cleaned,

the previously calculated filling time (parameter
P233) is used, a discharge sequence and a
bowl leakage/water transducer test are run, and
the system goes into SEPARATION mode.
The following equipment must be installed for

automatic start:
• Vibration monitor
• Speed sensor
• Frame cover switch
18
1 Operating
1.5 During Separation

Observe information on the control panel
display. The times in each sequence are shown
in the bottom left-hand corner of the display
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
If strong vibration occurs, press the emergency stop
button and evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration may P003606A
then become violent and result in breakdown.
NG
WARNI
!
Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
X023716A
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.
ON
CAUTI
!
Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.
19
1 Operating
Discharge sequences run automatically at

preset intervals (timer P220).
Discharge sequence can also be run manually

by pressing the ‘Discharge’ button.
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
FEED CLEANING
PUMP IN PLACE
X023923A
20
1 Operating
The Sludge Pump runs during discharge or

when there is high level in the sludge tank, or
can be started manually by pressing the ‘Sludge 7 8 9
Pump’ button on the control panel.
4 5 6
1 2 3
NOTE . 0
Do not run the sludge pump longer than necessary. If REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
the pump is run while dry it can be damaged. CIP

FEED CLEANING
PUMP IN PLACE
X023922A
In SEPARATION mode, the feed pump is

running, the feed has reached separation
temperature (the heater is working) and the
separator is running at full speed.
Feed valve V1 is open to the separator inlet.
21
1 Operating
1.6 Stop
ON
CAUTI
!
Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the power.
ON
CAUTI
!
Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge
in connection with stop.
To stop the system:
The operator can stop the system when in the

‘START’, RECIRCULATION’, or ‘SEPARATION’
modes.
1. Stop the system by pushing the ‘Stop’

button on the control panel. The following
sequence takes place: 7 8 9
• A stop discharge and flushing 4 5 6

sequence are initiated (does not apply 1 2 3
to stop from ‘START’).
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
NOTE CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
Filling and flushing are not performed if the

discharge feedback has not been received
X023920A
22
1 Operating
• The separator motor is turned off and

the stop timer starts running. At the
same time, the heater is turned off
(see 1.13.4 Heater shut down on page
45. The system waits for the feed
temperature and speed to decrease.
• If the speed limit in P180 (low speed
limit) is not reached within 3 minutes,
alarm ‘A94 Bowl speed high during
STOP’ is given.
• When the bowl speed has reached
4000 rpm, closing water valve SV16 is
activated for 1 second in order to keep
the bowl closed.
• If speed sensor not installed (P113
= no) or disabled (P148 = 0), SV16
opens for 1 second 5 minutes after the
separator motor has been turned off.
• When 3 minutes has elapsed, the feed
pump is turned off.
• The system waits for the speed sensor
(if installed) to indicate zero speed.
When the bowl has been still for 60
seconds, ‘STAND STILL’ shows on the
display.
• If speed sensor not installed (P113 =
no) or disabled (P148 = 0), ‘STAND
STILL’ is shown when the stop timer
has elapsed.
• The sludge pump runs for 10 seconds
after STAND STILL is reached if
stopped from SEPARATION mode or
RECIRCULATION mode.
• All equipment except the sludge pump
(which can still be run manually) is
now deactivated.
NOTE
If the system is switched off, it can in most cases

be switched on again without waiting for the
separator to slow down. See 1.3 Manual Start
from Standstill on page 10, and the Alarms
and Fault Finding booklet.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
The system must not be restarted with the separator
rotating if high vibration alarm has been given.
23
1 Operating
1.7 Emergency Stop
NG
WARNI
!
If an emergency situation or unusually strong vibration
occurs, press the Emergency Stop button and
evacuate the room.
X024579A
If oil spray, feed pump is stopped by emergency stop
button.
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop while
the separator is still rotating.
The following sequence occurs:
• The power to heater pump and separator

motor is shut-down immediately.
• Stop timer starts.
• If a steam heater is installed, the steam
shutoff valve is forced to close.
• Closing water valve SV16 opens for 15
seconds.
SV10 is open for 15 seconds if the speed is
supervised and the speed is over P255, or
if there is no speed supervision.
• All other equipment is deactivated.
NOTE
In order to be able to restart, the system must be at

standstill.
24
1 Operating
1.8 After Emergency Stop

Separator standstill
Dismantling work must not be started before
all rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work.
The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable, must
be off. I00293CD
Avoid accidental start
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that separator has come to a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work.
Remedy the cause

The cause of the emergency must be remedied
before attempting to restart the separator.
If the cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving
parts thoroughly checked.
NG
WARNI
!
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
25
1 Operating
Separator reassembled
The separator must be fully reassembled with
all covers and guards in place and tightened
before unlocking the power supply and starting
the system.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart.
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened. Failure to do so may lead to X023714B
breakdown.
NOTE
Check that the Emergency Stop Box is properly

installed and functioning correctly.
NOTE
Check that all ancillary equipment, in particular the

heater, is functioning correctly.
26
1 Operating
1.9 Manual Operation of the Separation System

In the event of a case where the Control
System has a total failure or extremely high
water content, the system can be run manually
by a competent engineer using the following
instructions:
1. Ensure all oil system manual valves are in

the correct position.
2. Fit a jumper between terminals X1:113 -

114 (for separator) and X1:115 - 116 (for
feed pump) in the EPC.
3. Start the feed pump.
4. Start the separator.
5. Heat the oil to the correct separating

temperature.
Where there is a Heatpac, type EHM

electric heater, use jumpers in the power
unit to bridge terminals X12.11 – X12.6,
X12.11 – X12.9, and X12.11 – X12.7.
Switch on the heater and use the switch to
regulate the temperature.
NOTE
Remove the jumpers after emergency operation.
6. When the separator is up to speed and

the correct oil flow and temperature are
achieved, close the bowl. Open SV15 for
time specified in parameter P244 (See
Parameter List booklet). Wait 15 seconds.
Open SV16 for time specified in Parameter
P243. The bowl is now closed.
7. Temperature, flow, and backpressure must

remain constant throughout.
27
1 Operating
8. Remove the water outlet pipe at D.
X028098A
9. Screw in screw A to move the paring tube

to its innermost position.
10. Open SV10 as follows:
Separator Time Amount bowl

Type (Sec.) filled (Liter)
S921, 926, 927, 48 0,7
928 A
S936, 937, 938 42 1,1
S946, 947, 948 71 1,9
S956, 957, 958 34 3,1
S966, 967, 968 51 4,7
S976, 977, 978 38 7
S986, 987, 988 44 11 X028099A
11. Open SV1 to open oil feed V1.
12. Open SV5. This will open the water outlet

valve V5.
13. Carefully screw out screw A until water

starts to come from D.
28
1 Operating
14. Lock screw A in position.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
During operation open SV16 for about 5 seconds
every 10 to 15 minutes to ensure that the bowl
remains closed.
Discharge
1. Close oil feed V1 using SV1.
2. Close water outlet V5 using SV5.
3. Open SV10 to add displacement water as

follows:

S921, 926, 927, 60 0,9
928
S936, 937, 938 49 1,3
S946, 947, 948 79 2,1
S956, 957, 958 44 4
S966, 967, 968 59 5,4
S976, 977, 978 59 10,8
S986, 987, 988 59 14,7
4. Open SV15 until a discharge is heard

(about 3 seconds).
5. Wait 15 seconds.
6. Open SV16 for time specified in Parameter

P243.
7. Open SV10 as follows:

S921, 926, 927, 48 0,7
928
S936, 937, 938 42 1,1
S946, 947, 948 71 1,9
S956, 957, 958 34 3,1
S966, 967, 968 51 4,7
S976, 977, 978 38 7
S986, 987, 988 44 11
29
1 Operating
8. Open V1.
9. Open V5.
10. Maintain backpressure at normal setting

throughout.
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
Discharging of the bowl, and supervision of the
operation, is now completely manual and under the
direct responsibility of the engineer who has placed
the separation system in the manual control mode.
30
1 Operating
1.10 Cleaning In Place

The use of Cleaning In Place (CIP) equipment
is recommended for best separation results. For
further information on the CIP equipment, see
the CIP booklet, bookno. 1817261.
1.10.1 CIP Start

CIP can be selected from STAND STILL only,
and only from a local control panel.
7 8 9
Press the CIP button to select CIP.
4 5 6
1 2 3
NOTE
. 0
During CIP the separator is running at full speed, but REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
feed pump, heater, process valves, temperature and

CIP
pressure supervision and water transducer MT60 are FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
neither controlled nor supervised.
ON
CAUTI
!
Avoid accidental start of feed pump
supply for feed pump.
Leakage of Hot oil may occur if feed pump is
accidentally started.
X023921A
31
1 Operating
Connect hoses for CIP liquid before pressing

“start” button.
7 8 9
With CIP selected from STAND STILL, press
the ‘START’ button to start the separator motor. 4 5 6
The motor starts unless the system prevents 1 2 3
start, or alarms are active.
. 0
Wait for speed feedback. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
• Speed has to increase to above 90 rpm FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
within 10 seconds after contactor K2

response, otherwise alarm ‘A96 Slow start
acceleration’ will be shown on the display.
• Speed limit in parameter P180 has to be
reached within 4 minutes, otherwise alarm
‘A95 Separator motor run-up time too long’
will be shown on the display.
• When the separator is running above
low speed limit (P180), or 4 minutes has
elapsed if speed sensor not installed (P113
= no) or disabled (P148 = 0), a message
to start the cleaning liquid supply is given X023911A
to the operator.
32
1 Operating
1.10.2 CIP Running
NOTE
When the bowl has reached normal speed, a bowl

closing procedure will be performed.
While the CIP system is running, closing water

valve SV16 opens for 2 seconds and closes for
the time set in parameter P228 (pulse interval) 7 8 9
repeatedly. The sludge pump runs when there 4 5 6
is high level in the sludge tank or when activated
1 2 3
by pressing the ‘SLUDGE PUMP’ button on the
control panel. . 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
FEED CLEANING
PUMP IN PLACE
X023922A
A discharge can be activated manually during

the CIP process by pressing the ‘DISCHARGE’
button on the control panel. 7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
FEED CLEANING
PUMP IN PLACE
X023923A
33
1 Operating
1.10.3 CIP Stop

Stop the CIP process by pressing the ‘Stop’
button on the control panel. The CIP process
can be restarted. 7 8 9
• The separator motor is turned off. Alarm 4 5 6

delay (3 minutes) starts, and stop timer 1 2 3
starts. If the speed limit in parameter P180
. 0
(alarm limit bowl speed low) is not reached
within 3 minutes, alarm ‘A9 Bowl speed REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
high during STOP’ is given.

CIP
PUMP
• When the bowl speed has reached 4000 PUMP IN PLACE
rpm, closing water valve SV16 is activated

for 1 second in order to keep the bowl
closed.
• If there is no speed sensor installed
(parameter P113 = no) or disabled
(parameter P148 = 0), SV16 opens for 1
second 5 minutes after the separator motor
has been turned off.
• The system waits for the speed sensor (if
installed) to indicate zero speed. When the
bowl has been still for 60 seconds, ‘STAND
STILL’ shows on the display.
• If there is no speed sensor installed X023920A
(parameter P113 = no) or if speed sensor

disabled (parameter P148 = 0), ‘STAND
STILL’ is shown when stop timer has
elapsed.
• If the bowl speed has been above P180,
or the start timer has elapsed, the
sludge pump runs for 10 seconds after
‘STANDSTILL’.
• Hold the ‘CIP’ button pressed for 5 seconds
to leave CIP mode.
After cleaning:
1. Open the heater drain valve until the
flushing water has drained.
2. Close the drain valve.
3. Remove the CIP connections.
4. Return the turnable connections to their

former positions and re-tighten.
34
1 Operating
5. Re-open the valves before and after the

heater.
ON
CAUTI
!
Health Risk
Do not forget to disconnect the CIP equipment and
re-connect the process connections.
35
1 Operating
1.11 Check if separator bowl is clogged

Valid for Purifiers (not Alcap or Clarifiers)
Purifiers have no automatic indication if the bowl
is clogged or filled with too much solids.
Recommendation is to check each Bunker
analyze report and determine if there is any risk
for a higher than normal sludge production.
The time between each sludge discharge should
then be reduced accordingly.
From time to time , and especially when a new

Bunker is introduced ,it is advisable to do as
follows :
- Introduce water into the bowl by open

manually the SV10 solenoid valve , on the
Operating Water Block.
- Check that this water is coming out from
the bowl by unscrewing the Inspection Plug
on the sludge pipe.
Please however ,make sure that the
machine is not about to make a discharge!
Splash hazard.
X027007A
If water is seen flowing in the pipe, turn off SV10

and keep operating as before.
The bowl is not clogged.
If no water is seen , then the bowl is clogged.

Make a discharge.
If still the water is not seen in the Inspection
plug ,turn off SV 10 and shut down the Purifier
system.
Open and clean up the bowl.
NOTE
By opening the Inspection Plug without adding any

water , it can also be verified that no small oil leakage
is escaping from the bowl during operation.
36
1 Operating
1.12 Intervals Between Sludge Discharges

(Valid for P 625/635/626/636/646 only)
1.12.1 Background
NG
WARNI
!
Experience has shown that if intervals between
sludge discharges are too long, a compact and hard
sludge cake can accumulate. On discharge, this cake
may break up and be discharged unevenly causing
imbalance in the bowl. If imbalance is excessive,
there is risk for serious mechanical damage and injury
to personnel.
Recommendations are given regarding initial

intervals between sludge discharges for different
applications. The setting may subsequently
have to be changed after actual inspection of
the bowl.
1.12.2 Recommended intervals

between sludge discharges
Many factors influence accumulation and
hardening of sludge between the discharges,
so the appropriate interval depends on local
conditions. However, in order to have a
reasonable starting point the following table
shows recommended initial discharge intervals
and operating times to first inspection.
37
1 Operating
1.12.3 Fuel oil cleaning

Type of fuel Recommendations
Initial intervals between Time to first bowl inspection
discharges
Distillate (1.5 – 6 cSt/40 °C) 4 hours 1 week
Marine Diesel Oil (max. 14cSt/40 °C) 2 hours 1 week
Heavy Fuel Oil ( Max interval ) 1 hour ( 2 hours ) 2 days
Conditions may change completely when

bunkers are changed. Therefore, great care
must be given to the discharge interval setting
for each new bunker. In case the actually used
discharge interval exceeds the recommended
initial value, the interval setting has to be
reduced, according to the table above, when
a new, unfamiliar bunker is separated. Use of
unstable fuel or mixing of incompatible fuel oils
may give precipitation of sludge and overloading
of the separator.
1.12.4 Lubricating oil cleaning

Continuous operation:
In a new lubricating oil system the oil is initially
clean but as it gets dirtier the interval between
discharges will have to be shortened until a
“steady state” is reached. Following information
refers to systems in “steady state”.
Type of fuel Recommended intervals for Crosshead and Trunk

Initial intervals between Time to first bowl inspection
discharges
Main lubricating oil system 1 - 2 hours 1 week
If separator has been out of operation:

If the separator has been out of service for 24
hours or longer, while the engine has been
running, the interval between discharges has to
be shortened. In this case the recommendation
is:
• Discharge interval 5 minutes until the whole

oil volume has passed twice through the
separator.
• After that resume normal discharge interval.
38
1 Operating
Intermittent operation:
For installations where one separator serves
one engine which is temporarily stopped the
following recommendations apply: If the engine
is to be stopped for 24 hours or less:
• Keep the separator in operation for 8 hours

after the engine is stopped.
• Start the separator 8 hours before the
engine is started again.
Doing so most of the suspended particles and

water condensate will be removed from the
system and not settle in the sump tank. For
installations where one separator serves more
than one engine the following recommendations
apply:
• Continuous use of the separator whenever

possible.
• Frequent switches between the engine
systems to be cleaned. In a typical case
with one separator serving 2–4 auxiliary
engines switching after maximum 24 hours
of cleaning.
Discharge interval:
Engine has been in operation with-out Engine has not been in operation since last
cleaning of the system oil cleaning of system oil
Discharge interval 5 min. Normal discharge interval
Duration until the whole oil volume has passed
twice through the separator
After that resume to normal discharge interval
39
1 Operating
1.12.5 Bowl inspection

To check if the initially selected interval is
appropriate, the bowl should be inspected after
a short test period shown in the previous tables.
If sludge space is clean:
Interval may be prolonged with steps of 15

minutes, but it must not exceed three times the
recommended initial interval.
“Sludge space is clean” means that no

noticeable amount of hard sludge remains in
the sludge space.
If sludge space is dirty:
Interval has to be shortened.
When the bowl is opened for routine cleaning,

the sludge space should always be inspected
and evaluated. If necessary, the interval
between discharges should then be changed
accordingly.
NOTE
Alfa Laval assumes no responsibility for the actual

choice of discharge intervals, as these entirely depend
on local conditions.
40
1 Operating
1.13 Heater Control (optional)

The temperature in the feed inlet is normally
supervised via TT1, and can be controlled by
a heater via TT2. Supervision and control are
active even if one of the sensors is disabled.
TT2 can be used by the customer; no alarm is
given. TT2 is disabled in this case.
The heater is controlled according to

temperature setpoint P249 using a PI-regulator
with output:
Y(k) = Y(k+1) + P + l
where the proportional part
P = Kp *(e(k) - e(k-1) )
and integral part
l = Ki * e(k) / Ti
The error e = SetValue - ActualValue, is the

difference between the desired value (P249)
and the actual value (reading on TT) where
k = point of time
The tuning of the regulator is done by modifying

the amplification
Kp = Ki = 100/P123 (P123 is known as the
proportional band width) and integral time Ti =
P124.
Every second a new output Y is calculated, i.e.

the interval between each k is 1s.
With P119 it is possible to select heater control

mode:
• no (no heater controlled)

• electric (electric heater controlled, P120
active)
• steam (steam heater controlled, P121
active)
• external (start/stop request via
programmable output, heater not
controlled)
41
1 Operating
Cold start function

If the viscosity of the oil is high (low
temperature), a faster start-up of the heater
might be favourable (a higher Kp). The
temperature, up to which the cold-start gain
factor P126 is active, is set in P125. Above this
temperature the normal P-band P123 is used.
Example: P123 = 30, P126 = 40 results in

a P-band of 0.40 x 30 = 12 as long as the
temperature is below P125.
42
1 Operating
1.13.1 Control of the electric

heater (optional)
P119 = electric. The following parameters
should not be displayed in the parameter list:
P121, P122.
Five outputs and one input are used to control

the electric heater:
• three relay outputs to up to three fixed

power steps depending on the heater size
(P120)
• one variable load output
• one output "heater on"
• one input "heater fault" (see A05)
The total heater capacity (100%) is the sum of

the power available at the three fixed steps, plus
the power available via the variable load output
(always 16 kW nominal).
This means, if the output signal to the heater is

100%, all available power steps and the variable
load output have to be activated continuously.
Output signal 0% means that all outputs are

deactivated.
If the output signal is a value between 0 and

100%, the activation pattern of the outputs has
to be calculated using the table below.
Output power (in % of the total available power)

Heater size (kW Power step 1 Power step 2 Power step 3 Variable load
nominal, selected % % % output
with P120) %
7, 8 0 0 0 10 x 10
14, 16 0 0 0 10 x 10
22, 24 33,5 0 0 10 x 6,6
36, 40 20 40 0 10 x 4
50, 56 14,3 28,5 28,5 10 x 2,9
65, 72 11 22 45 10 x 2,2
100 14,3 28,5 28,5 10 x 2,9
130 11 22 45 10 x 2,2
For each value of P120 the contribution of each

power step to the total available heater capacity
is given in percent. First use the fixed power
steps to fill the power requirement as far as
possible, then use the variable load output to
fine adjust the output.
43
1 Operating
NOTE
It is important that the fixed power steps are working

continuously when activated. Use an established
method e.g. delay drop out.
As a new output signal is calculated every

second, the variable load output is activated for
parts (0.1) of a second.
0.1 s activates 1/10 of the available power on

the output = 1.6 kW.
0.5 s means 8 kW and so on.
Example 1: Heater size 72 kW and output signal

to the heater 50%. Activate step 3 (for 1s) and
activate variable. output for 0.2s.
Example 2: Heater size 16 kW and output signal

to the heater 88%. Activate variable output for
0.9s.
Example 3: Heater size 130 kW and output

signal to heater 88%. Activate steps 1, 2, and
3 (for 1s).
To prevent problems with too heavy momentary

load at start of the heater, only one output
can be activated per second during the first 6
seconds. After that time all outputs can be used
simultaneously.
1.13.2 Control of the CBM heater

(optional)
P119 = steam. In this case alarm A05 is not
supervised.
The steam heater is controlled using three relay

outputs:
• increment steam valve

• decrement steam valve
• steam shut-off valve (hold signal)
The position of the valve is not supervised.
The transition time of the steam valve is set in

P121 (time from fully open to fully closed position
and vice versa). The controller function defines
if the valve should be opened (incremented) or
closed(decremented) in relation to its actual
position.
44
1 Operating
The signal to the steam valve is pulsed with

an on-time corresponding to the temperature
controller output. Example: output = +50%
means the increment steam valve output is
activated for 0.50 s/s.
When the heater is stopped, the decrement

steam valve signal is on for the time set in P121.
The hold signal is off if the start of the heater is
interlocked (e.g. on alarms A01, A20).
1.13.3 If heater not controlled or

external
It is possible to run the system without heater
control (P119 = no).
In this case alarms A05, A24 and A25 are not

supervised.
It is also possible to run the system with external

heater (P119 = external). The ‘heater on’ signal
is given via a programmable output.
In this case alarm A05 is not supervised.
The description for the system with external

heater is also valid if one of the temperature
sensors is disabled or on sensor error
(A22/A30).
1.13.4 Heater shut down

The system waits for the feed temperature to
decrease (5 degrees or below P184). If the
time in P173 has elapsed and the temperature
feedback was not received, alarm ‘A25
Temperature not decreasing’ is given.
When the temperature feedback has been

received, or P173 has elapsed, P256 is started.
When P256 has elapsed, the feed pump (if
running) is turned off. If the feedback signal
from the pump contactor is not received within
5 seconds, alarm ‘A01 Pump starter failure’ is
given.
NOTE
Heater shutdown is also initiated at STOP request

during START if feed pump and heater are on but the
separator is not running.
45
1 Operating
1.14 Cross connection/serial operation

Valid for P-type separators
It might be desirable to cross-connect two

separator modules, or operate them in series.
For that purpose the EPC60s must be able to
communicate via Ethernet.
1.14.1 Set up communication

The EPC60s may communicate over any
customer defined network or be connected
directly to each other 1) .
The IP-addresses of the EPC60s must be set

so there are no IP-conflict since all EPC60s
are normally delivered with the same default
address.
The node and IP addresses have to be set as
follows:
Master IP 192.168.0.1
Master node 6.
Slave IP 192.168.0.2
Slave node 4
The node address cannot be modified.
1)Direct connection requires a crossover twisted
pair cable to be used since the EPC60 does not
have automatic MDI/MDI-X configuration.
1.14.2 Configure parameters

The parameter to select desired function is
P145.
The following values are possible:
• disabled (default)
• cross master
• cross slave
• serial master
• serial slave
The adjustment of P145 is only possible, if both

systems are in STAND STILL.
The communication between the two control

systems is supervised. At communication error
an alarm (A136) is given and both systems will
go to STOP if running.
46
1 Operating
1.14.3 Cross connection

One separator module can use the feed pump
and heater of the other one.
• P145 is set to “cross master” in the system

which separator is used. The heater/feed
pump of this system is automatically
disabled. The display shows CROSS
CONNECTION MASTER in STANDSTILL.
• P145 is set to “cross slave” in the system
which heater/feed pump is used. The
separator of this system is automatically
disabled. The display shows CROSS
CONNECTION SLAVE.
After adjustment of P145, only stepwise local

start from resp. panel is possible.
The separator is started/stopped and the

separator system is supervised from the master
panel as if heater and feed pump were not
installed. Temperature readings from the master
are transferred to the slave panel.
Heater and feed pump are started/stopped and

controlled from the slave panel. Alarms for the
heater and feed pump are generated in the
slave panel.
1.14.4 Serial operation

This function is required when two separators
should operate in series, i.e. the oil coming from
the first separator (usually a purifier) is further
purified in the second one (usually a clarifier,
but may be a purifier).
• P145 is set to “serial master” in the first

system. The display shows SERIAL
CONNECTION MASTER in STANDSTILL.
• P145 is set to “serial slave” in the second
system. The display shows SERIAL
CONNECTION SLAVE in STAND STILL.
After adjustment of P145, both systems are

started individually. The discharge interval is
set with P220 in the master system. The slave's
automatic discharge initiation is disabled.
Instead the master initiates a discharge in the
slave system every (P262) time after the own
discharge has been completed.
47
1 Operating
1.15 Programmable Inputs and Outputs

An extra I/O kit is available as an option. This kit
contains two boards, one with six programmable
digital inputs and one with six progammable
relay outputs. The customer can select an
optional function for each of these inputs and
outputs from a list of alternatives (see below).
1.15.1 Inputs
See parameters 139 to 144
Alternative Comments
0 None default
1 Remote start enter automatic start, only if REMOTE selected on
operator panel (pushbutton) Closed (pulse) = start
2 Remote stop enter stop sequence, works with REMOTE button in
any position Closed (pulse) = stop
3 Remote start feed pump the same as first push at stepwise start.
Closed (pulse) = start
4 External alarm used for e.g. a level switch in a tank. See alarm
A123.
Closed = alarm
5 Remote recirculation Request Recirculation, only if REMOTE selected on
operator panel (pushbutton) Closed = recirculation
6 New temperature set point EPC 60 uses temperature set point P250 during
start when the separator is switched off
1.15.2 Outputs
See parameters P133 to P138.
altId Alternative Comments

0 None default
1 Indication heater on/ start external program request "heater function on"
heater Closed = heater on
2 Indication separator motor on program request "separator motor on"
Closed = motor on
3 Stand still indication when stand still flag on Closed = stand still
4 Indication alarm A20 if alarm "Oil feed temp. high" active Closed = alarm
5 Indication alarm A21 if alarm "Oil feed temp. low" active Closed = alarm
6 Indication alarm A51 if alarm "Oil backpressure PT4 low" active Closed
= alarm
7 Indication feed pump on program request "feed pump on" Closed = feed
pump on
8 Remote start allowed allowed to start the system Closed = start allowed
48
1 Operating

9 Remote enabled remote button activated Closed = remote activated
10 Valve in sludge outlet controlled if pneumatic valve, see P131 and
Activation diagram Closed = open or close valve
(set with P131)
11 Common alarm Alternative Common alarm, Closed = no alarm, also
see separate description
12 Indication V1 Position of valve V1, Closed = feed on to separator
1.15.3 Common alarm indication

There are two separate outputs for indicating
status of the alarms. One is standard and the
other is available through the programmable
outputs.
Standard output
When there is no alarm active the contact is

closed. When an alarm is triggered the contact
opens. If another alarm is triggered the contact
will close for 0.5s and then open again. When
all alarms have been acknowledged by the
operator the contact will close.
Programmable output
Programmable output When there is no alarm

active the contact is closed. When an alarm is
triggered the contact opens. When all alarms
have been acknowledged by the operator and
reset (the fault that triggered the alarm no longer
persists) the contact will close.
49
1 Operating
1.16 I/O Test Function

Activity Reference/Limits
If system has active alarms, check and take actions before
starting the I/O test.
Press button F-step backwards and related arrows up ( C ) Acc. to IB(s)
and down ( E ) for Log –in into the I / O test.
Follow the list of I/O‘s (item 25-72) to check status of all el. Acc. to IB(s)
connections of the system including the operating function of
individual components.
OUTPUTS
K2 - Separator motor Valid for:
Check the operation and rotation of the separator motor. All S and P types
The output will only be activated for a short time.
Also check that the correct led is activated on the operating
panel.
If no operation, check jumpers according to electrical diagram.
K3 – Feed pump Optional
Check the operation and rotation of the feed pump. Valid for:
Also check that the correct led is activated on the operating All S and P types
panel.
If no operation, check jumpers according to electrical diagram.
V1 – 3 way valve Valid for:
Verify the operation of the valve, see also that the green diode All S and P types
on the valve connector is lit.
V4 – Oil outlet valve Valid for:
Cabinet fan Valid for:
Verify the operation of the fan mounted inside the electrical All S and P types
cabinet.
NG
WARNI
!
Electrocution Hazard
This operation require tests to be made with cabinet door open and
with power on. Beware of live parts.
Steam shutoff valve Optional
Verify the operation of the valve, see also that the green diode Valid for:
on the valve connector is lit. All S and P types
V5 - Drain valve Valid for:
Hold/reset vibration switch Optional
Ensure that the vibration switch is reset when this output is Valid for:
activated P605/615
SV10 – Displacement water valve Valid for:
50
1 Operating
SV15 Discharge valve Valid for:

SV16 – Closing water valve Valid for:
Steam decrease – Closing of steam valve Optional
Verify that the valve is moving towards closing position. Note Valid for:
that if the valve is already closed, an opening operation (see All S and P types
below) needs to be done prior to this test.
Steam increase – Opening of steam valve Optional
Verify that the valve is moving towards opening position. Valid for:
All S and P types
Programmable output 1
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Electric heater test Optional
Before the electric heater i/o-test, please ensure that the
electric power to the electric heater cabinet is turned OFF!
The operating voltage for the relays is supplied from control
cabinet.
Elheatvar – Variable output Optional
Check that the diodes on the 2 triacs inside the electric heater Valid for:
cabinet are lit. All S and P types
Heater on signal Optional
Check that the relay KA11 (diode, see picture below) and Valid for:
K11 (mechanical indication) in the electric heater cabinet is All S and P types
activated.
Note, leave this output activated (indicating 1 on display) when
proceeding with the tests of the fixed power steps below!
ElheatPS1 – Power step 1
Check that the relay KA12 (diode, see picture below) and
K12 (mechanical indication) in the electric heater cabinet is
activated. Optional Valid for: All S and P types
ElheatPS2 – Power step 2 Optional
activated.
ElheatPS3 Power step 3 Optional
activated.
51
1 Operating
INPUTS
Heater fault signal Optional
Check that this input is 1 as long as the output “Heater on” is Valid for:
activated. If not ok, check settings of over temperature device All S and P types
Go back to “Heater on” Item no. 47 and deactivate (0 on
display), then go back to this section and verify that “Heater
fault” is 0.
Estop – Emergency stop Valid for:
This input should be 1 when emergency stop button is not All S and P types
pushed.
Press emergency stop button and check that it goes to 0.
Feedback feedpump –
Not to be tested
Feedback separator - Contactor feedback
Not to be tested
Sludge tank level switch Optional
If not installed, check that the input is 1, if not? check if Valid for:
jumper is installed according to electrical diagram. All S and P types
If installed, manually operate the level switch, the input
should be 0 when high level.
Cover switch on separator frame Optional
Manually operate the cover switch, the input should be 1 when Valid for:
switch (and cover) is closed All S and P types
Sludge valve interlock Optional
Manually operate the sludge valve, the input should be 1 when Valid for:
the valve is closed. All S and P types
Programmable input 1
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
Not to be tested
ANALOGUE INPUTS
PT5 – Water outlet pressure transmitter 4-20mA Input
Check that the indication shows approx 0 bar. Valid for:
Note that if pipes are connected to the system, pressure might All S types
not be 0 bar.
MT – Water transducer, MT60 4-20mA Input
Check that the indication shows 30 pF ±5. Valid for:
Note that this value is only correct when sensor is in air (no All S types
media in pipes).
PT1 – Oil inlet pressure transmitter 4-20mA Input
Note that if pipes are connected to the system, pressure might All S and P types
not be 0 bar.
52
1 Operating
PT4 – Oil outlet pressure transmitter 4-20mA Input

Note that if pipes are connected to the system, pressure might All S and P types
not be 0 bar.
TT1 – Oil inlet temperature sensor 1 PT100 input
Check that the indication shows a relevant temperature. Valid for:
All S and P types
TT2 – Oil inlet temperature sensor 2 PT100 input
Check that the indication shows a relevant temperature. Valid for:
Note that the temperature should not deviate from TT1 with All S and P types
more than 2 °C
Speed sensor Namur input
In order to test this input, use the “Separator motor”, K2, sect Optional
1, I/O-test to start the separator (for a few seconds), then go Valid for:
back to this input and check the value, it shall be higher then All S and P625/626, P635/636/646
0 rpm. types
Vibration switch Optional
Check that this input goes to 0 when the switch is in tripped Valid for:
position P605/615 types
Vibration sensor 4-20mA Input
Check that the indication shows approx 3.5 mm. Optional
(Sensor should be installed with 3.5 mm from the axel) Valid for:
All S and P625/626, P635/636/646
types
53
1 Operating
1.17 Operation without all sensors (Emergency

operation)
If a sensor is malfunctioning it is possible to
disable it temporarily until it can be fixed or
replaced.
1.17.1 System Without Speed

Sensor
It is possible to run the system without speed
sensor (P113 = no).
In this case system control and supervision are

much more basic.
Alarms A90 – A97 are not supervised.
Remote start is not allowed.
The separator is started within 4 minutes and

stopped with stop timer.
This also applies if the speed sensor is disabled

(P148 = 0) or on alarm ‘A92, Bowl speed sensor
error’.
1.17.2 System Without Vibration

Sensor
It is possible to run the system without vibration
sensor (P114 = no).
In this case alarms A100 – A103 are not

supervised.
This also applies if the vibration sensor is

disabled (P132 = yes) or on alarm ‘A102,
Vibration sensor error’
1.17.3 System Without Cover

Switch
It is possible to run the system without cover
switch (P115 = no).
In this case alarms A110 – A111 are not

supervised.
54
1 Operating
This also applies if the cover switch is disabled

(P116 = yes).
1.17.4 System With PT1 Disabled

It is possible to run the system with PT1 disabled
(P157 = 0).
In this case alarms A40 – A42 and A44 are not

supervised.
This also applies on alarm ‘A42, Feed pressure

sensor PT1 error’.

(P153 = 0).
In this case alarms A50 – A52 and A54 – A59

are not supervised.
As a result, calibration of the water flow is

not possible. The old values are used for
displacement and conditioning water. Cold
start function is disabled. Bowl leakage test is
disabled.
This also applies on alarm ‘A52, Oil pressure


(S-separator only)
(P155 = 0).
In this case alarms A70 – A72 and A74 are not

supervised.
This also applies on alarm ‘A72, Water pressure

55
1 Operating
1.17.7 System With TT1/TT2

Disabled
It is possible to disable one of the temperature
sensors TT1 or TT2 with parameter P146.
The readings normally taken from the disabled
sensor is then replaced with the readings from
the other sensor in all sequences.
When a temperature transmitter is disabled the

corresponding sensor error alarm, A22 or A31,
is blocked.
Alarms A20, A21, A24 & A25 that normally are

triggered by TT1 readings should be triggered
by TT2 when TT1 is disabled.
When the system has a Modbus connection

(P129=Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU) it is
possible to use Modbus registers to receive
temperature readings. Both TT1 and TT2
are then disabled and alarms A22, A23, A30
& A31 are blocked. This mode is activated
when P146=Modbus. It is not possible select
this mode if the system is controlling a heater
(P119=steam or electric).
If P146=TT2 custom then all alarm from TT2 is

blocked. It is intended for installations where
TT2 is permanently not connected to the
EPC60.
1.17.8 Control of Sludge Pump,

Level in Sludge Tank, and
Butterfly Valve
The sludge accumulated in the bowl can be
discharged into an optional small sludge tank
with level switch. At high level signal a sludge
pump (P118 = yes) is running until the signal
is normal + 10 seconds . Otherwise see alarm
A120.
The level switch can be disabled (P159 = 0). In

this case A120 is blocked and the sludge pump
is running for 30 seconds at discharge (instead
of P234, see below).
The sludge pump is also activated during

certain timers. These running times are always
terminated by an extra pump running time
(e.g. during P234, or 5 seconds as in the
drain sequence). Note that this extra time is
independent of the other timers which may be
running simultaneously.
56
1 Operating
See also the Sequence diagram for other

occasions when the sludge pump is activated,
if selected (Parameter List chapter ‘2.2
Discharge’) .
The separator sludge outlet can contain a

manual butterfly valve which is used to close the
outlet when the separator is standing still.
Select with P131 (no, manual).
If P131 = no, alarm A122 is blocked.
1.17.9 System Without Feed Pump

It is possible to run the system without feed
pump (P127 = no).
In this case alarms A01 and A44 are not

supervised.
57
1 Operating
1.17.10 System Without Water

Transducer (S-separator
only)
It is possible to run the system without water
transducer (P117 = no).
In this case alarms A80 - A85 and A74 are not

supervised.
There is no calibration of the water flow. In

separation, automatic discharges are initiated
every 15 minutes (overrides P220). SV10 is
never activated (this means no displacement
before discharge and no conditioning water).
Water draining from the bowl is not allowed.
This also applies if the water transducer is

disabled (P128 = standby) or on alarm ‘A85,
MT60 fault’.
58
1 Operating
1.17.11 Purifier Operation (only

valid for S 805 and S 815)
If the water transducer should malfunction, the
separator can be converted to purifier operation
as long as the feed density is below 991 kg/m3.
Stop the separator and change the standard

gravity disc to a larger one suitable for the
density of the oil used.
Change Parameter P147 to ‘Purifier’.
Change Parameter P117 to ‘No’.
The system can now be restarted and run as

a purifier system.
59
P Flex Separation
Parameter list
Printed 06-2017
Book No. 585836-02 rev. 9
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 Parameter List 5
1.1 Setting List 5
2 Operation Modes 15
2.1 Change-over Sequence 15
2.2 Discharge 16
3 Programmable Inputs and

Outputs 17
3
1 Parameter List
1.1 Setting List

To access the Setting List at any time during
the operation process press the ‘Return button’
repeatedly until the Setting List is reached. 7 8 9
4 5 6
NOTE 1 2 3
. 0
Relevant parameters only are shown on the display.
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023912A
Press the arrow buttons to go up or down in the

list. The list consists of the following:
7 8 9
1. Parameters – List of all parameters.
Password protected. 4 5 6
To go directly to a parameter, enter the 1 2 3
parameter number.
. 0
2. Time settings – For setting date, time, etc.
Password protected. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
To go directly to a parameter, enter the FEED SLUDGE

CIP
CLEANING
parameter number. PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
3. Operation time – Different counters and X023914A
timers can be read.

4. I/O Test – Here it is possible to activate all
outputs and to read the status for all inputs,
for testing purposes.
5. Alarm history – List of alarms which have
been rectified. The latest alarm shows at
the top of the list.
6. System info
7. IP settings
8. Password / Login
9. Set contrast
5
1 Parameter List
When in the Parameter Menu a list item is

blinking, you can press the ‘Enter’ button to get
the parameter list. 7 8 9
To change the value of a parameter or to have
some information about the parameter you 4 5 6
move the cursor up/down with the arrow button. 1 2 3
When the cursor is in front of the desired
. 0
parameter, press information button to get more
information. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
Press the ‘Information’ button again to return to FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
your previous position.

X023915A
You can also change this setting – see below.
Press ‘Enter’ button you will see the actual

value, the max value and the min value. You can
change the value either by using the number 7 8 9
buttons to write in a value, or by choosing a
value from the list. Save any change by pressing 4 5 6
the ‘Enter’ button. 1 2 3
. 0
NOTE REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
Certain parameters can only be changed by the factory, FEED
PUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
CLEANING
IN PLACE
the chief engineer, or an Alfa Laval service engineer.

X023913A
Parameters are divided into three password

levels:
Level 0 – No password needed.
Level 1 – Possible to protect with password.
Level 2 – Alfa Laval password protected.
@ = These configuration parameters can only

be adjusted while the system is in STAND STILL
(not visible on the HMI in all other modes).
The present configuration is displayed in menu
"System info".
# = These configuration parameters can only be

adjusted while the system is in STAND STILL
or in STOP (not visible on the HMI in all other
modes). The present configuration is displayed
in menu "System info".
6
1 Parameter List
Parame- Pass- Denomination Default Unit Min. Max.

ter word value value value
level
P100 0 Display language: English
English/ German/ Spanish/ French/
Italian/ Portuguese/ Finnish/
Swedish
P101 0 Selection of temp. presentation °C
Celsius/Fahrenheit
P102 0 Selection of feed flow rate m3/h
presentation m3/h or USG/h
P103 0 Selection of pressure presentation bar
kPa, bar, psi
User password required for all following parameters if activated!
System configuration
P107 1 Flow correction factor 1,00 0,00 2,00
(If P107=0, the flow is not visible
on the EPC60 panel)
P108 3 Separator type 0 = S, 1 = P, 2 = B P
P110 not used
P111 1@ Separator size 0 See Parameters
depending on the
setting of P111,
page .
P112 1 Oil type HF380 See Parameters
depending on the
setting of P112,
page .
P113 2@ Speed sensor installed yes/no no Can even be
changed in
STOP. See also
"System without
speed sensor"
in the Operating
instructions
manual.
P114 1# Vibration sensor installed yes/no no Can even be
changed in
STOP. See also
"System without
vibration sensor"
in the Operating
instructions
manual.
P115 1# Frame cover switch installed yes/no no Can even be
changed in STOP.
See also "System
without frame
cover switch" in
the Operating
instructions
manual.
7
1 Parameter List
Parame- Pass- Denomination Default Unit Min. Max.

ter word value value value
level
P116 1 Frame cover switch disabled yes/no no See also "System
(if P115 = yes) without frame
cover switch" in
the Operating
instructions
manual.
P117 not used
P118 1# Sludge pump installed yes/no no Can even be
changed in STOP.
P119 1# Heater installed no/elec- no
tric/steam/external
P120 1@ If P119 = electric: heater size 16 kW 7 130
Parame- Pass- Denomination De- Unit Min. Max.

ter word fault value value
level value
P121 1 If P119 = steam: steam valve 120 s 0 999
transition time
P122 1 Deadband heater 0,5 °C 0 5
(P101)
P123 1 P-constant heater (if heater 75 % 10 500
controlled)
see also P125/P126 (cold start)
P124 1 I-constant heater (if heater controlled) 0,4 min 0,1 10,0
P125 1 Breakpoint cold start (if heater 0 °C 0 99
controlled) (P101)
P126 1 Gain factor cold start (if heater 40 % 1 100
controlled)
P127 1# Feed pump controlled yes/no no Can be changed
even in STOP.
P128 not used
P129 1 Selection of of communication type digital not available
digital inputs, Modbus TCP inputs if running in
"remote"
P130 1 Selection of automatic or stepwise step-
start wise
P131 1# Valve in sludge outlet installed no, no Can be changed
manual, pneumatic NO, pneumatic even in STOP.
NC
P132 1 Vibration sensor disabled yes/no no
8
1 Parameter List

level value
P133 1 Relay OP1 (function optional output none See also
1) “Programmable
P134 1 Relay OP2 (function optional output none in- and outputs”
2) in the Operating
instructions
P135 1 Relay OP3 (function optional output none manual for all
3) alternatives
P136 1 Relay OP4 (function optional output none
4)
5)
6)
P139 1 Opt. input 1 (function optional input 1) none
P145 1 Cross connection/serial operation dis- see also “Cross
abled connection/se-
rial operation”
P146 1 Temperature sensor disabled no
no, TT1, TT2, TT2 custom
P147 Can be changed
even in STOP.
1@ Separator mode purfier purifier clari-
0 = purifier, 1 = clarifier fier
P148 1 Speed sensor disabled Yes/No no
P149 1 Level switch disabled. Run sludge no
pump 30 s at discharge (overrides
P234).
9
1 Parameter List

level value
Alarm related parameters: delays, limits etc.
P150 3 Alarm delay time, general 15 s 0 30
P151 Not used
P152 1 Power failure alarm used yes/no yes
(common alarm at power failure
given yes/no)
P153 1 High oil pressure limit (PT4), 0.0 3,0 bar 0,0 5,0
= pressure sensor disabled
P154 1 Low oil pressure limit (PT4) 1,2 bar 0,0 5,0
P155 not used
P156 not used
P157 1 Alarm limit high feed pressure 3,0 bar 0,0 5,0
(PT1), 0.0 = feed pressure sensor
disabled
P158 1 Alarm limit low feed pressure 0,1 bar 0,0 5,0
(PT1)
P159 3 Alarm delay "A120 Sludge tank 2 s 0 240
level high" in SEPARATION
P160 not used
P161 1 Alarm limit "A97 Discharge 300 rpm 0 2000
feedback error"
P162 not used
P163 not used
P164 not used
P165 not used
P166 not used
P167 not used
P168 3 Alarm delay feed pump starter 5 s 2 300
failure
P169 1 Alarm delay "A24 Temperature 15 min 0 60
increase too slow"
P170 not used
P171 3 Alarm delay “A54 Oil pressure 15 s 0 30
PT4 high at discharge”
P172 not used
P173 1 Alarm delay “A25 Temperature 5 min 0 30
not decreasing”
0 = no temperature supervision
P174 3 Alarm delay “A94 Bowl speed 3 min 0 30
high during STOP”
P175 not used
P176 3 Alarm delay "A32 Difference 2 s 0 30
TT1/TT2 too large"
10
1 Parameter List

level value
P177 1 Alarm limit "A32 Difference 10 °C 0 30
TT1/TT2 too large" (P101)
P178 1 Time limit in RECIRCULATION 10 min 0 30
Setpoints
P221 3 PT4 pressure feedback limit 0,2 bar 0,0 9,9
P222 not used
P223 not used
P224 not used
P225 not used
P226 not used
P227 not used
P228 1 SV16 pulse interval in 5 min 1 30
SEPARATION
P229 Not used
P232 1 Draining time operating water and 15 s 0 30
discharge check
P234 1 Sludge pump additional/manual 10 s 0 30
running time
P235 not used
P236 not used
P237 not used
P238 2 Feed on after discharge 10 s 0 60
P239 not used
P242 not used
P250 1 Temperature set point if a new 30 °C 0 110
temperature set point is selected (P101)
via the programmable input and
only the feed pump and heater
are started
P256 1 Feed pump stop delay at normal 3 min 0 30
STOP
P258 2 Feed on after start discharge 30 s 0 60
P259 1 Alarm limit "A97 Discharge 0 bar 0 1,00
feedback error" if speed sensor
not installed (PT1 pressure
decrease) 0 = function disabled
P260 2 SV10 open to fill the bowl in STOP 5 s 0 300
P262 1 Serial operation: slave discharge 2 0 10
frequency (parameter set in
master PLC) 0 = no discharge # =
every # time master discharges
11
1 Parameter List
Parameters depending on the setting of P111

Separator size
(P111, default 0)
Param- Pass- Description P100 P 605 P 625 P 635 P 646 PF Min. Max. Unit
eter word P150 P 615 P 626 P 636 977 value value
level P600
P610
P179 3 Alarm limit bowl --- --- 13300 11000 9600 6700 0 de- rpm
speed high fault
for
size
P180 2 Alarm limit bowl --- --- 83 90 90 82 0 100 % of
speed low P179
(max.
spe-
ed)
P181 2 Alarm limit --- --- 0,30 0,30 0,50 0,50 0,00 2,50 mm
high vibration
shutdown
P182 1 Alarm limit high --- --- 0,20 0,20 0,30 0,30 0,00 2,50 mm
vibration warning
P220 1 Discharge 30 30 60 60 60 120 1 300 min
interval
P230 3 Separator start 3 4 4 4 4 4 0 60 min
time
P231 1 SV15 opening 1,0 1,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 0,1 5,0 s
time
P233 1 Filling time 20 20 3 4 5 120 0 120 s
sealing water
P240 1 Filling time 10 10 6 10 20 61 0 300 s
displacement
water
SV10, constant 8,0 8,0 15,0 15,0 15,0 11 l/min
flow orifice
P241 3 Stop timer 30 30 30 30 35 60 30 120 min
P243 1 SV16 open after 10 10 15 15 15 35 0 60 s
discharge
P244 1 SV15 open at 1,0 1,0 10,0 10,0 5 25 0,1 30,0 s
start discharge
P245 not used
P246 not used
P247 not used
P248 not used
P255 3 Speed setpoint --- --- 4000 4000 4000 4000 rpm
SV16 activated in
STOP
P257 1 SV16 open at 40 40 15 15 15 35 0 60 s
start discharges
P109 not used
12
1 Parameter List
NOTE
If P111 = 0 (default value), the operator is automatically

forced to go through a system configuration procedure
to setup the system.
13
1 Parameter List
Parameters depending on the setting of P112

Oil type (selected with P112)
DO HFO LO
Param- Pass- Descrip- GO MDO IF30 HF180 LO LO Min. Max. Unit
eter word tion IF40 HF380 TP CH value value
level IF60 HF460 Trunc Cross
IF100 HF600 head
HF700
P183 1 High tem- °C
perature 50 105 100 100 0 115 (P101)
limit
P184 1 Low tem- °C
perature 30 85 90 85 0 115 (P101)
limit
P249 1 Tempera- °C
ture set- 40 98 95 90 0 110 (P101)
point
P187 not used
P251 not used
P252 not used
P189 not used
P254 not used
14
2 Operation Modes
2.1 Change-over Sequence

This sequence is run through when the
system changes operation mode from
RECIRCULATION to SEPARATION after start
(supervision similar as in RECIRCULATION).
A special discharge sequence without

displacement is run through. Finally the system
ends up in SEPARATION.
The start discharge sequence is:
SV15, discharge P244 P232

———
SV16, closing water P257
———
SV10, condition-
P233
ing/sealing, displace-
———
ment
V1, feed inlet (deactiv. P258
= recirculation) ——— ———
Sludge pump (optional) P234
———
Vibration supervision
blocked ——— ——— ———
Recircu- Start discharge Separa-

lation tion
Discharge
initiation
— — — = activated
= deactivated
* Timer interrupted when feedback signal received.
15
2 Operation Modes
2.2 Discharge
During discharge two different sequences are
run through:
• displacement sequence (step 1)

• discharge sequence (step 2)
The following diagram shows the equipment

which is activated during the sequences, the
activation pattern and the corresponding timers.
Sequence Diagram
If a combination of low PT4 pressure (P154) and low speed (P180) is detected when the feed is
on, the system will go to STOP immediately without waiting the time in P238. Alarm ‘A57 Oil
leaking from bowl’.
Vibration ––– ––– –––

supervision
blocked
SV15, P231 P232
discharge –––
SV16, P243
closing water –––
SV10,
P240 P233
conditioning,
––– –––
displacement
V1, feed inlet
P238
(deactiv. = ––– P171* –––
–––
recirculation)
Sludge pump P234
P234
(optional) – –– ––– ––– ––– –––
min 10 s ––
Sepa- Displacement sequence Discharge sequence Sepa-

ration (Step 1) (Step 2) ration
Discharge
initiation
– – – = activated
= deactivated
* Timer interrupted when feedback
signal received.
16
3 Programmable Inputs and

Outputs
An extra I/O kit is available as an option. This kit

contains two boards, one with six programmable
digital inputs and one with six programmable
relay outputs. The customer can select an
optional function out of a list with alternatives
(see below) for each of these in- and outputs.
Inputs also see parameters P139 to P144

0 None default
1 Remote start enter automatic start, only if REMOTE
selected on operator panel (pushbutton)
2 Remote stop enter stop sequence, works with
REMOTE button in any position Closed
(pulse) = stop
3 Remote start feed pump The same as first push at stepwise start,
see Subsequence start, only if REMOTE
4 External alarm 1 Customer alarm (A123) input trigger.
Closed = alarm.
5 Remote recirculation Enter Recirculation, only if REMOTE
Closed = recirculation
6 New temperature set point EPC 60 uses the temperature set point
P250 under starting when the separator
is switched off
Closed = alarm.
Closed = alarm.
9 Remote start of feed pump and heater Feed pump and heater will be started
according to the stepwise start
sequence, see Subsequence start.
10 Remote stop of feed pump and heater Stop of feed pump and heater (only)
when remote control of feed pump and
heater is active (see altId 9).
11 Remote stop, normally closed Same as altId 2 except this signal is
normally high. A stop will be triggered
when the signal goes low.
17
3 Programmable Inputs and Outputs
Outputs also see parameters P133 to P138

0 None default
1 Indication heater on/ start external program request "heater function on"
heater Closed = heater on
2 Indication separator motor on program request "separator motor on"
Closed = motor on
3 Standstill indication when standstill flag on
Closed = stand still
4 Indication alarm A20 if alarm "Oil feed temp. high" active
Closed = alarm
5 Indication alarm A21 if alarm "Oil feed temp. low" active
Closed = alarm
6 Indication alarm A51 if alarm "Oil backpressure PT4 low"
active
Closed = alarm
7 Indication feed pump on program request "feed pump on"
Closed = feed pump on
8 Remote start allowed allowed to start the system
Closed = start allowed
9 Remote enabled remote button activated
Closed = remote activated
10 Valve in sludge outlet controlled if pneumatic valve, see P131
and Activation diagram
Closed = open or close valve (set with
P131)
11 Common alarm Alternative Common alarm,
Closed = no alarm, also see separate
description
12 Indication V1 Position of valve V1,
Closed = feed on to separator
13 Indication alarm A130 if alarm "Emergency stop button
pressed" active.
Closed = alarm
14 System ready (remote) System in Remote AND Feed is off
AND Separator Standstill AND No
startblocking alarms & warnings
Closed=criteria fulfilled
15 A101 Alarm A101 vibration alarm is active.
18
P Flex Separation
Alarms and Fault Finding

Printed 06-2015
Book No. 586660-02, rev. 6
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

The original instructions are in English
This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of Alfa
Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Alarms 5
1.1 Alarms List 5
1.2 Alarm History List 8
2 Display Alarms and Actions 9
3 EPC 60 Control panel 19
3
1 Alarms
1.1 Alarms List

To access the Alarms List press the ‘Alarm
Button’.
7 8 9
4 5 6
NOTE
1 2 3
The latest 50 alarms are stored in the Alarm History
. 0
List. See below.
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023912B
Press the arrow buttons to go up or down in

the list.
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023914A
5
1 Alarms
For each item in the list you can press the

‘Information’ button for help and information.
Press the ‘Information’ button again to return to 7 8 9
your previous position.
4 5 6
You can also acknowledge and/or reset this 1 2 3
alarm.
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023915A
If the system has a fault, the alarm LED blinks.

Press the ‘Alarm’ button once. The alarm shows
on the display.
Press the ‘Alarm’ button again to acknowledge
the alarm.
To go through the alarm list, press the ‘Arrow’
buttons.
NOTE X023919A
After acknowledging an alarm, go through the

alarm list to make sure that there are no other
unacknowledged alarms!
If after all alarms have been acknowledged

fault(s) remain in the system, the alarm LED
stops blinking and remains on. An ‘A’ appears
at the end of an alarm which has not been
rectified.
The alarms disappear automatically when the
fault is rectified.
When all the alarms have been rectified, the
alarm LED goes out.
For safety reasons, certain alarms must not only
be acknowledged, but also rectified before the
system can continue in operation, for example
alarm A122 ‘Butterfly valve in sludge outlet
closed’.
Also for safety reasons, some alarms will set the
system into recirculation or stop. These alarms
must be rectified before the operator can put the
system into operation.
6
1 Alarms
Press the ‘Return’ button to leave the list.
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
. 0
REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023912A
7
1 Alarms
1.2 Alarm History List

To access the Alarm History List at any time
during the operation process press the ‘Return
button’ repeatedly until the Alarm History List 7 8 9
is reached.
4 5 6
1 2 3
NOTE
. 0
Relevant parameters only are shown on the display REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
CIP
PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
X023912A
Press the arrow buttons to go up or down in the

list. The list consists of the following:
7 8 9
1. Parameter menu – List of all parameters.
Password protected. 4 5 6
To go directly to a parameter, enter the 1 2 3
parameter number.
. 0
2. Time settings – For setting date, time, etc.
Password protected. REMOTE
i
HEATER DISCHARGE
SEPARATOR CONTROL
To go directly to a parameter, enter the FEED SLUDGE

CIP
CLEANING
parameter number. PUMP PUMP IN PLACE
3. Operation time – Different counters and X023914A
timers can be read.

4. I/O Test – Here it is possible to activate all
outputs and to read the status for all inputs,
for testing purposes.
5. Alarm history – List of alarms which have
been rectified. The latest alarm shows at
the top of the list.
6. System info
7. IP settings
8. Password / Login
9. Set contrast
8
2 Display Alarms and Actions
A05 A20-A25 A30-A32 A40-A43 A50-A57

V1
TT1 TT2 PT1 PT4
A110-A111
V10
V15 SS
A100-A103
V16 YT
ST
A90-A97
A122
A120-A121
GS
A01 A15
A130 - A139
LS
X024967a
Alarm Alarm text Conditions Why? What to do

code
Feed pump (if P127 = yes)
A01 Pump starter failure Delayed by P168. Feedback signal from Check the contactor
contactor K3 missing. function.
Check input terminal
in the PLC.
A05 Heater fault (electric) Delayed 2 s. Power to heater Check the power
interrupted. supply to the heater.
High temp. switch Check temp. setpoint
released in the control unit.
Check the heater and
clean if necessary.
When the
temperature
decreases,
the switch is
automatically reset.
9

code
Heater, electric (if P119 = electric)
A15 Separator starter Delayed 2s. Feedback signal from Check the contactor
failure contactor missing. function. Check input
terminal in the PLC
Temperatur transmitter feed inlet TT1
A20 Oil feed temperature Delayed by 15s. Limit Steam supply valve Investigate cause
high in P183. faulty and remedy.
Faulty triac module(s)
in the power unit or
faulty controller in the
control unit. (electric
heater).
Broken wiring or
defective heater
resistance, or faulty
controller in the
control unit.
A21 Oil feed temperature Delayed by 15s. Limit Heater clogged Investigate cause
low in P184 and remedy.
Steam supply Investigate cause
insufficient and remedy.
Steam trap faulty Investigate cause
and remedy.
Steam supply valve Investigate cause
insufficient and remedy.
Faulty fuses or burned Check and renew
contactors (electric broken fuses.
heater) Reset overcurrent
protection
(applicable for 8/7
- 24/22 kW power
unit).
Check wiring and
contactor coils.
Broken wiring or Check wiring and
defective heater heater resistance of
resistance (electric each block or heater
heater) element.
A22 Temperature alarm Delayed by 15s Short circuit / broken Disconnect cable
sensor error (TT1) sensor or cable. at sensor. Measure
resistance between
1-3. Resistance
shall be within
100-142 ohms =
0-110 C/32-230 F.
Replace sensor if
broken. If no spare
sensor available, set
parameter P146 =
TT1 to be able to run
the system.
10

code
A23 Temperature alarm Reminder only, if P146
sensor disabled = TT1
A24 Temperature increase Delayed by P169. Insufficient heating Check heater
too slow Limit in P184. during start. function.
A25 Temperature not Delayed by P173. Heating on during Check heater
decreasing Limit in P184. Stop stop sequence. function.
sequence continues Recirculating oil not Reset alarm to
after alarm reset. cooling. continue.
Disabled if P173 = 0.
Temperatur transmitter heater control TT2
A30 Temperature control Delayed by 15s. Short circuit / broken Disconnect cable
sensor error (TT2) sensor or cable. at sensor. Measure
resistance between
1-3. Resistance
shall be within
100-142 ohms =
0-110 C/32-230 F.
Replace sensor if
broken. If no spare
sensor available, set
parameter P146 =
TT2 to be able to run
the system
A31 Temperature control Reminder only, if P146
sensor disabled = TT2
A32 Difference TT1/TT2 Delayed by 2s. Alarm
too large limit in P177. Blocked
if A22, A23, A30, or
A31
Pressure transmitter feed inlet PT1
A40 Feed pressure PT1 Delayed by 15s. Limit Pipe restricted. Check recirculation
high in P157 for restriction.
A41 Feed pressure PT1 Delayed by 15s. Limit Pump not working Check pump.
low in P158. Pressure in feed line Check feed line and
too low flow regulation.
Check heater for
fouling.
A42 Feed pressure sensor Delayed by 15s. Sensor or cable Check cable
PT1 error damaged connections.
Replace sensor. If
no spare sensor
available, set
parameter P157 =
0.
A43 PT1 disabled Reminder only, if P157
= 0.
Pressure transmitter oil outlet PT4
A50 Oil backpressure PT4 Delayed by 15s. Alarm Increased throughput Check. Reduce
high limit in P153. backpressure.
Regulating valve too Adjust valve.
restricted
11

code
A51 Oil backpressure PT4 Delayed by 15s. Alarm Liquid seal broken Check that the
low limit in P154. gravity disc is correct
for the oil density.
Decreased Check feed pump
throughput and adjust flow.
Regulating valve open Adjust back pressure
too much valve
Change over valve Check air pressure,
V1 in recirculation solenoid valve SV1
position and output from EPC
60.
Bowl opens
unintentionally during
operation because:
Strainer and piping in Clean the strainer
the operating water and check the
supply is clogged. whole system fore
limestone deposits.
Too little or no water Measure the water
in the operating water flow in the three
system. hoses from the water
block and compare
with correct values.
Hoses between Fit hoses correctly.
the supply valves
and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in bowl body Clean the nozzle.
clogged
Rectangular ring in Renew the
discharge slide is rectangular ring.
defective.
Valve plugs are Renew all plugs.
defective.
Supply valves SV15 Rectify the leak.
and SV 16 are
leaking.
A52 Oil pressure sensor Delayed by 15s. Sensor or cable Check cable
PT4 error damaged. connections.
Replace sensor. If
no spare sensor
available, set
parameter P153 =
0.
A53 PT4 disabled Reminder only, if P153
= 0.
A54 Oil pressure PT4 high Delayed by 15s. Alarm No decrease in oil Check function of
at discharge limit 0.2bar. pressure at discharge. change-over valve
V1.
12

code
Speed sensor separator (if P113 = yes)
A57 Oil leaking from bowl Delayed by P245. Bowl periphery Change seal ring
Alarm limit in P163. sealing damaged in bowl hood.
Check/change
rubber rings and
valve plugs.
Leakage somewhere Check for leakage.
in oil outlet
Closing water leaking Check/change
sealings and plugs.
A90 Bowl speed high Delayed 5 s. Limit High power (net) Check power supply
depends on separator frequency. before restart.
size. Incorrect transmission
parts (50 Hz belt NG
WARNI
pulley and belt for 60 !
Hz power supply).
Disintegration
hazard
Stop and change the
belt transmission to
suit the power supply
frequency.
A91 Bowl speed low Delayed 5 s. Limit in Slipping belt Change belt.
P180. Worn coupling pads Check / change pads.
Bowl not properly Check closing water
closed supply (valve SV 16).
Check bowl
operating system
for leakage.
Check nozzle.
Bowl not properly Check that the lock
assembled ring is in place.
Low power net Check power.
frequency
Motor failure. Repair the motor.
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Incorrect transmission
parts (60 Hz belt NG
WARNI
pulley and belt for 50 !
Hz power supply).
Disintegration
hazard
Stop and change the
belt transmission to
suit the power supply
frequency.
A92 Bowl speed sensor Delay 4s. Timer stop. Sensor or cable Replace sensor.
error damaged.

code
A93 A93 Speed sensor Reminder only, if P148
disabled = yes.
13
A94 Bowl speed high Delayed by 3min. Power still on to the Check reason and
during STOP Alarm limit in P180. motor remedy.
A95 Separator motor Delayed depending on Separator friction Check the friction
run-up time too long separator size. Limit in blocks slipping blocks.
P180. Belt slipping Check the belt.
Height position Stop. Check and
of paring disc is adjust the height.
incorrect.
Motor failure Repair the motor.
Bearing(s) damaged Renew all bearings.
or worn in coupling or
spindle drive.
A96 Slow start Speed < 90 rpm 10s
acceleration after response from
motor contactor.
A97 Discharge feedback Alarm limit in P161. Strainer in the Clean the strainer.
error Test during P232, one operating water
extra discharge before supply is clogged.
alarm.
Water flow too low. Check opening water
flow (SV 15) into the
bowl.
Hoses between Fit hoses correctly.
the supply valves
and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
Rectangular ring in Replace the
the operating slide is rectangular ring.
defective.
Vibration sensor separator (if P114 = yes)
A100 High vibration warning Delayed by 15s. Alarm Sludge remaining in Dismantle, clean
limit in P182. part of the bowl. and check the bowl
before restart.
NG
WARNI
!
Disintegration
hazard
The separator bowl
must be manually
cleaned before starting
up again.
Bowl wrongly Check assembly.
mounted.

code
Disc stack Check assembly.
compression
incorrect.
14
Bowl assembled Check assembly.

with parts from other
separators.
Height position Stop the separator,
of paring disc is measure and if
incorrect necessary adjust
the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl
spindle
or worn.
The frame feet are Renew the frame feet.
worn out.
Spindle top bearing Renew all springs.
spring broken.
A101 High vibration Delay 1s. Alarm limit Sludge remaining in Dismantle, clean
shutdown in P181. part of the bowl and check the bowl
before restart. See
Service Manual.
NG
WARNI
! WARNI
NG
!
Disintegration
hazard Disintegration hazard
If excessive vibration The separator bowl
occurs, stop separator must be manually
and keep bowl filled cleaned before starting
with liquid during up again.
rundown. The cause
of the vibration must
be identified and
corrected before the
separator is restarted.
Bowl wrongly Check assembly.
mounted
Disc stack Check assembly.
compression
incorrect
Bowl assembled Check assembly.
with parts from other
separators
Height position Stop the separator,
of paring disc is measure and if
incorrect. necessary adjust
the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl
spindle.
or worn.
15

code
The frame feet are Renew the frame feet.
worn out.
Spindle top bearing Renew all springs.
spring broken.
A102 Vibration sensor error Delayed by 15s. Sensor or cable Replace sensor. If
damaged. no spare sensor
available, set
parameter P132 =
yes to be able to run
the system.
A103 Vibration sensor Reminder only. If P132
disabled = yes.
Frame cover switch separator (if P115 = yes)
A110 Frame cover open Delay 1s. Separator not Assemble the
Start not possible. properly assembled separator according
to instructions.
Faulty frame cover Replace cover
switch switch. If no spare
switch available, set
parameter P116 = yes
to be able to run the
system.
A111 Cover switch disabled Reminder only, if P116
= yes.
Sludge handling
A120 Sludge tank level high At high level: Start Pump has not drained Check the pump
not possible. Sludge the tank function.
pump running until
level signal normal +
10s. Alarm delay and
max pump running
time 60s in all modes
without feed flow, 2s in
Separation. Discharge
blocked.
A121 Level switch disabled Reminder only, if P149
= yes.
A122 Valve in sludge outlet Delayed by 15s. Valve closed. Open manual valve.
closed Discharge not
possible. Start not
possible.
A123 External alarm. Delay
2s
16
System
A130 Emergency stop Delay 1s. No restart.Emergency stop Check for the cause.
button pushed button pushed Reset pushbutton.
A132 Power failure Disabled with P152 = Black-out has Check plant
no. occurred during conditions and
operation. restart.
A133 Too long time in Delayed by P178. Time in
RECIRCULATION System goes to STOP. RECIRCULATION
expired.
A136 Communication error
A137 Cabinet over Reminder only
temperature
A138 Too many start Contactor activated
attempts 5 times within last 60
minutes.
A139 EPC60 internal failure Delay 2s IO-card status or PLC Check IO cards have
status not OK no red LEDs
PLC has detected an Check if
IO-configuration that IO-configuration
does not exist is right or verify
electrical drawings
A140 Too long time out of Alarm is created if Pre-lubricate spindle
operation the separator has bearings.
been out of operation After service always
for one month or run the separator
more. It is reset if the continuously for
separator has been at least 5 hours
running for at least 5 to ensure proper
hours. lubrication.
A145 Panel communication Check wiring
error
17

3 EPC 60 Control panel

Fault Remedy
Black screen Press and hold Enter button and adjust contrast with
up and down button.
This can be done regardless of which page is
currently displayed.
19
Separator Sizes S 936 - S 948, P 635/636/646
Flex Separation System
Installation System Reference

Printed 03-2017
Book No. 9007373-02, rev. 7
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Original instructions
means without prior written permission of Alfa
Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Technical Data 7
1.1 Demand Specifications Water 7
1.2 Demand Specifications Air 9
1.3 System Data 9
2 Mechanical Drawings 13
2.1 Flow Charts 14
2.1.1 S-separator Basic and Optional Components 14
2.1.2 P-Separator Basic and Optional Components 15
2.2 Mounting Drawings 16

2.2.1 S-Separator DIN Mounting Drawing 16
2.2.2 S-Separator JIS Mounting Drawing 17
2.2.3 P-Separator DIN Mounting Drawing 18
2.2.4 P-Separator JIS Mounting Drawing 19
2.2.5 P 646 Separator Mounting Drawing 20
2.3 Installation Drawings 21

2.3.1 S 936 - S 938 Separator Installation Drawing 21
2.3.2 S 946 - S 948 Separator Installation Drawing 22
2.3.3 P 635/636 Separator Installation Drawing 23
2.3.4 P 646 Separator Installation Drawing 24
2.4 Basic Size Drawings 25

2.4.1 S 936 - S 938 Separator Basic Size Drawing 25
2.4.2 S 946 - S 948 Separator Basic Size Drawing 27
2.4.3 P 635/636 Separator Basic Size Drawing 28
2.4.4 P 646 Separator Basic Size Drawing 30
2.5 Foundation Drawings 31

2.5.1 S 936 - S 938 Foundation Drawing 31
2.5.2 S 946 - S 948 Foundation Drawing 32
2.5.3 P 635/636 Foundation Drawing 33
2.5.4 P 646 Foundation Drawing 34
2.6 S-Separator Pipe Arrangement 35

2.7 P-Separator Pipe Arrangement 36
2.8 P 646 Separator Pipe Arrangement 37
2.9 Feed Pump Block 38
2.10 Heater Block 40
2.11 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional) 43
2.12 Light Phase Regulating Drawing 45
2.13 Heavy Phase Drain Drawing 49
3
2.14 3-way Valve Drawing 50

2.15 Flexible Hose Drawing 51
2.16 Operating Water Valve Drawing 54
2.17 Air Distributor Kit 56
2.18 Control Cabinet Dimension Drawing 57
2.19 Control Cabinet Assembly Drawing,
External 58
2.20 Control Cabinet Assembly Drawing,
Internal 60
2.21 Change of EPC 60 Components 61
3 Electrical Drawings 65
3.1 Electrical System Layout S 936 - S 948 66
3.2 Electrical System Layout P 635/636 67
3.3 Electrical System Layout P 646 68
3.4 Control and Starter Electrical Diagrams 69
3.4.1 Starter cable list 69
3.4.2 Separator Interconnection Diagram (S) 72
3.4.3 Separator Interconnection Diagram (P) 75
3.4.4 Steam Regulating Valve (optional) Interconnection
Diagram 78
3.4.5 Speed and Vibration Transmitter (optional)
Interconnection Diagram 79
3.4.6 I/O (optional) Interconnection Diagram 80
3.4.7 Heat Tracing (optional) Interconnection Diagram 82
3.4.8 Electric Heater (optional) Interconnection Diagram 83
3.4.9 Emergency Shutdown Interconnection Diagram 84
3.4.10 Separator Circuit Diagram (S) 85
3.4.11 Separator Circuit Diagram (P) 93
3.4.12 Steam Regulating Valve (optional) Circuit Diagram 101
3.4.13 Speed Transmitter (optional) Circuit Diagram 102
3.4.14 Vibration Transmitter (optional) Circuit Diagram 103
3.4.15 I/O (optional) Circuit Diagram 104
3.4.16 Heat Tracing (optional) Circuit Diagram 106
3.4.17 Electric Heater (optional) Circuit Diagram 108
3.4.18 Emergency Shutdown Circuit Diagram 110
4 Specifications 111
4.1 Cables 112
4.2 Cable Routing 113
4.3 Knock-out instruction 114
4.4 Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate
Piping 115
4.5 Ambient Temperature Limitation 115
4
4.6 Heat Tracing and Insulation of Fuel Oil,

Sludge, and Steam Pipes 116
4.7 More than one Oil Tank 116
4.8 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional
Equipment) 117
4.9 Sludge Tank 119
4.10 Sludge Piping 121
5 Commissioning and Initial Start 123

5.1 Completion Check List 123
5.2 Initial Start-up 125
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure 128
6 Shut-down and Storage 129

6.1 Shut-down after Use 129
6.2 Protection and Storage 130
6.3 Reassembly and Start up 132
5
1 Technical Data
1.1 Demand Specifications Water

Alfa Laval ref. 574487 Rev. 2
Operating water is used in the separator for

several different functions: e.g. to operate the
discharge mechanism, to lubricate and cool
mechanical seals.
Poor quality of the operating water may cause

erosion, corrosion and/or operating problem in
the separator and must therefore be treated to
meet certain demands.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating water
supplied by the customer.
The following conditions must be fulfilled:

1. Turbidity free water, solids content <0.001%
by volume.
Deposits must not be allowed to form in
certain areas in the separator.
2. A maximum particle size of 50 µm.
3. A total hardness of <180 mg CaCO3 per
litre, which corresponds to 10°dH or 12.5°E.
Hard water may with time form deposits in
the operating mechanism. The precipitation
rate is accelerated with increased operating
temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe as the
hardness of the water increase.
4. A chloride content of maximum 100 ppm
NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l).
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/l is
not recommended.
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on
the separator surface in contact with the
operating water, including the spindle.
Corrosion is a process that is accelerated
by increased separating temperature, low
pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
7
1 Technical Data
5. 6.5 < pH < 9

Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the
risk for corrosion; this is accelerated by
increased temperature and high chloride
ion content.
6. A bicarbonate content (HCO3) of minimum
70 mg HCO3 per litre, which corresponds
to 3.2°dKH.
8
1 Technical Data
1.2 Demand Specifications Air

Specific requirements regarding the quality
of air
1. Pressure 500 – 800 kPa (5 – 8 bar).
2. Free from oil, and solid particles larger than
0.01 mm.
3. Dry, with dew point min. 10 °C below
ambient temperature.
NOTE
Electrical interconnections must be made by qualified

electricians.
Mechanical interconnections must be made by
qualified mechanical technicians.
1.3 System Data

Application
Cleaning of fuel and lubricating oils
Min. density 820 kg/m3 at 15°C
Max. density 1010 Kg/m3 at 15°C in ALCAP mode
991 kg/m3 at 15°C in Purifier mode
Max. viscosity 55 cSt at 100°C ( 700 cSt at 50°C)
Feed temperature 5°C to 100°C
Ambient temperature 5°C to 55°C
Feed capacity In accordance with the separator size capacity
table
Media inlet/outlet data at separator

connections
Pressure
Oil inlet Max. 2 bar at separator inlet
Oil outlet Max. 2.5 bar
Sludge outlet from separator without pressure
Sludge outlet from sludge pump Max. 5 bar at 6 bar air pressure
Separated water Max. 4 bar ( if not diverted into sludge outlet)
Temperature According to capacity table, depending on oil
viscosity ±2 °C Max. 100 °C
9
1 Technical Data
Sludge Removal kits (optional)

The systems can be equipped with their own
sludge tank for collecting the sludge discharge
from the separator.
Sludge Removal Kit tank volumes: 11.5 Litres.
Auxiliary systems
Operating water
- Operating water flow S 936, S 937, S 938, SV 10: 1.6 l/m
S 946, S 947, S 948 SV 15: 11.0 l/m
SV 16: 2.8 l/m
- Operating water flow P 635, P 636, P 646 SV 10: 15 l/m
SV 15: 11 l/m
SV 16: 2.8 l/m
For further details see “1.1 Demand Specifications
Water on page 7”.
Quality
Pressure 2 – 8 bar
Temperature 5 °C – 55 °C (unheated water)
Air
Quality Instrument air
Pressure 5 – 8 bar (an optional pressure reducer is
available for above 8 bar)
Consumption
Air operated valves 10 N l/h
Sludge pump (pneumatic) 1000 N l/h at max. 1l/s
For further details see “1.2 Demand Specifications
Air on page 9”.
Mechanical design part:
Oil and heating media piping
Design pressure Max. 6 bar (for steam / condensate Max. 9 bar)
Test pressure Max. 9 bar (for steam/condensate Max. 14 bar)
Design temperature 5 °C – 180 °C
Flange connections PN 16 DIN 2573/2633
Pipe data Material ; ASTM A 106 gr. B seamless schedule
40 thickness.
Sizes ; from ½” upto 4”
Auxiliary media - Operating water
Design pressure Max. 6 bar
Design temp. 5 °C – 55 °C
Auxiliary media - Air
Design pressure Max 10 bar
Material Nitrile rubber-steel braided hose or PTFE pipes
where possible.
Drip tray volume Max. 19 litres
Drip tray Material Steel sheet laser cut and welded parts
Drip tray Drain connection size 2 x 1” G (internally threaded)
Frame Baseplate Material Steel sheet laser cut and welded parts
Electrical design
10
1 Technical Data
Auxiliary systems
Mains supply
Voltage 3x 230 /400V/ 440V / 480V / 575V / 690V ± 10 %
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Separator el.motor In accordance with the separator size selected
and related data sheet
Separator el motor power range From 7.5 kW up to 11 kW
Feed Pump el. Motor In accordance with the pump size selected and
related data sheet
Feed Pump el motor power range from 1.1 kW up to 4 kW
EPC
Voltage 24 V DC (internal)
Control voltage, operating supply 24 V AC ( from internal transformer )
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ± 5 %
Control cabinet
Enclosure class IP 55
Material Steel sheet
Ambient temp. Max 55 °C
Planned Maintenance Kits (not including wear items)

Hours Period Separa- Module Sludge Feed Control El. heater CBM
tor pump pump cabinet
1000
2000
4000 6 months Inspec-
tion
12000 18 Overhaul Overhaul
months
24000 3 years Overhaul Overhaul Overhaul Overhaul
As necessary CIP Repair Repair CIP
(compon-
ents)
With delivery Inspec-
tion Tools
Backup Support Support
NOTE
The lifespan of wear items, such as friction blocks and

main seal ring, depends on the number of startups, as
well as plant and feed conditions. Check wear items
regularly and change when necessary.
11
1 Technical Data
2 Mechanical Drawings
13
2.1 Flow Charts
2.1.1 S-separator Basic and Optional Components

584767#6_00
14
2.1.2 P-Separator Basic and Optional Components

584768#8_00
15
2.2 Mounting Drawings
2.2.1 S-Separator DIN Mounting Drawing

9008937#2_00
16
2.2.2 S-Separator JIS Mounting Drawing

9008933#3_00
17
2.2.3 P-Separator DIN Mounting Drawing

9008939#1_00
18
2.2.4 P-Separator JIS Mounting Drawing

9008942#1_00
19
2.2.5 P 646 Separator Mounting Drawing

9026388#0_00
20
2.3 Installation Drawings
2.3.1 S 936 - S 938 Separator Installation Drawing

9009033#1_00
21
2.3.2 S 946 - S 948 Separator Installation Drawing

9009034#1_00
22
2.3.3 P 635/636 Separator Installation Drawing

9009031#1_00
23
2.3.4 P 646 Separator Installation Drawing

9026387#0_00
24
2.4 Basic Size Drawings
2.4.1 S 936 - S 938 Separator Basic Size Drawing

9004175
NB Review Article Data report for additional demands
2012-08-30
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Basic size drawing
DLJN
jyz2
2016-02-26
2
9004175#2_00
25
9004175
2012-08-30
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Basic size drawing
DLJN
jyz2
2016-02-26
2
9004175#2_01
26
2.4.2 S 946 - S 948 Separator Basic Size Drawing

9004226
2012-08-31
JMJN
casu
HSS
Basic size drawing
DLJN
jyz2
2016-02-26
2
9004226#2_00
27
2.4.3 P 635/636 Separator Basic Size Drawing

9003498
2012-09-12
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Basic size drawing
DLJN
jyz2
2016-02-26
2
9003498#2_00
28
9003498
2012-09-12
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Basic size drawing
DLJN
jyz2
2016-02-26
2
9003498#2_01
29
2.4.4 P 646 Separator Basic Size Drawing

9023476#0_00
30
2.5 Foundation Drawings
2.5.1 S 936 - S 938 Foundation Drawing

9004176
2012-08-30
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Foundation drawing
DBX
jyz2
2015-02-11
1
9004176#1_00
31
2.5.2 S 946 - S 948 Foundation Drawing

9004227
2012-08-31
JMJN
casu
HSS
Foundation drawing
DBX
jyz2
2015-02-13
1
9004227#1_00
32
2.5.3 P 635/636 Foundation Drawing

9004176
2012-08-30
JMJN
HSS
jyz2
Foundation drawing
DBX
jyz2
2015-02-11
1
9004176#1_00
33
2.5.4 P 646 Foundation Drawing

9004227
2012-08-31
JMJN
casu
HSS
Foundation drawing
DBX
jyz2
2015-02-13
1
9004227#1_00
34
2.6 S-Separator Pipe Arrangement

9008992#2_00
35
2.7 P-Separator Pipe Arrangement

9008993#1_00
36
2.8 P 646 Separator Pipe Arrangement

9022537#0_00
37
2.9 Feed Pump Block

9007567#1_00
38
9007600#1_00
39
2.10 Heater Block

9006534#1_00
40
9012390#1_00
41
9012391#0_00
42
2.11 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional)

With Sludge removal kit
598545#2_00
43
Without Sludge removal kit

9000351#2_00
44
2.12 Light Phase Regulating Drawing

9000158#2_00
45
9015985#0_00
46
9015721#1_00
47
9015815#0_00
48
2.13 Heavy Phase Drain Drawing

9000173#0_00
49
2.14 3-way Valve Drawing

9001721#1_00
50
2.15 Flexible Hose Drawing

9000428#1_00
51
9016540#0_00
52
9016315#1_00
53
2.16 Operating Water Valve Drawing

9000340#3_00
54
9016541#0_00
55
2.17 Air Distributor Kit

G091071A
56
2.18 Control Cabinet Dimension Drawing

580903#4_00
57
2.19 Control Cabinet Assembly Drawing, External

580904#9_00
58
580904#9_01
59
2.20 Control Cabinet Assembly Drawing, Internal

581002#8_00
60
2.21 Change of EPC 60 Components

Operating Panel
• Switch power off.
• Remove the connections on the reverse
side of the panel.
• Unscrew the four screws holding the panel
and remove the panel.
• Mount the new panel and connect in
reverse order.
I/O-Board
• Switch power off.
• Hold down the plastic clip on the top of the

cable terminal and pivot the cable terminal
towards you.
X025001A
X025002A
61
• Pull away the cable terminal.
X025008A
• Hold down the triangle on the top of the I/O

board and loosen the board.
X025003A
• Pull the board straight out (otherwise it can

fasten in one of its guides)
X025004A
• Compare the part number of the new I/O

board to the old board to make sure it is
correct.
• If changing more than one board at a time,
check with the electrical diagram to ensure
that the boards are mounted in the right
places.
62
• Mount the new I/O board by pressing it

straight into place. Make sure the board is
firmly in place otherwise it will be impossible
to mount the cable terminal.
X025005A
• Remount the cable terminal. Make sure

that the clip on the bottom of the terminal
fastens properly in place on the axel on the
bus holder.
X025007A
• Pivot the terminal on the axel until the clip

on the terminal top fastens into place in the
I/O board.
X025006A
63
3 Electrical Drawings
65
3.1 Electrical System Layout S 936 - S 948

580882#5_00
66
3.2 Electrical System Layout P 635/636

580901#6_00
67
3.3 Electrical System Layout P 646

9026389#0_00
68
3.4 Control and Starter Electrical Diagrams
3.4.1 Starter cable list

No. Type Connection Instruction Connection Remarks

point A point B
Basic design (currents according to order)
1 MPRXCX 3x4 Mains supply Starter 1) Fuse 20 A
1 MPRXCX 3x10 Mains supply Starter 1) Fuse 35A
2 MPRXCX 2x2,5 Supply Starter 1) Fuse 16 A
3 MPRXCX 3x1,5 Starter Marked 3A Separator motor 4,0 – 6,3 A

3 MPRXCX 3x2,5 Starter Marked 3B Separator motor 6,3 – 16 A
3 MPRXCX 3x4 Starter Marked 3C Separator motor 16 – 20 A
3 MPRXCX 3x6 Starter Marked 3D Separator motor 20 – 25 A
3 MPRXCX 3x10 Starter Marked 3E Separator motor 25 – 32 A
3 MPRXCX 3x16 Starter Marked 3F Separator motor 32 – 45 A
3 MPRXCX 3x25 Starter Marked 3G Separator motor 45 – 63 A
Optional or customer’s own feed pump (as ordered)
4 MPRXCX 3x25 Feed pump 2)
Starter
Optional sludge handling (as ordered)
35 RFE-HF 1x4x0,75 Starter GS, Valve switch
36 RFE-HF 1x2x0,75 Starter LS, Sludge level
37 RFE-HF 1x2x0,75 Starter SV6, Solenoid For pneumatic
valve sludge pump
73 RFE-HF 2x0,75 Starter Heatpac on tank Included in heater
element
Optional space heating (as ordered)
71 MPRXCX 2x1,5 Starter Separator motor
73 MPRXCX 2x1,5 Feed pump 2)
Starter
Optional heat tracing (as ordered)
74 MPRXCX 2x1,5 Starter Thermostat
75 3x1,5 Starter Heating cable
1) Cable not included in Alfa Laval delivery.

2) Cable only included in the Alfa Laval delivery
when Feed Pump is delivered mounted on
Module
69
No. Type Connection Instruction Connection Remarks

point A point B
Signal cables (currents according to order)
11 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 SV1
13 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 SV5 S-type only
14 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 SV10A Lube oil only
A
17 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 PT1 2)
EPC 60
18 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 PT4
19 RFE–HF 1x4x0,75 EPC 60 MT S-type only
20 RFE–HF 4x2x0,75 EPC 60 ST, (YT, SS) Not for P605,
P615, S805,
S815
21 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 PT5 S-type only
22 RFE–HF 1x2x0,75 1)
EPC 60 Common alarm
23 RFE–HF 4x2x0,75 3)
EPC 60 TT1/TT2
Options (as ordered)
25 RFE-HF 1x4x0,75 EPC 60 SS 1) Only for P605,
P615, S805,
S815
30 RFE-HF 1x4x0,75 EPC 60 YS 1) Only for P605,
P615, S805,
S815
38 MPRXCX 4x1,5 1) 4)
EPC 60 Syst. Emergency
100 MPRXCX 4x1,5 1) 4)
EPC 60 Sep. Emergency
stop
Optional Electric Heater (as ordered)
40 RFE-HF 4x2x0,75 Starter Power unit
45 RFE-HF 1x2x0,75 Starter Power unit
Optional heat tracing (as ordered)
41 RFE-HF 1x4x0,75 EPC 60 Steam reg. valve
44 RFE-HF 1x2x0,75 EPC 60 Shut-off valve
50 RJ45 Cat 5e 1), 5)
EPC 60 CPU Client remote data
communication
1) Cable not included in Alfa Laval delivery

2) Cable only included in the Alfa Laval delivery
when PT1 is delivered mounted on Module.
3 )Cable only included in the Alfa Laval delivery
when Electric Heater is delivered mounted on
Module.
4) This cable cannot be longer than 25 m to
avoid voltage drop.
5) Crossconnection cable only included in
Alfa Laval delivery when multiple modules are
delivered.
70
Cable areas are calculated with correction factor

0.7.
Other equivalent and approved cables may be

used.
For further information, see 1.3 System Data

on page 9.
All power cables should be Signal Shielded

Cables with the shield properly connected to
earth as shown in the electrical drawings.
For armoured power cables, the armour

must be connected to earth, as shown in the
electrical drawings, and must give sufficient EMI
protection. Copper wire armouring is normally
used.
71
3.4.2 Separator Interconnection Diagram (S)

580906#9_00
72
580906#9_01
73
580906#9_02
74
3.4.3 Separator Interconnection

Diagram (P)
581069#9_00
75
581069#9_01
76
581069#9_02
77
3.4.4 Steam Regulating Valve (optional) Interconnection Diagram

580886#2_00
78
3.4.5 Speed and Vibration Transmitter (optional) Interconnection

Diagram
580888#6_00
79
3.4.6 I/O (optional) Interconnection Diagram

580894#5_00
80
580894#5_01
81
3.4.7 Heat Tracing (optional) Interconnection Diagram

580884#1_00
82
3.4.8 Electric Heater (optional) Interconnection Diagram

580896#2_00
83
3.4.9 Emergency Shutdown Interconnection Diagram

580898#1_00
84
3.4.10 Separator Circuit Diagram (S)

580905#9_00
85
580905#9_01
86
580905#9_02
87
580905#9_03
88
580905#9_04
89
580905#9_05
90
580905#9_06
91
580905#9_07
92
3.4.11 Separator Circuit Diagram (P)

581068#11_00
93
581068#11_01
94
581068#11_02
95
581068#11_03
96
581068#11_04
97
581068#11_05
98
581068#11_06
99
581068#11_07
100
3.4.12 Steam Regulating Valve (optional) Circuit Diagram

580885#2_00
101
3.4.13 Speed Transmitter (optional) Circuit Diagram

580887#2_00
102
3.4.14 Vibration Transmitter (optional) Circuit Diagram

580889#2_00
103
3.4.15 I/O (optional) Circuit Diagram

580893#3_00
104
580893#3_01
105
3.4.16 Heat Tracing (optional) Circuit Diagram

580883#2_00
106
580883#2_01
107
3.4.17 Electric Heater (optional) Circuit Diagram

580895#2_00
108
580895#2_01
109
3.4.18 Emergency Shutdown Circuit Diagram

580897#2_00
110
4 Specifications
• Only qualified personnel are allowed to

work with lifting of the module.
• Use only the lifting lugs as shown in the
illustrations.
• Slings or wires used for lifting the Module
must be adjusted so that the beam is
located above the centre of gravity.
• Slings or wires used for lifting the Double
Module must be of the same length to avoid
instability.
• Slings/wires must be dimensioned locally
depending on equipment used.
• For information on how to lift the separator,
see the Separator Manual booklet.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
When lifting the Module, use only the lifting eyes
specifically for this purpose. Always use a lifting
beam.
111
4 Specifications
4.1 Cables
Cable Identification
All cables are marked to simplify identification
and fault finding.
Specifications
The following specifications apply to cables
connected to and from Alfa Laval equipment.
Follow the instructions given in the cable list.
Examples of cable types that can be used:
• Steel armoured cable.
G032224A
• Copper armoured cable with a separate

earth core.
G032244A
• Steel armoured and shielded signal cable;

pair twisted or parallel.
G032214A
• Shielded signal cable; pair twisted or

parallel.
G032234A
112
4 Specifications
4.2 Cable Routing

Recommendations
Power cables carry the power supply to motors,
heaters, etc.
Any distance between signal and power cables
reduces electrical noise transfer.
Examples of recommended routing of various

cable types.
• Power cables and signal cables routed on

a cable rack should be separated.
• Sattbus cables should be routed away from
power cables.
G032273A
Left: Power Cables / Right: Signal cable
If the space is limited, cables can be routed in

tubes.
113
4 Specifications
4.3 Knock-out instruction

If cable-routing holes must be made in the
control cabinet, the following applies:
9016308 Rev. 0
Correct procedure
• The punch rod should have an appropriate

diameter in relation to the knock-out plate.
• Hold the punch rod perpendicular to the
knock-out plate.
G10475b1
Incorrect procedure
• Do not use a punch rod with a diameter

that is too small.
G10475c1
• Do not impact the knock-out plate with the

punch rod at an angle.
G10475d1
• Do not use a centre punch.
G10475e1
114
4 Specifications
4.4 Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate Piping

For piping to and from Alfa Laval equipment,
see the specifications below.
Specifications
• The correct pipe size must be used in the
oil system.
• The number of bends in the oil pipes must
be minimized.
• The suction height must be as low as
possible.
• The oil feed pump must be of positive
displacement type.
• The pump must be positioned close to the
oil tank.
• The heater must be installed close to the
separation module to maintain correct feed
oil temperature.
• The recirculation line should be connected
either directly to the settling tank (HFO) or
to the oil outlet line from the separator (LO).
• The oil outlet line from the separator must
be connected to the system tank for lube
oil, or the service tank for fuel oil.
4.5 Ambient Temperature Limitation

Specification
Leading classification societies state in their
regulations for engine room equipment that the
maximum ambient temperature permissible is
+55 °C. To meet this regulation, it is essential
that electrical and electronic components have
good ventilation, and temperature control.
X024675A
115
4 Specifications
4.6 Heat Tracing and Insulation of Fuel Oil, Sludge,

and Steam Pipes
Alfa Laval can, on request, supply modules
which are heat traced and insulated, as optional
equipment.
4.7 More than one Oil Tank

Recommendation
When one separator serves more than one oil A B
tank, both the suction and the outlet lines should
be fitted with change-over valves. To avoid oil
transfer from one tank to another, these valves
must be interlinked. C
C
D
P000062B
A. Unprocessed oil
B. Clean oil
C. Change over valve
D. Interlink
116
4 Specifications
4.8 Sludge Removal Kit (Optional Equipment)

If you have a Sludge Removal Kit, this must be
connected to a ventilation pipe.
NOTE
The sludge removal pump must be set to the correct

speed – circa 60 strokes/min, otherwise the lifetime
of the diaphragm, valve balls, and air motor will be
severely shortened.
NG
WARNI
!
Health Risk
Oil mist and vaporized oil constituents from hot oily
sludge may be dangerous to health and must not be
inhaled.
A pipe or hose must be drawn from the flange to

the nearest oil tank ventilation pipe.
The pipe/hose must have the same diameter

as the flange opening.
The pipe/hose must be as straight as possible,

with a steady upward incline.
The connection to the oil tank ventilation pipe

must point upwards as shown.
NOTE B
For HFO separation, it is not recommended to make
the connection to the separator room ventilation
system.
For LO separation, connection to the separator
room ventilation system should be made only if
the separator room ventilation is adequate. Use the
optional connection hose (part no. 568023-80, -81, or
A
-82) for this purpose. This hose is designed to entrap
oil drops in the vent hose, and lead the oil back to the
Sludge Removal Kit tank.
P000063B
A. ~5 mm
B. Oil tank ventilation pipe
117
4 Specifications
NOTE
Impurities gather in the Sludge Removal Kit tank.

Regularly check the tank and level switch.
See instructions below.
Proceed as follows:
• From the Control Panel, run the sludge

pump manually for a few seconds.
• Undo the four screws connecting the sludge
pump to the sludge tank and remove the
sludge pump.
• If necessary, clean the level switch and the
inside of the tank using diesel oil.
• Check the seals and gaskets, and change
if necessary.
• Loosen the hose clip and check the inside
of the ventilation hose. Clean if necessary.
To avoid breakdown of the Sludge Removal

system, the sludge pump must be regularly
overhauled as follows using spare parts kit
specified in the spare parts catalogue.
• Replace the diaphragms and the O-rings

with those delivered in the spare parts kit.
• Perform a 4000 hour Inspection Service.
For Service and Overhaul intervals, see 1.3

System Data on page 9.
118
4 Specifications
4.9 Sludge Tank

It is not necessary to have a sludge tank
together with a Separation Module with sludge
removal kit (for lube oil). If a sludge tank is
required, follow the recommendations below:
Recommendations
• Sludge tank volume per Separation Module
should cover approximately up to 2 days
storage at a discharge interval of 2 hours C
(for discharge volumes see technical data).
• A manhole should be installed for inspection B
and cleaning.
• The tank should be fitted with a sounding
pipe.
• The tank floor, or most of it, should have a D
slope (B) of minimum 15°.
A
• The sludge outlet pump connection should
be positioned in the lowest part of the tank.
E
• A high level alarm switch, connected to the
G004273B
sludge pump, should be installed.
A. Sludge outlet pump connection
• A heating coil should be used to keep the
B. Sludge pipe connection
sludge warm and fluid while being pumped
C. Ventilation pipe
out.
D. Min. height 400 mm
• Tank ventilation must follow the E. Min. slope 15°
classification rules for evacuation of
gases.
• Sludge tank ventilation must be sufficient to
ensure neutral pressure at all times.
A B C D
• There should be a ventilation pipe to fresh
air.
• The ventilation pipe should be straight. If E
this is not possible, any bends must be
gradual.
• The ventilation pipe must not extend below
the tank top.
• A sludge tank with partition walls must have G004270B
ventilation pipes in all compartments, or

cutouts in the upper edge, to allow vapours A. Bowl casing drain connection
to travel through the tank. B. Manhole
C. Water drain connection
D. High level alarm switch
E. Heating coil
In retrofit applications, where an Alfa Laval

Separation Module will share a common
separator sludge tank with existing separators, it
is recommended to install a Sludge Removal Kit.
119
4 Specifications
The number of ventilation pipes, and their

minimum dimension, depend on the size and
number of separators connected to the same
tank. See table below.
Type 1 module 2/3 modules 4 modules

S805–S928,
1 x Ø 60 mm 1 x Ø 75 mm 1 x Ø 100 mm
P605–P626

P636/P646 1 x Ø 60 mm 1 x Ø 90 mm 1 x Ø 100 mm

S831–S948 1 x Ø 60 mm 1 x Ø 90mm 1 x Ø 115 mm

S851–S968 1 x Ø 75 mm 1 x Ø 100 mm 1 x Ø 140 mm

S871–S988 1 x Ø 100 mm 1 x Ø 140 mm 1 x Ø 170 mm
The Module generates almost no air during

operation. At any discharge, the maximum
volume of air produced is the same as the bowl
volume (see technical data).
120
4 Specifications
4.10 Sludge Piping

Specification
• The sludge pipe from the separator to the
sludge tank should be vertical.
If a vertical pipe is not possible, the deviation (A)

from the vertical line must not exceed 30°.
G004401A
• The sludge pipe must not extend below the

tank top.
NOTE
An extended sludge pipe will obstruct ventilation

and create back pressure that could cause
separator problems.
G004316A
Recommendation
In cases where sludge tank ventilation is
not adequate, and more than one separator
is connected to the same sludge tank, we
recommend that a butterfly valve is installed in
each sludge pipe.
NOTE
If a butterfly valve is not used, the bowl and the

operating system may be affected by corrosive fumes
and sludge from the sludge tank.
• If a butterfly valve is used, it should be

equipped with an interlocking switch
(connected to the separator starter) to
prevent the separator from being started G004411A
when the valve is not fully open.
121
4 Specifications
5 Commissioning and Initial

Start
5.1 Completion Check List

It is essential before starting up the separation
system that all modules are in good operating
condition and that all pipelines and control
equipment are properly connected to assure
correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing the

system installation:
NG
WARNI
!
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.
1. Check that transport seals are removed

from all pipes.
2. Use flushing filters to prevent pipe work

debris from being pumped into the
separation module.
NOTE
The flushing filters must be removed after initial

flushing.
3. Check that all separators are in

proper working condition. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
123
5 Commissioning and Initial Start
4. Make sure that separators are lubricated in

accordance with instructions.
NOTE
Make sure that the spindle bearings are

prelubricated
g08687t1
Drop some frame oil onto the bearings
5. Separators are delivered without oil in the

oil sump. For information on oil filling and
oil type, see the Separator Manual booklet.
NOTE
Too much, or too little oil may result in damage to

separator bearings.
Neglecting an oil change may result in damage
to separator bearings.
6. Power on.
7. Check that the separator rotation direction

corresponds with the arrow on the frame
by doing a quick start/stop (1–2 seconds.)
and looking at the motor fan rotation.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cables have been installed incorrectly,
the separator will rotate in reverse, and vital
rotating parts can unscrew.
8. Check the pump function and direction.
9. If a Sludge Removal Kit is used, check

that the sludge pump speed is set to circa
60 strokes/min.If necessary, adjust the
throttling valve (positioned after solenoid
valve SV 6).
124
5.2 Initial Start-up
NOTE
After every start the separator must always be run

continuously for a minimum of 1 hour to ensure proper
lubrication.
Use this check list for initial system start up:
1. Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.
2. Check water and air supply. See 1.3

System Data.
3. Check power supplies to the control unit

and that the voltage is in accordance with
data in 1.3 System Data.
4. Check all parameter settings in the control

unit. See Installation Parameters in the
Parameter List booklet.
5. Check the separator.
NOTE
Always lubricate the bearings before start-up.
NOTE
The Separation module is supplied with standard

configuration parameters. You may have to make
some changes to suit your installation.
6. Start the separation system as described in

the Operating Instructions booklet.
7. Start up step by step, checking that the

machine and module function properly.
8. Establish system pressures. The delivery

height pressure is the pressure in the oil
pipe work down stream from the separation
module, due to the pipe bends and the
height (head) to the cleaned oil tank. If the
cleaned oil tank is below the separation
module the delivery height pressure may
be very low. The oil paring disc pressure
will have to be greater than the delivery
height pressure for any oil to flow.
Proceed as follows:
125
• Ensure the valves in the oil system are

in the correct positions.
• The oil should be at separation
temperature.
For S-type separators:
• The paring tube should be able to

move freely.
• Ensure that V5 is closed.
• Fully open the back pressure
regulating valve RV4.
• The shut off valve V4 should be open.
• Open SV15 for 3 seconds to prime the
operating slide.
• Open SV16 for 15 seconds to close
the bowl.
• Open SV10 for 1 minute to put water
into the bowl.
• Feed oil to the separator at the normal
flow rate by opening SV1.
• Note the pressure in the oil outlet PT4,
both on the pressure gauge and in the
EPC 60 display.
This pressure is P min.
• Gradually close the back pressure
regulating valve RV4. The pressure on
PT4 will increase. The water pressure
(PT5) decreases slightly as the paring
tube moves inwards. The water
pressure will suddenly drop when oil
passes from the oil paring chamber to
the water paring chamber. Note the
pressure of PT4 both on the pressure
gauge and in the EPC 60 display.
This pressure is P max.
• Open RV4.
• Stop the oil feed to the separator and
note the pressure in the oil outlet. This
is the delivery height pressure P del.
• Stop the heater.
• Stop the separator.
• Stop the feed pump when the heater
has cooled.
126
For P-type separators:
• Fully open the back pressure

regulating valve RV4.
• Open SV15 for 5 seconds to prime the
operating slide.
• Open SV16 for 15 seconds to close
the bowl.
• Open SV10 for 5 seconds to put water
into the bowl.
• Feed oil to the separator at the normal
flow rate by opening SV1.
• Note the pressure in the oil outlet PT4,
both on the pressure gauge and in the
EPC 60 display.
This pressure is P min.
• Gradually close the back pressure
regulating valve RV4. The pressure on
PT4 will increase. The oil pressure will
suddenly drop when oil passes over to
the water outlet. Note the pressure of
PT4 both on the pressure gauge and
in the EPC 60 display.
This pressure is P max.
• Open RV4.
• Stop the oil feed to the separator and
note the pressure in the oil outlet. This
is the delivery height pressure P del.
• Stop the heater.
• Stop the separator.
• Stop the feed pump when the heater
has cooled.
127
5.2.1 Calculating Operating

Pressure
• Calculate the normal back pressure level
during operation as follows:
Pmin + Pmax
= Pnormal
2
• Calculate the value for low pressure alarm

setting (Pr 11) as follows:
Pmin + Pnormal
= Plow press.
2
• Calculate the value for high pressure alarm

setting (Pr 10) as follows:
Pnormal + Pmax
= Phigh press.
2
Adjust the back pressure to Pnormal
Set P154 to give alarm at pressure decreasing

below the Plow press. value.
Set P153 to give alarm at pressure increasing

above the Phigh press. value.
128
6 Shut-down and Storage
Storage before Installation

If the separation system is stored before
installation, the following safeguards must be
taken:
Storage period 1 < 6 months ≥6 months See

Action before storage
Protect from dust, dirt, X X This chapter
water, etc.
Protect with anti-rust oil X X This chapter
Action before
installation
Inspection service X Service manual
Overhaul service X Service manual
6.1 Shut-down after Use

If the separation system is going to be shut down
for a period of time, the following safeguards
must be taken:
Shut-down period 1 < 6 months 6 – 18 months > 18 months See

(stand-by)
Action before
storage
Remove bowl X X X Dismantling and
Assembly in the
Service Manual
Protect from dust, X X X This chapter
dirt, water, etc.
Protect with X X X This chapter
anti-rust oil
Inspection service X X Service manual
Overhaul service X Service manual
129
6.2 Protection and Storage

All system equipment, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored indoors
at 5 – 55°C, if not delivered in water-resistant
box for outdoor storage.
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the

equipment must be protected by ventilation and
heating above dew point.
The following protection products are

recommended:
• Anti-rust oil with long lasting effective

treatment for external surfaces. The oil
should prevent corrosion attacks and give
a waxy surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) thin
and lubricating for inside protection. It gives
a lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the
anti-rust oil after the shut-down.
• Moist remover to be packed together with
separator equipment.
• If the storage time exceeds 12 months,
the equipment must be inspected every 6
months and, if necessary, the protection be
renewed.
Modules
• Clean unpainted steel parts with solvent
and treat external surfaces with anti-rust oil
(type 112).
• If necessary, clean other equipment on the
module with solvent.
• Treat the equipment with anti-rust oil by
following the description above accordingly.
• Bolts, nuts and other external steel
components should be treated with
anti-rust oil (type 112).
Rubber Parts
• Gaskets, O-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two
years. After this time, they should be
replaced.
130
Separator
Dismantle the separator bowl and take out the
O-rings. Clean the bowl with oil and reassemble
without the O-rings. Place in a plastic bag with
silica dessicant bags and seal the plastic bag.
Grease the spindle.
Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment

• Components such as valves need to be
cleaned with solvent and treated with
anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated
with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics (e.g.
seals) must not be treated with anti-rust oil.
Electric Heater
• Fill the heater with a non-corrosive
lubricating oil.
• Place a number of bags of silica gel inside
the connection box to absorb humidity.
Steam Heater
• Drain the condensed water from the steam
valve and the steam trap.
• Drain all condensed water from the heater.
• Fill the oil part of the heater with a
non-corrosive lubricating oil.
Pump
• Clean the pump housing outside from oil
and grease with solvent.
• Protect the pump by filling it with
non-corrosive lubricating oil.
• Apply anti-rust oil on the pump housing
outside.
• Fill the pump screws with lubricating oil to
prevent rust.
131
6.3 Reassembly and Start up

• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white spirit.
• Remove the silica gel bags from all
modules.
• Pre-lubricate the separator spindle bearings
• If stored for 6 months or longer, perform an
inspection service (including change of oil
in the separator sump).
• Follow all relevant instructions in this
booklet and in the Separator Manual.
• Before operating the heater:
- Check by lifting the safety valve handle

that it functions correctly.
- Follow the start-up check list for
the heater in the manufacturer’s
instructions.
- For plate heat exchangers: check the
bolt connections to ensure that all
gaskets are tight.
NOTE
Always lubricate the bearings before start-up.
NOTE

lubrication.
132
Separator Manual
High speed separator
P 646
Specification No. 881203-09-02/0

Book No. 9027182-02 v4
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 Read this first 9
2 Safety instructions 11
2.1 Warning signs in text 15
2.2 Environmental issues 16
2.3 Requirements of personnel 17
2.4 Remote start 17
3 Basic principles of separation 19

3.1 Introduction 19
3.2 Separation by gravity 19
3.3 Centrifugal separation 20
3.4 Separating temperatures 20
4 Design and function 21

4.1 Overview 22
4.2 Drive section 23
4.3 Process section 24
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet 24
4.3.2 Separator bowl 25
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc 30
4.4 Sensors (optional) 34

4.5 Separating function 35
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl 35
4.5.2 Liquid flow 36
4.5.3 Discharge of water through water outlet 37
5 Operating instructions 39
5.1 Before first start 39
5.1.1 Start after service 40
5.2 Normal operation 41

5.2.1 Before normal start 41
5.2.2 Start 42
5.2.3 Operating 45
5.2.4 Stop 47
3
5.3 Emergency stop 48
6 Service, dismantling, assembly 49

6.1 Periodic maintenance 49
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals 49
6.1.2 Maintenance procedure 51
6.1.3 Tightening of screws 52
6.1.4 Service kits 53
6.2 Maintenance logs 54

6.3 Dismantling 57
6.3.1 Introduction 57
6.3.2 Tools 57
6.3.3 Frame hood 59
6.3.4 Bowl 62
6.3.5 Driving device 79
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch 99
6.4 Actions before assembly 108

6.4.1 Cleaning 108
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion 110
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks 112
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion 113
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet 115
6.4.6 Change of motor bearings 116
6.4.7 Lubrication of bowl parts 117
6.5 Assembly 118

6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch 119
6.5.2 Driving device 127
6.5.3 Bowl 148
6.5.4 In- and outlet device 166
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional) 169
6.5.6 Speed sensor 171
6.5.7 Actions after assembly 172
6.6 Oil change 174

6.6.1 Lubricating oil 174
6.6.2 Check oil level 175
6.6.3 Oil change procedure 175
6.6.4 Lubrication chart 176
6.6.5 Recommended lubricants 177
6.6.6 Lubricating oils 181
6.7 Lifting instructions 183

6.7.1 Lifting the separator 183
6.7.2 Lifting the bowl 185
7 Fault finding 187

7.1 Mechanical functions 187
7.1.1 Separator vibration 187
7.1.2 Smell 188
7.1.3 Noise 188
7.1.4 Speed too low 188
4
7.1.5 Speed too high 188

7.1.6 Starting power too high 189
7.1.7 Starting power too low 189
7.1.8 Starting time too long 189
7.2 Separating functions 190

7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally during operation 190
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge discharge 190
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation result 190
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close 191
8 Technical reference 193

8.1 Product description 193
8.1.1 Directives and standards 194
8.2 Technical data 196

8.3 Connection list 198
8.4 Interface description 201
8.4.1 Scope 201
8.4.2 References 201
8.4.3 Definitions 201
8.4.4 Goal 202
8.4.5 Description of separator modes 202
8.4.6 Remote start 204
8.4.7 Handling of connection interfaces 204
8.5 Demand specification water 210

8.6 Drawings 211
8.6.1 Basic size drawing 211
8.6.2 Foundation drawing 212
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram 213
8.6.4 Performance data in- and outlet device 214
8.6.5 Operating water interface 215
8.6.6 PX sealing diagram 217
8.6.7 Electric motor 218
9 Installation 219
9.1 Introduction 219
9.2 Upon arrival at the storage area 220
9.2.1 Transport 220
9.2.2 Protection and storage of goods 221
9.3 Planning of installation 222

9.3.1 Important measurements 222
9.3.2 Maintenance service 223
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding equipment 224
9.4 Storage at out of operation 225

9.5 Before start-up 225
5
Study instruction manuals and observe the

warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result

in serious accidents.
In order to make the information clear only

foreseeable conditions have been considered.
No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from the unintended usage of the
machine and its tools.
7
!
1 Read this first
This manual is designed for operators,

maintenance personnel and service engineers
working with the Alfa Laval separator
If the separator has been delivered and installed

by Alfa Laval as a part of a processing system,
this manual should be viewed as part of the
System Documentation. Study carefully all
instructions in any System Documentation.
In addition to this Separator Manual a Spare

Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
The Separator Manual consists of:
Safety instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.
Basic principles of separation

This chapter describes the purpose of
separation and separation principles.
Design and function

This chapter contains a description of the
separator.
Operating instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
Service, dismantling, assembly

This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains
step-by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and repair.
9
1 Read this first
Fault finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as a part

of a processing system, always refer to the
trouble-tracing instructions, in the System
Documentation.
Technical reference
This chapter contains technical data concerning
the separator and drawings.
Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.
NOTE
A complete reading of this manual by personnel in

contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate or
maintain the separator until they have read and fully
understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried out.
10
2 Safety instructions
!
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high
speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high.
• Great forces are generated.
• Stopping time is long.
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to G0010421
reduce undesired vibrations that can cause

a breakdown. Material properties have been
considered carefully during design to withstand
stress and fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a

specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not
be used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result

in unbalance due to build-up of sediment,
reduction of material strength, etc., that
subsequently could lead to serious damage
and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore

apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by Alfa
Laval. Applies not only to the process
but also to cleaning and service liquids.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent
and have sufficient knowledge of
maintenance and operation, especially
concerning emergency stopping
procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
11
!
• If power cables have been disconnected,
always check direction of motor rotation.
Incorrect direction rotation can cause vital
rotating parts to unscrew.
• This can be done by checking the rotation
on the motor fan.
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator

and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
• Use the separator only for the purpose and kPa

3
m /h
parameter range specified by Alfa Laval. 3

kg/m o
C
r/min
Hz
• Check that the gear/pulley ratio is correct

for power frequency used. If incorrect, 50Hz
subsequent overspeed may result in a 60Hz
serious break down.
• Welding or heating of parts that rotate can

seriously affect material strength.
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and erosion

damage. Inspect frequently if process or
cleaning liquid is corrosive or erosive.
Fall hazard
• Do NOT stand on the separator or separator
parts.
12
!
Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come
to a complete standstill before accessing
parts inside the machine or starting any
dismantling work. If there is no braking
function the run down time can exceed two
hours.
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Assemble the machine completely before
start. All covers, connections and guards
must be in place.
Electrical hazard
• Follow local regulations for electrical
installation and earthing (grounding).
• Only qualified electricians are allowed to

install and maintain the drive.
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
• Do not work under a hanging load.
Noise hazards
• Use ear protection in noisy environments.
Burn hazards
• Lubrication oil, machine parts and various
machine surfaces can be hot and cause
burns. Wear protective gloves.
13
!
Skin irritation hazards

• When using chemical cleaning agents,
make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation regarding
ventilation, personnel protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges, especially on bowl discs and
threads, can cause cuts. Wear protective
gloves.
Flying objects
• Risk for accidental release of snap rings and
springs when dismantling and assembly.
Wear safety goggles.
Health hazards
• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling
friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust
14
!
2.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three
grades of warning signs used in the text where
there is a risk for injury to personnel.
NGE R
! DA
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
NG
WARNI
!
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
15
!
2.2 Environmental issues

Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal
straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,

recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a

licensed waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material

recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with

local regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a

licensed waste incineration plant. If not available
they should be disposed to a suitable licensed
land fill site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent

to a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings and friction linings should be

disposed to a licensed land fill site. Check your
local regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be

sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
16
!
2.3 Requirements of personnel

Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed
to operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
• Skilled person: A person with technical

knowledge or sufficient experience to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
• Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person
to enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may

need to be hired, like electricians and others.
In some of these cases the personnel has to
be certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
2.4 Remote start

If the separator is operated from a remote
position where the separator cannot be seen
or heard the power isolation device shall be
equipped with an interlock device to prevent that
a remote start command could result in liquid
being fed to the separator when it is shut down
for service.
The first start after the separator has been taken

apart or been standing still for a long time shall
always be manually supervised locally.
17
!
3 Basic principles of separation
3.1 Introduction
The purpose of separation can be:
• to free a liquid of solid particles,

• to separate two mutually insoluble liquids
with different densities while removing any
solids presents at the same time,
• to separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
3.2 Separation by gravity

A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid mixture
sink to the bottom under the influence of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and

solids sink.
G0870111
Continuous separation and sedimentation can

be achieved in a settling tank having inlet and
outlet arranged according to the illustration.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle C

and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
A
B
D
G0870221
A. Lighter liquid
B. Heavier liquid
C. Gravity
D. Sediment layer of heavier particles
19
3 Basic principles of separation
3.3 Centrifugal separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity
is replaced by centrifugal force, which can be
thousands of times greater. A
B
Separation and sedimentation is continuous and
happens very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can

achieve in a few seconds what takes many
hours in a tank under influence of gravity.
The separation efficiency is influenced

by changes in the viscosity, separating
temperatures and in throughput. C
G0870321
A. Lighter liquid
B. Heavier liquid
C. Centrifugal force
3.4 Separating temperatures

For some types of process liquids a high
separating temperature will normally increase
the separation capacity. The temperature
influences viscosity and density and should be
kept constant throughout the separation.
Viscosity Density difference

Viscosity is a fluids resistance against movement. Density is mass per volume unit. The greater the
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can density difference between the two liquids, the
be reduced by heating. easier the separation. The density difference can
be increased by heating.
A B A B
G10348k1 G10348j1
A. High viscosity A. High density (with low temperature)

B. Low viscosity B. Low density (with high temperature)
20
4 Design and function
7
1
3
5 4
G08707E1
1. Electric motor
The rotating bowl is driven by the electric motor via a belt transmission.
2. Drive section
The rotating separator bowl is driven by a flat belt transmission with friction coupling.
3. Sludge outlet
Separated solids are discharged at preset intervals.
4. Lubrication system
Lubricates the bearings driven by the flat belt transmission.
5. Frame feet
The separator rests on vibration damping frame feet.
6. Sensors (optional)
The separator can be monitored by a speed sensor and an unbalance sensor.
7. Process section
The feed inlet and outlets are situated at the top of the separator. The liquid is cleaned in the
rotating separator bowl inside the frame hood.
21
4.1 Overview
The separator comprises a process section and
a drive section powered by an electric motor.
The separator frame comprises a lower body

and a frame hood. The motor is attached to the
frame. The frame feet dampen vibration.
The bottom part of the separator contains a flat

belt transmission, a centrifugal clutch and a
vertical spindle. The lower body also contains
an oil sump for lubrication of spindle bearings.
The inlet and outlet device contains the

processing parts of the separator; the inlets,
outlets and piping.
The process liquid is cleaned in the separator

bowl. The bowl is fitted on the upper part of a
vertical spindle and rotates at high speed inside
the frame hood. The bowl also contains the
discharge mechanism which empties the sludge
during operation.
A speed sensor (option) and an unbalance

sensor (option) are part of the equipment for
monitoring the separator functions.
22
4.2 Drive section

The separator bowl is driven by an electric
motor via a belt transmission. The belt pulley on
the motor shaft includes a centrifugal clutch.
The centrifugal clutch (2) with friction pads

ensures a gentle start and smooth acceleration,
and at the same time prevents overloading of
the belt and motor.
To reduce bearing wear and transmission of

bowl vibrations to the frame and foundation,
the top bearing of the bowl spindle is mounted
in a rubber dampened bearing seat (3). The
bearings on the spindle are lubricated by the
oil spray produced by an oil mist generator (4)
mounted on the lower end of the spindle.
The flat belt (1) transmission has a ratio

which increases the bowl speed several times
compared with the motor speed.
3 2
g08707H1
1. Flat belt
2. Centrifugal clutch
3. Rubber dampened bearing seat
4. Oil mist generator
23
4.3 Process section

The separation process takes place inside the
rotating separator bowl. The feed and outlet of
process liquid takes place in the inlet and outlet
unit on top of the separator frame hood.
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet

The inlet and outlet unit consists of the following 4
parts:
A connecting housing for pipe connections.

2
A pipe with a paring disc is located inside the 3
connecting housing. The pipe has channels for
incoming and outgoing process liquid.
The paring disc, pumps the cleaned oil out of

6
the bowl.
5
Separated water leaves the bowl through holes
in the bowl hood and is discharged through the
sludge outlet.
The paring disc is located inside and at the top 1

of the separator bowl.
The inlet and outlet device is held together

against the frame hood by a nut on the end of
the inlet pipe.
Height adjusting rings determine the height

position of the paring disc relative to the bowl.
G08861d1
1. Connecting housing
2. Uncleaned oil
3. Cleaned oil
4. Sealing water
5. Paring disc
6. Separated water
24
4.3.2 Separator bowl

The separator bowl, with its sludge discharge
mechanism, is built-up as follows:
The bowl body and bowl hood are held together

by a lock ring (Centrilock). Inside the bowl are
the distributor and the disc stack. The disc
stack is kept compressed by the bowl hood.
The discharge slide forms a separate bottom
in the bowl body.
The upper space between the bowl hood and 16

15 1
the top disc forms the water chamber. From 2
here the separated water is discharged through 14 3
holes in the bowl hood. 4
5
The oil paring chamber, with its paring disc, is
located inside the top of the distributor. From 6
here the cleaned oil is pumped out of the bowl. 7
The sludge space is in the bowl periphery. The 8
bowl is kept closed by the discharge slide, which
seals against a seal ring in the bowl hood.
At fixed intervals, decided by the operator, the 9

13
discharge slide drops down to empty the bowl
of sludge. 12 11 10
G08869c1
The sludge discharge mechanism, which 1. Gravity disc

controls the movement of the discharge slide, 2. Top disc
is comprised of an operating slide and an 3. Oil paring chamber
operating water ring. Passive parts are: nozzle 4. Disk stack
and valve plugs. The operating water cover, 5. Lock ring
beneath the bowl, supplies operating water 6. Seal ring
to the discharge mechanism via the operating 7. Discharge slide
water ring. 8. Operating slide
9. Sludge space
10. Distributor
11. Operating water ring
12. Holder
13. Nozzle
14. Bowl body
15. Water paring chamber
16. Bowl hood
25
Purifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part 0
of the purifier bowl, the gravity disc. The disc

should be chosen according to directions in
“Selection of gravity disc”.
The gravity disc determines the interface

position in a purifier bowl.
A purifier bowl has two liquid outlets, oil and

water.
G06855E1
Position of interface
An interface (1) is formed between the oil and
water in the bowl. In order to achieve optimum
separation of the oil, the interface must be
maintained in the correct position, which is
between the disc stack and the outer edge of
the top disc. If the interface moves outside the
outer edge of the top disc the water seal will
break and oil will be discharged with the water.
An interface positioned inside the disc stack will
cause bad separation results.
1
The position of the interface is adjusted by
altering the pressure balance of the liquid G00470C1
phases oil and water inside the separator, which
is done by exchanging the gravity disc. For this
purpose a number of gravity discs with various
hole diameters are delivered with the separator.
26
A. Correct interface position

B. Wrong interface position - broken water
seal
C. Wrong interface position - bad separation
G0011721
27
Factors influencing the interface position

1 – Oil viscosity, density and throughput
Oil with high density and/or high viscosity,

as well as high throughput, will position the
oil/water interface closer to the bowl periphery
than for oil with low properties.
G0011821
A. High viscosity/density/throughput
B. Low viscosity/density/throughput
2 – Gravity disc
To compensate for the above factors the

interface is adjusted to a correct position by
altering the outlet for the water, i.e. exchanging
the gravity disc. Changing to a gravity disc with
a larger hole diameter will move the interface
towards the bowl periphery, whereas, a disc with
a smaller hole diameter will move the interface
closer to the bowl centre.
G0011921
A. Gravity disc with large hole diameter

B. Gravity disc with small hole diameter
3 – Excessive back pressure.
Excessively high back pressure in the oil outlet

prevents the oil from being pumped out. The
inner oil level will then move towards centre
of the bowl and, at the same time, push the
oil/water interface outwards towards the bowl
periphery. The effect is a wrong interface
position, which may cause broken water seal.
G0012021
A. Excessive back pressure

B. Normal back pressure
28
Clarifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part of 0
the clarifier bowl. In clarification the gravity disc

is replaced by a so called clarifier disc, i.e. a
disc with the smallest possible hole diameter
(Ø) which seals off the water outlet. No liquid
seal is needed when clarifying.
G06855F1
29
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc

The separator is delivered with a set of gravity
discs.
Clarification
When running the separator as a clarifier, select
the gravity disc with the smallest hole diameter,
the so-called clarifier disc. See the Spare Parts
Catalogue for correct hole diameter.
Purification
A number of gravity discs are delivered for 0
operating the separator as a purifier. The
diameter of a gravity disc sets the position
of the oil-water interface in the separator.
The separation efficiency can be optimized
by selection of the correct diameter for each
process.
When selecting a gravity disc the general rule

is to use the disc with the largest possible hole
without causing a break in the water seal.
The heavier or more viscous the light phase

(oil) and the larger the liquid feed the smaller
the diameter should be.
G06855E1
To remove more of the light phase (oil) from

the heavy phase (water), the interface should
be placed nearer the bowl centre, however not
inside the outer edge of the discs (too small
gravity disc), as this would prevent the liquid
flow.
For a more detailed description of the interface

position, see Purifier bowl on page 26.
Some gravity discs have four small holes drilled

outside the large hole. You must pay regard to
these holes when measure the diameter Ø, see
the illustration. Measure between the centres
of the holes.
All gravity discs have their diameters stamped

on them. G0732921
30
As an aid, use the nomogram to find the correct

gravity disc. It can be used when the density
of the oil at a temperature of 15 °C is known.
However, note that the nomogram is purely
theoretical. In practical operation, practice the
following general rule:
1. Fit a gravity disc one size larger than the

recommended in the nomogram.
2. Run the separator.
3. Observe if oil flows through the sludge
outlet.
- If Yes, stop the separator and fit the

next smaller gravity disc.
- If No, stop the separator and fit the next
larger gravity disc.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 above until having the
gravity disc with the largest hole diameter
without causing a break of the water seal.
31
Nomogram, gravity disc

Density Ratio Density (kg/m )

3 Density Ratio O (mm)
1,00 1,00
Max
991
71,8
990 73 72,3
I 75,1
73,9
76,6
0,95 0,95 78,6
950 81,1
84,3
88,3
0,90 0,90
900 93,3
II
0,85 0,85 99,5
850
107,1
0,80 0,80
800
0,75 0,75
15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
o
T ( C) Q (m3/h)
G1163511
Density above 991 at 15°C not allowed.
32
How to use the nomogram
The presence of salt water may demand the

use of a gravity disc with a larger diameter than
indicated in the nomogram (the nomogram is
based on the properties of fresh water).
Example I in nomogram
Reference in graph:
G10348h1
Oil density: 965 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature: 98 °C
Throughput: 4 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc with

a hole diameter of 81,1 mm should be tried.
Example II in nomogram
Reference in graph:
G10348i1
Oil density: 875 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature: 90 °C
Throughput: 2,5 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc with

a hole diameter of 99,5mm should be tried.
33
4.4 Sensors (optional)

The separator is equipped with a speed sensor.
As option, an unbalance sensor can be fitted.
Speed sensor
A speed sensor (2) indicates the speed of the

separator. The correct speed is needed to
achieve the best separating results and for
reasons of safety. Refer to type plate for speed
particulars.
Monitoring kit (optional)

1
For indication of any abnormal unbalance,
the separator can be equipped with a sensor
(1) monitoring the radial position of the bowl
spindle. 2
G08734i1
1. Unbalance sensor
2. Speed sensor
34
4.5 Separating function

The separator separates water and solids from
the uncleaned oil. Water normally leaves the
separator through the water outlet. During
sludge discharge, solids (sludge) and water are
removed through the discharge ports.
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the

bowl
The liquid levels in the bowl depend on many 1
factors (bowl geometry, liquid densities, flow 2
rates etc.). To get a picture of how the liquids A
are distributed in the bowl, imagine that the bowl
is at standstill and turned 90° (only influenced 3
by gravity). The bowl can now be compared 7
with a settling tank: 4
6
5
1
2
B 3
G0886491
A. Separator bowl turned 90º

B. Settling tank
1. Unseparated oil
2. Separated oil
3. Separated water
4. Top disc
5. Oil/water interface
6. Distributor
7. Gravity
35
4.5.2 Liquid flow

Unseparated oil is fed into the bowl through the
inlet pipe and travels via the distributor towards
the periphery of the bowl.
When the oil reaches slots in the disc stack, it

rises through the channels formed by the disc
stack, where it is evenly distributed.
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels

towards the centre of the bowl. When the
cleaned oil leaves the disc stack, it flows through
a number of holes in the distributor and enters
the oil paring chamber, over a level ring. From
here it is pumped by the oil paring disc, and
leaves the bowl through the oil outlet. Separated
water, sludge and solid particles, which are
heavier than the oil, are forced towards the
periphery of the bowl and collect in the sludge
space.
The space between the bowl hood and top disc,

as well as the water chamber, is filled with water,
which flows over the gravity disc through holes
in the bowl hood.
36
4.5.3 Discharge of water through water outlet
B A
C
9 10
8
D
7
4
1
2
6 3
G08862c1
A. Unseparated oil
B. Water
C. Separated oil
D. Water outlet
1. Uncleaned oil
2. Cleaned oil
3. Liquid seal / displacement- / separated water
4. Top disc
5. Sludge space
6. Oil/water interface
7. Oil paring chamber
8. Oil paring disc
9. Bowl hood
10. Water chamber
37

5 Operating instructions
These operating instructions describe routine

procedures to be followed before and during the
start sequence, during the running and stopping
sequence of the separator.
If system documentation is available, always

follow the operating instructions therein. If there
is no system documentation, the instructions
below are to be followed.
5.1 Before first start

Technical demands for connections and
limitations for the separator are listed in
“Technical Reference”
- Technical data
- Connection list
- Interface description
- Operating water demands
- Basic size drawing
- Foundation drawing
Before first start:
• Ensure the machine is installed and

assembled correctly and that feed lines and
drains have been flushed clean.
• Fill oil in the oil bath. See oil change
procedure in section Oil change on
page 174. For quality of oil, see section
Lubricating oils on page 181.
39
• Make sure that the oil level is in middle of

the sight glass, see Oil change on page
174.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage the

separator bearings.
NOTE
The separator should be level when oil is filled.
g1041381
• Check the direction of rotation by doing

a quick start/stop. The motor fan should
rotate clockwise.
If motor fitted with additional end cover, this
can be removed to see motor fan. Refit end
cover when direction of rotation checked.
G08707d1
5.1.1 Start after service

Pay special attention to any unusual sounds or
vibrations when starting the separator after a
service. Different fault symptoms are listed in
chapter 7 Fault finding on page 187.
40
5.2 Normal operation
5.2.1 Before normal start

To achieve the best separation results, the bowl
should be in a clean condition.
1. Make sure that the bowl is clean and 1

that the separator is properly assembled.
Check:
- that all couplings and connections

(1) are securely tightened to prevent
leakages. Leaking hot liquid can cause
burns.
- that the lock nut (2) is fully tightened.
Do not forget the washer.
- that all frame hood bolts (3) as well as
the belt cover are fully tightened.
- the direction of rotation by doing a
quick start/stop. The motor fan (4)
should rotate clockwise. 2
- the oil bath level. Top up if necessary. 4
NOTE 3
The separator should be level and at standstill

when oil is filled.
ON
CAUTI
!
separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
G1041371
parts can loosen.
ON
CAUTI
!
After change of feed the sludge discharge
interval must be adjusted. Breakdown may result
if the intervals between discharges are too long.
41
5.2.2 Start
1. Start of separator.
a. Open the water supply valve.
b. Start the separator by pushing the start

button at the starter unit.
NOTE
After every start the separator must always be

run continuously for a minimum of 1 hour to
ensure proper lubrication.
O I
R
G08717d1
42
2. Check the separator for vibration.
NOTE
Normal vibration
Some vibrations occur for short periods during
the starting cycle, when the separator passes
through its critical speeds. This is normal and
passes without danger. Try to learn the vibration
characteristics during the critical speed.
G0871891
NG
WARNI
!
Excessive vibration
If vibration increases, or continues at full speed,
keep bowl filled and stop the separator.
The cause of the vibration must be determined
and corrected before starting again! Excessive
vibration may be due to incorrect assembly or
insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
NOTE
Be alert for unusual noises and any other unusal

conditions.
3. Ensure that the separator is at full speed

(after about 60 - 150 seconds).
I
The time by full speed can be checked by R O
studying the ammeter.
- Current increases during start (1). 1

- When full speed has been reached,
the current decreases to a stable value
(2).
2
For normal length of the start-up period,
see 8.2 Technical data on page 196 G0871931
43
4. For purification:
Supply water to form the water-seal. The

water should be hot.
a. Close the water feed when water flows

out through the water outlet.
b. Start the oil feed slowly to avoid

breaking the water seal.
5. For clarification:
a. Start the oil feed with full flow.
6. Adjust to desired throughput.
7. For both purification and clarification

modes:
Check the separator inlet and outlet

pressures. See recommended values in
your system documentation.
44
5.2.3 Operating
1. Checkpoints during operation:
a. Check all connections for leakage.
b. Check that the feed has correct flow

and temperature.
c. Check the back pressure.
d. Check that the starter ammeter (1)

reading is the normal low and steady
value.
e. Check for abnormal vibrations and

sounds.
NG 1
WARNI
! R
O I
Do not discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration G08717e1
can increase if solidified sludge is only partially

discharged.
1. Ammeter
NG
WARNI
!
Burning hazard
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces can
be hot and cause burns.
45
5.2.3.1 Sludge discharge
1. Performing a discharge.
a. Close the feed (connection 201).
b. Perform a displacement (of the oil) by

opening connection 206 for 10 seconds.
c. Initiate a discharge by supplying

discharge water (connection 375) for 3
seconds.
d. Pause for 15 seconds.
e. Close the bowl by supplying make up

water (connection 375) for 15 seconds. G08717f1
f. Apply liquid seal by opening connection

206 for 4 seconds.
g. Open the feed (connection 201).
NOTE
Before turning on the feed, make sure that

the oil has the correct temperature.
46
5.2.4 Stop
1. Stopping the separator.
a. Turn off the oil feed.
b. Perform an oil displacement.

I
R O
c. Stop the separator.
NOTE G0872331
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to

minimize the vibrations.
d. Wait until the separator has come

to a complete standstill (it takes
approximately 35 minutes).
Check rotation of motor fan.

If motor fitted with additional end
cover, this can be removed to see if
motor fan is rotating. Refit end cover
when separator has come to complete G08707d1
standstill.
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come
to a complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
47
5.3 Emergency stop

1. If the separator vibrates excessively push
the emergency stop button (1).
NOTE
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to minimize

the vibrations.
1
G08712A1
2. Evacuate the room. EXIT
NG
WARNI
!
Never discharge a vibrating separator.
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come
to a complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
NG
WARNI
! G08713A1
After an emergency stop, the cause of the fault
must be identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause

not found, contact Alfa Laval for advice before
restarting the separator.
48
6 Service, dismantling,
assembly
6.1 Periodic maintenance

Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces the
risk of unexpected stoppages and breakdowns.
Follow the maintenance log in this chapter in
order to facilitate the periodic maintenance.
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals

The following directions for periodic maintenance
give a brief description of parts to be cleaned,
checked and renewed at different maintenance
intervals. The maintenance log for each
maintenance interval, see page 54, gives a
detailed list of actions to be performed.
Inspection [i]
An Inspection consists of an overhaul of the
separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating water
device at max. 6 months or 4000 operating
hours.
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed.
Overhaul [o]
An Overhaul consists of an overhaul of the
complete separator (including separator bowl,
inlet/outlet and operating device) at max. 18
months or 12000 operating hours. Seals,
bearings, friction blocks and flat belt in the
separator are renewed.
Oil change
The oil should be changed every 4000 hours,
or at least once every year if the total number of
operating hours is less than 4000 hours/year.
49
6 Service, dismantling, assembly
Electric motor
Motor service consists of an overhaul of the
motor at max. 36 months or 24000 operating
hours.
Bearings, fan, seals and washers for the motor
are renewed.
Ancillary
Verify correct flow at inspection service overhaul
water valveblock at least every 36 months.
50
6.1.2 Maintenance procedure

At each Inspection and/or Overhaul, take a copy
of the maintenance log and use it to make notes
during the service.
An inspection and overhaul should be carried

out as follows:
1. Dismantle the parts as described in 6.3

Dismantling on page 57.
Place the separator parts on clean, soft

surfaces such as pallets.
2. Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
parts according to the maintenance log and
description in 6.4 Actions before assembly
on page 108.
3. Fit all the parts delivered in the service
kit while assembling the separator as
described in 6.5 Assembly on page 118.
4. When the separator is assembled, make
final checks described in 6.5.7 Actions after
assembly on page 172.
NG
WARNI
!
Separator parts that are either missing, worn beyond
their safe limits or incorrectly assembled, may cause
severe damage or fatal injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn and corrode hazard
Escaping hot and/or corroding process material, which
can be hazardous, may still remain in the separator
after stop.
51
The use of service symbols in the

dismantling/assembly instructions
Parts that have to be renewed from the service
kits (see below) are marked [i] and/or [o] in the
assembly instructions.
Example
a. Fit the O-ring [i].
When dismantling and assembling between the

service periods, some procedures do not have
to be carried out. These procedures are marked
[i] and/or [o].
All symbols used in the instructions refer to

activities mentioned in the maintenance logs.
6.1.3 Tightening of screws

Tightening all screws with the correct torque
value is important.
These figures apply unless otherwise stated:
Torque
Metric Stainless steel Carbon steel
thread Nm kpm lb.ft Nm kpm Ib.ft
M4 1,7 0,17 1,2 2,25 0,25 1,8
M5 3,4 0,34 2,5 4,9 0,49 3,6
M6 7 0,7 5 8 0,8 5,9
M8 17 1,7 13 20 2 14,7
M10 33 3,4 24 39 3,9 28,7
M12 57 5,8 42 68 6,9 50
M16 140 14 100 155 15,8 114
M20 270 28 200 325 33 239
M24 470 48 340 570 58 420
The figures apply to lubricated screws tightened

with a torque wrench.
52
6.1.4 Service kits

Special service kits are available for Inspection,
Overhaul and Motor.
For other services, a Support kit is available.

Spare parts not included in the Support kit have
to be ordered separately.
Note that the parts for Inspection are included

in the Overhaul kit.
The contents of the kits are described in the

Spare Parts Catalogue.
NOTE
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as otherwise the

warranty may become invalid. Alfa Laval takes no
responsibility for the safe operation of the equipment
if non-genuine spare parts are used.
NG
WARNI
!
Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe damage.
53
6.2 Maintenance logs

Name of ship/plant: Local identification:
Separator: Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours. Product No:
Date: Signature:
Part [i] [o] Check Action Page Note

In- and outlet device
- All parts x x Clean 108
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 110
- All parts x x Check for cracks 112
- Connecting housing x x Check for erosion damages 113
x x Renew O-rings for hoses ---
- Frame hood x Renew O-ring 166
x Control measure of paring 166
disc height
x Check height adjusting rings 166
x Renew the spring
- Inlet pipe thread x x Lubricate
Bowl
- All parts x x Clean 108
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 110
- All parts x x Check for cracks 112
- All parts x x Check for erosion damages 113
- Bowl body x x Check for impact marks and 62
corrosion
x x Renew rectangular ring 62
x Renew guide ring 62
x x Renew O-rings 62
x x Renew holder screws and 62
washers
- Operating slide x x Renew rectangular ring 62
x x Renew valve plugs 62
- Discharge slide x x Renew rectangular ring 62
- In- and outlet pipe x x Renew O-rings 62
x x Renew splash sealing 62
54

- Lock ring x Check for deformations 62
x Check for impact marks 62
x Check pin not deformed or 62
loose
- Bowl hood x x Renew seal ring 62
x x Renew O-ring 62
- Operating water ring x x Renew seal ring and screws 62
Frame
- Frame feet Renew frame feet (including 127 Has to be
washers and screws) ordered
separately
- Drain and oil filling x x Renew washers 127
holes
Driving device
- All parts x Clean 108
- All parts x Check for corrosion 110
- All parts x Check for cracks 112
- Bottom bearing x Renew O-ring 127
housing
- Labyrinth ring holder x Renew labyrinth ring 127
x Renew O-ring 127
- Top bearing housing x Renew springs 127
x Renew rubber buffer 133
- Flat belt x Renew flat belt 127
- Bowl spindle x Pre-lubricate and renew ball 127
bearing
x Pre-lubricate and renew 127
self-aligning roller bearing
x Lubricate the spindle 127
x Measure the radial wobble 127
- Neck bearing cover x Renew O-ring 127
- Deflector ring x Renew O-ring 127
- Water inlet pipe x Renew O-ring 127
- Operating water cover x Renew seal ring and O-ring 127
x Check that operating water 127
channel is free from blockage
- Fan x Renew O-ring 127
Coupling
- All parts x Clean 108
- All parts x Check for corrosion 110
- All parts x Check for cracks 112
55

- Coupling hub x Renew single row ball 99
bearings
x Renew snap rings 99
- Friction block x Renew friction pads (if they 99
are worn) or clean the pads if
they are dirty
Electrical motor
- Bearings x* Renew bearings, fan, seals 49 *) Check
and washers maintenance
interval Electric
motor
Signs and on separator
- Machine plate x Check attachment an legibility 172
- Power supply x Check attachment an legibility 172
frequency
- Lifting instructions x Check attachment an legibility 172
- Safety labels x Check attachment an legibility 172
- Name plate x Check attachment an legibility 172
- Representative label x Check attachment an legibility 172
56
6.3 Dismantling
6.3.1 Introduction
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must be
lifted by means of a hoist. Position the hoist
exactly above the bowl centre. Use a lifting sling
and lifting hooks with safety catches.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don’t

place parts directly on the floor, but on a clean
rubber mat, fiberboard or a suitable pallet.
NOTE
For safety reasons, it is essential that all personnel

who work with the separator read this manual
thoroughly and completely. Do not allow personnel to
clean, assemble, operate or maintain the separator
until they have read and fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the separator and the work to be carried
out.
6.3.2 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used for
dismantling and assembly, as well as Standard
tools (not included). The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue and are
illustrated at the beginning of each dismantling
section.
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-out
power supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a complete

standstill before starting any dismantling work (takes
about 35 minutes from switch off).
If motor fitted with additional end cover, this can be

removed to see if motor fan is rotating. Refit end cover
when separator has come to complete standstill.
57
Standard Tools
G0911691
1. Screwdriver
2. Torque wrench (capacity 0-200 Nm)
3. Drift (Ø 4 mm)
4. Dial indicator with magnetic base
5. Hexagon head keys, various sizes
6. Heating equipment for bearings
7. Sliding calliper
8. Hammers (standard and soft-faced)
9. Pliers for internal snap rings
10. Pliers for external snap rings
11. T-handle with extension rod,
sockets (various sizes)
12. Spanners (various sizes)
13. Adjustable spanner
14. Shackle
58
6.3.3 Frame hood
1
2
3
4
5
G0863331
6
10
G1138911
1. Lock nut
2. Washer
3. Connecting housing
4. Screws
5. Screws
6. Washer
7. Frame hood
8. O-ring
9. Height adjusting rings
10. Support ring
59
1. Removing the connecting housing.
a. Remove connections before starting

dismantling.
b. Lubricate the inlet pipe thread
c. Remove the lock nut, using the hook

spanner, and the washer.
1
NG
WARNI
!
The nut must not be removed before the
separator has stopped.
d. Press the inlet pipe (1) down, with a

soft material, to loosen the connecting
housing.
e. Remove the connecting housing.
G08635c1
1. Inlet pipe
60
2. Removing the frame hood.
a. Remove the screws (1) holding the

frame hood (3).
b. Loosen the hood by bending with a

screwdriver (2) in all grooves in the
hood.
c. Lift off the frame hood (3).
NOTE
Do not place the hood upside down.
G08636l1
1. Screws
2. Screwdriver
3. Frame hood
61
6.3.4 Bowl
G0861621
1 2
3
6
4
7
8
9
10
G1019231
1. Compressing tool (lock ring)

2. Lifting eyes
3. Spanner for nut (nut/discharge slide)
4. Puller (discharge slide)
5. Lifting tool (distributor, spindle)
6. Puller (Bowl body)
7. Screw (lock ring) (M5)
8. Hexagon head key
9. Chisel (seal ring)
10. Pin (distributor/lifting tool)
62

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33 32
G1139211
64
1. Lock ring
2. Bowl hood
3. Seal ring
4. O-ring
5. Gravity disk
6. O-ring
7. O-ring
8. Top disc
9. O-rings
10. Inlet and outlet pipe
11. Splash sealing
12. Bowl discs
13. Bowl discs
14. Distributor
15. Cap nut
16. Nut
17. Discharge slide
18. Rectangular ring
19. O-ring
20. Bowl body
21. O-ring
22. Guide ring
23. Valve plugs
24. Guide ring
25. O-ring
26. Nozzle
27. Rectangular ring
28. O-ring
29. Holder
31. Screws
32. Seal ring
33. Screws & washers
65
1. Removing the lock ring.
a. Fit the compressing tool (A).

A
b. Fit the clamps (C) and the screws (B) D
to stop.
F
2
3
NOTE
Be sure not to cover the threaded holes for 4 1

the lock ring.
B
c. Compress the disc stack by alternately C
5
tightening the inner screws with 6
washers (F) on the compressing tool in
increments of 5 Nm up to a maximum
of 30 Nm.
NOTE 1
G
If the separator have been out of operation
H
and the bowl is cold, a higher compression
torque might be required due to oil residue I
between bowl hood and bowl body. It these

cases a compression torque up to 60 Nm can
be used to open the bowl.
E
d. Fit the dismantling screws (D) to the
bowl body and press out the lock ring
by tightening the screws successively
according to the numbering in the
illustration (1-6). Start with the screw
(1) nearest to the lock ring end (G), the
one without pin (I), and then continue
around until the other end (H) is G08627B3
reached. The lock ring can be removed

when it has passed the edge of the A. Compressing tool
groove. B. Screw
C. Clamp
e. Remove the lock ring (E) from the D. Dismantling screw
E. Lock ring
groove.
F. Compressing screw with washer
G. Lock ring end without pin
H. Lock ring end with pin
NOTE I. Pin
Remove the dismantling screws.
66
2. Removing the bowl hood.
a. Remove the compressing screws with A

washers(A). B
b. Loosen the screws (B) on the clamp
tool. Remove the tool. Remove the
lock ring.
NOTE
See removing the bowl hood with optional

hydraulic tool (if purchased) on next page.
c. Fit the compressing tool and the puller

screws (C). Pull the bowl hood off by
screwing the screws alternately (max.
1/2 turn) and gradually increase the C
momentum evenly until the bowl hood
come loose.
NOTE
The bowl hood must be pulled off straight

up, in order not to get stuck.
Recommendation: Take measurements with

a calliper around the bowl, between the
upper edge of the bowl body and the bowl
hood, to check that the bowl hood is being
pulled off straight up.
d. Remove the clamps and attach lifting

eyes (D) to the compressing tool and lift D
off the bowl hood using slings and hoist.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
The top disc can adhere to the bowl hood
when lifting. Be careful not to accidentally G08628L1
drop it.
A. Compressing screw with washer
B. Screw
C. Puller screw
D. Lifting eye
67
3. Removing the top disc and in- and outlet

pipe.
a. Carefully tap out the top disc, together

with the gravity disc, and lift up the bowl
hood (1).
b. Lift out the in- and outlet pipe (2).
G08629e1
1. Bowl hood
68
4. Removing the seal ring.
a. Place the bowl hood on a support and

tap out a piece of the seal ring (A) using
a drift in the holes.
NG
WARNI
!
Risk for eye injury from flying seal A
ring parts or from splashing fluid
The seal ring breaks when removed from the
bowl hood and may cause trapped fluid to
splash. Wear safety goggles.
B
b. Turn the bowl hood upside down and
remove the seal ring by carefully knock
pieces of the seal ring out of the groove,
using the special chisel (B) tool.
NOTE
G08624A1
It is very important not to damage the bottom
of the groove! A. Seal ring
B. Chisel
69
5. Removing the disc stack and distributor.
A C
D
G08631D1
A. Lifting tool
B. Disc stack
C. Bowl discs
D. Pin
a. Assemble the lifting tool (A) with the

pin (D).
b. Fit the assembled tool into the

distributor and ease off the disc stack
using a spanner or wrench.
c. Carefully lift out the disc stack (B)

assembly.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl discs (C) may
cause cuts.
70
6. Removing the nut.
Before the nut can be loosened, the bowl

body must first be secured to prevent it
from rotating.
a. Fit a lifting sling on one of the

compressing tool clamps (A). Fit the B
clamp (A) to the bowl body.
C D
A
NOTE
Make sure that the screw on clamp (A) is

tightened and that clamp will not loosen.
b. Fit one of the frame hood screws (D) to

the frame.
E
NOTE G0923871
Make sure that the screw (D) in frame bottom A. Clamp

part is sufficiently tightened so as not to B. Spanner
loosen. C. Lifting sling
D. Screw
c. Fasten the other end of the lifting sling E. Nut
(C) on the screw (D). Make sure that
the lifting sling is fully tensed before
starting to uncrew the nut.
NOTE
Make sure that the lifting sling is positioned

below the head of the screw (D).
d. Use the spanner (B) to remove the

nut (E).
71
7. Removing the discharge slide.
a. Fit the lifting tool (A) by pressing the A

puller rods (E) towards each other and
position them into the two slots on the
B
bowl body (F).
Slide metal ring (D) down over bowl

nave. E
b. Ease off the discharge slide (C) by

turning the central screw (B).
NOTE
If discharge slide is difficult to remove, tap

lightly on outside edge with a soft faced D
E
hammer.
C
c. Lift out the discharge slide (C).
F
NG
WARNI
!
C
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be pushed
down against the discharge slide, otherwise
the discharge slide may come loose from the
tool.
G0863291
A. Lifting tool
B. Screw
C. Discharge slide
D. Ring
E. Puller rod
F. Bowl body
72
8. Removing the cap nut.
a. Remove the cap nut (A).

A
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G08606F1
A. Cap nut
9. Removing the bowl body.
G0860741
A. Lifting tool
B. Lifting eye
a. Fit the lifting tool (A) to the bowl body.
b. Raise the bowl body off the spindle

taper by turning the lifting eye (B)
clock-wise.
c. Lift off the bowl body using sling and

hoist.
73
10. Turn the bowl body upside down.
G0860841
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to prevent
it from rolling.
74
11. Removing the holder.

C
A
D
G0860951
A. Screw
B. Holder
C. Threaded hole
D. Washer
a. Remove and discard the screws (A) and

washers (D). New screws and washers
are included in the Inspection kit.
b. Remove the holder (B).
NOTE
If the ring sticks, use two M8 screws in

threaded holes (C) to raise the operating
slide holder up and away from the bowl body.
75
12. Removing the operating slide.
a. Lift off the operating slide. A
NOTE

threaded holes to raise the operating slide
holder up and away from the bowl body.
G08610N1
A. Operating slide
13. Removing the valve plugs from the

operating slide.
a. Remove the valve plugs using a

drift (A). A
G0874891
A. Drift
76
14. Removing the guide ring. [O]
a. Gently pry loose the guide ring and

remove it from the bowl. Discard the
guide ring. A new guide ring is included
in the Overhaul kit.
NOTE
Do NOT remove the guide ring if only an

Inspection service [I] is performed.
G08610o1
A. Guide ring
77
15. Removing the operating water ring.

A
G0861141
A. Screw
B. Ring
C. Threaded hole
a. Remove and discard the screws

(A). New screws are included in the
Inspection kit.
b. Lift off the ring (B).
NOTE

threaded holes (C) to raise the operating
slide holder up and away from the bowl body.
78
6.3.5 Driving device
G0857821
3 4 5
1 2 7 8
G08579j1
1. Puller (spindle pulley, ball bearing)

2. Tool (bearing housing)
3. Cover puller (neck bearing cover)
4. Lifting tool (spindle assembly)
5. Drift (bottom bearing)
6. Sleeve (ball bearing in top bearing seat
7. Spanner (fan)
8. Crowfoot wrench head (oil mist generator)
79
42 23
1 43 24
2
3
5 25
4
6 9 26
7
8 10
27
11
28
12
13
14 29
30
31
15 32
33
34
16 35
17 36
18 37
19
20 38
39
21
40
22 41
G1188711
80
1. Seal ring
2. Operating water cover
3. O-ring
4. O-rings
5. O-ring
6. Pipe
7. Elbow
8. Bushing
9. Deflector ring
10. Seal rings
11. Neck bearing cover
12. O-ring
13. O-rings
14. Fan
15. Bowl spindle
16. Screw
17. Lid
18. Screw
19. Lid
20. Ball bearing
21. Rubber buffer
22. Top bearing seat
23. Helical springs
24. Top bearing housing
25. Screw
26. Air deflector
27. Spindle pulley
28. Belt
29. Self-aligning roller bearing
31. Nozzle
32. Screw
33. Labyrinth ring holder
34. O-ring
35. Labyrinth ring
36. Pipe
37. O-ring
38. Bottom bearing holder
39. Screw
40. O-ring
41. Strainer
42. Screw
43. Vibration sensor arm, [Part of monitoring kit]
(screws and sleeves included)
81
1. Empty the oil sump.
Remove oil filling plug (A).
Unscrew the oil plug (B) and empty the oil

sump.
B
G0868591
A. Oil filling plug

B. Oil plug
2. Removing the belt cover.
a. Unscrew the screws (1).

They are captive and will hang on cover.
b. Remove the belt cover (2).
2
1
G1045931
1. Screw
2. Belt cover
82
3. Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a. Loosen, but do not remove, the screws

6
holding the adaptor plate. Start with 1 2
the four stud bolt nuts (3) on separator
frame side. 3
b. Loosen, but do not remove, the two 5

tilting screws (4) holding the adaptor 4
plate.
Tilt the motor together with the adaptor
plate slightly.
3
4
NG
WARNI
!
3
Crush hazard
The motor will come off if the screws are
unscrewed.
c. Remove the flat belt from the motor

pulley.
7
G08646D1
1. Motor
2. Separator frame
3. Nut
4. Screw
5. pin screw
6. Adaptor plate
7. Flat belt
83
4. Removing the operating water cover.
B
C
G0858951
A. Screw
B. Operating water cover
C. Threaded holes
a. Remove the screws (A).
b. Lift off the operating water cover (B).
NOTE
If the cover (B) sticks, fit two M10 screws to

the threaded holes (C) and tighten.
84
5. Removing the deflector ring and neck

bearing cover.
B
C
E D
G1188011
A. Tool
B. Mounting screw
C. Screw
D. Cover
E. Frame
a. Attach the tools (A).
b. Fasten the tool to the cover using

mounting screw (B).
c. Ease off the cover (D) by tightening the

screw (C).
d. Remove the deflector ring and neck

bearing cover.
85
6. Prepare for removal of spindle assembly.
a. Remove the screws (A)
NOTE
If the housing sticks, fit two M10 screws to

the threaded holes and tighten.
G1188021
A. Screw
86
7. Lifting the spindle assembly from the frame.
a. Fit the lifting tool (1) to the spindle end.
b. Slowly raise and lift out the spindle

assembly using a hoist.
NG
WARNI 1
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during
lifting. The spindle assembly may otherwise
come loose from the lifting tool.
NOTE 2
Take care not to damage the oil mist

generator (2).
NOTE
Protect the inside of the frame by covering

the hole.
g1188031
1. Lifting tool
87
8. Make a support which when placed on

its side gives free space (A) between the
spindle top and the floor. When support is
placed on its end it must give clearance for
oil mist generator.
A
G1195311
A=5 mm
9. Place the spindle assembly upside down

on a support (1).
G1188141
NOTE
Always use a support as per this sketch when

overhaul service is performed on the spindle
assembly. It is very important that the top of the
spindle does not touch the ground.
88
10. Removing the vibration sensor arm,

(If vibration sensor fitted to separator).
Unscrew the screws (3) and remove

the vibration sensor arm (2) and spacer
sleeves (1).
1
2
3
G1158261
1. Spacer sleeves
2. Vibration sensor arm
3. Screws
89
11. Removing the air deflector.
a. Remove the screws (2) and the air 1

deflector (1).
G1188131
1. Air deflector
2. Screw
90
12. Removing the fan.
a. Turn the spindle assembly the right way

up.
2
b. Place a spanner (or similar) on the
spindle pulley key-grip (1), as holder-up.
c. Fit the spanner and remove the fan (2). 1
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G09239b1
1. Key-grip
2. Fan
91
13. Removing the oil mist generator.
a. Turn the spindle assembly up-side

down and remove the oil mist generator
1
(1) by using spanners.
b. Remove the two nozzles (2) using an

Allen key.
2
G1036891

2. Nozzle
14. Removing the bottom bearing assembly.
a. Pull off the belt pulley and the

self-aligning roller bearing using the
puller tool (1).
1
NOTE
Always discard a used bearing.
G10368a1
1. Puller tool
92
15. Removing the rubber buffer from top

bearing housing
a. Turn the spindle assembly over.

1
b. Unscrew the screws and remove the
small and large lids (1), (2). 2
c. Lift the spindle with rubber buffer (3)

out of the bearing housing. 3
ON
CAUTI
!
A
Crush hazard
Make sure top bearing housing remain on
the support.
If the spindle with rubber buffer sticks

to the bearing housing proceed as
described below.
- Turn spindle up-side down.

- Use a drift in the three holes (A) G1158351
in the top bearing housing to drive

1. Small lid
out the rubber buffer (3) from top
2. Large lid
bearing housing.
3. Rubber buffer
93
16. Removing the rubber buffer.
a. Remove the rubber buffer (1) from the

bowl spindle.
ON
CAUTI
! 1
Crush hazard
The top bearing seat may fall off when lifting
the spindle. 2
b. Collect the axial springs (2).
G08666d1
1. Rubber buffer
2. Axial spring
94
17. Removing the ball bearing.
a. Fit the cap nut (1) on the spindle to

protect the threads.
b. Use the puller tool (2) to remove the top

bearing seat from the spindle. 1
2
NOTE
Do not damage threads on spindle.
c. Place the top bearing seat (A) on a

support.
Remove the bearing. Use a drift in the
two holes.
3
G1158331
1. Cap nut
2. Puller tool
3. Piece of wood to protect the spindle
G1158341
A. Top bearing seat
95
18. Removing the labyrinth ring holder.
a. Remove the screws (1).
b. Remove the O-ring and labyrinth ring.
G08663E1
1. Screw
96
19. Removing the bottom bearing holder.
a. Fit the tool (4) into the bottom bearing

holder and attach the socket (3),
extension rod (2) and T-handle (1). 1
G1046011
1. T-handle
2. Extension rod
3. Socket
4. Tool
b. Loosen the bottom bearing holder (A)

by turning it counter clockwise. Remove
it by hand.
G1046021
A. Bottom bearing holder
97
20. Dismantling the bottom bearing holder

(when necessary).
a. Unscrew the screw (3).
b. Remove the pipe (1), O-rings (2), (4)

and strainer (5).
G1015731
1. Pipe
2. O-ring
3. Screw
4. O-ring
5. Strainer
98
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch
G0864711
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-out
power supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a complete

standstill before starting any dismantling work (takes
about 30 minutes from switch off).
If motor fitted with additional end cover, this can be

removed to see if motor fan is rotating. Refit end cover
when separator has come to complete standstill.
NOTE
G08651l1
50 Hz = 5 Friction blocks
60 Hz = 3 Friction blocks 1. Snap ring
2. Snap ring
The illustration shows 50 Hz 3. Ball bearing
4. Spacing ring
1 2 5. Ball bearing
6. Belt pulley
7. Coupling hub
8. Parallel pin
9. Friction blocks (3=60 Hz)
10. Cover
11. Snap ring
3
G0865081
1. Mounting / dismantling tool (centrifugal clutch).

2. Mounting / dismantling tool (ball bearing).
3. Rod for holding coupling
99
NOTE
If belt cover and drive belt have not been removed,

proceed with this before removing the motor. See
page 82
1. Removing the motor.
a. Disconnect the electrical cables.
NG
WARNI
!
Electrical hazard
To avoid electrical shock, switch off and lock
power supply before starting dismantling
work.
NOTE
If the cables are not disconnected during

lifting procedures, they may become
damaged.
100
b. Fit a sling to the motor and adapter 6

plate using a shackle on the upper part. 1 2
Weight of motor with coupling and 7 3

adaptor plate: approx. 159 kg.
5
c. Tense the lifting sling to support the
4
motor adapter plate and unscrew the
8
four stud bolts nuts (3) on separator
frame side and then remove the two
tilting screws (4). Lift the motor while
supported.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor with coupling will
drop when removing the screws.
Do not unscrew the motor nuts (7).
4
G08646C1
1. Motor foot
2. Separator frame
3. Stud bolt nuts
4. Tilting screw
5. Stud bolt
6. Adaptor plate
7. motor nut
8. Washer
d. Lower the motor onto a suitable pallet.
G1067721
101
2. Removing the friction blocks.
a. Remove the snap ring (3), cover (2) and

friction blocks (1).
1
2
3
ON
CAUTI
!
Flying objects
Risk for accidental release of snap ring. G08652h1
Wear safety goggles. 1. Friction blocks (5=50 Hz)

2. Cover
3. Snap ring
ON
CAUTI
!
Inhalation hazard
When handling friction blocks/pads (1) wear
a mask to avoid inhalation of dust.
Do not use compressed air to remove dust.
Remove dust using vacuum or a damp cloth.
NOTE
102
3. Checking the condition of the friction

blocks. [o]
ON
CAUTI
!
Inhalation hazard
When handling friction blocks/pads wear a mask
to avoid inhalation of dust.
Do not use compressed air to remove dust.
Remove dust using vacuum or a damp cloth.
If the blocks are worn:
Fit new friction blocks.
NOTE
Replace all blocks, even if only one is worn.
NOTE
Be sure that the pins on the back of the blocks

project into the grooves in the clutch hub.
a. Clean the pins of coupling hub and

apply a thin film of lubricating paste to
the pins.
NOTE
Make sure that there is no oil on the pads.
b. If only friction block service is to be

done, proceed to fitting the friction
blocks on page 122.
G08653c1
1. Friction block
103
4. Removing the coupling from the motor

(complete dismantling of centrifugal clutch).
a. Attach a socket with extension rod and

handle (1) to the screw. 2
Use the rod (2) to prevent the coupling
from rotating when removing the screw. 1
Remove the screw (5), spring washer

(4) and washer (3).
b. Check that the brass plug (6) is

mounted on the puller tool (8). Fit the
tool to the friction clutch.
c. Ease off the friction coupling.
NG
WARNI
!
3 4
Crush hazard 5
The centrifugal clutch is heavy and can fall,
causing injury, when loosened from the
motor shaft.
NOTE
See dismantling with optional hydraulic

puller tool on page 105 (if purchased).
6 7 8
G1046141
1. Socket with extension rod and handle

2. Rod
3. Washer
4. Spring washer
5. Screw
6. Brass plug
7. Flat area for spanner
8. Puller tool
104
5. Removing the coupling from the motor

using the optional hydraulic tool.
NOTE
First remove the screw, spring washer and

washer according to instructions a -b, on
previous page.
1 2 3 4
7 5
6
G08654Q1
1. Sleeve
2. Nut
3. Hydraulic cylinder
4. Hydraulic oil inlet
5. Plate
6. Holder
7. Coupling nave
8. Motor shaft
a. Fit the sleeve (1) to the stud bolt.
Fit the stud bolt with sleeve to the motor

shaft (8).
b. Fit the holder (6) to the coupling

nave (7).
c. Fit nut (2) and sleeve to the stud bolt

as shown.
d. Fit hydraulic cylinder (3) as shown.
e. Fit the plate (5) and fasten with screws

through plate and holder.
105
f. Attach the hose from the hand pump to

the hydraulic oil inlet (4).
Ease off the friction coupling by

pumping the handle on the pump until
stop.
Release pressure on the hand pump

and adjust the nut on the stud bolt.
Repeat until coupling is loose.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
The centrifugal clutch is heavy and can fall,
causing injury, when loosened from the
motor shaft.
106
6. Dismantling of the coupling assembly.
a. Remove the snap rings (1).
ON
CAUTI 1
!
Flying objects
Risk for accidental release of snap ring.
b. Drive out the coupling hub (3).
c. Turn the coupling the other way round

and drive out the ball bearings (5) using
the mounting tool.
2
NOTE
Always discard used bearings.

3
5
G0865571
1. Snap ring
2. Wooden support
3. Coupling hub
4. Support
5. Ball bearing
107
6.4 Actions before assembly
6.4.1 Cleaning
[i], [o]
Clean the separator parts according to the

diagram below. Afterwards, protect all cleaned
carbon steel parts against corrosion by oiling.
NG
WARNI
!
Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream. Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally
enclosed motors can be damaged by direct hosing
to the same extent as open motors, resulting in
short-circuit and internal corrosion.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator discs may cause cuts.
108
Part Procedure Cleaning agents

Frame and motor The external cleaning of the frame and Water and de-greasing agent.
motor should be restricted to brushing,
sponging or wiping while the motor is
running or still is hot.
Clean the inside of the frame with a clean

cloth and remove visible particles.
Bowl Cleaning of bowl discs A chemical cleaning agent
Inlet/outlet Handle the bowl discs carefully in order must dissolve the deposits
to avoid damage to the surfaces during quickly without attacking the
cleaning material of the separator parts.
— Remove the bowl discs from the Use Alfa Laval bowl disc
distributor and place them individually in the cleaning agent. Mix 1 part
cleaning agent. cleaning agent to 10 parts
water. The temperature should
— Allow the discs to remain in the be 60–80 °C.
cleaning agent until the deposits have been
dissolved. This will normally take between Fuel oil sludge mainly consists
two and four hours. of complex organic substances
such as asphaltenes. The
— Lastly, clean the discs with a soft brush. most important property of a
cleaning liquid for the removal
Cleaning of holder for operating slide, of fuel oil sludge is the ability to
operating water ring and operating slide dissolve these asphaltenes.
with nozzle.
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve

lime deposits. The acid should be heated
to 80 °C.
Clean the nozzle on the operating slide

using a soft iron wire or a similar object.
Driving device Use a sponge or a soft brush and clean White spirit, cleaning-grade
the oil mist generator and bearing holder kerosene or diesel oil.
thoroughly.
Centrifugal clutch Use a sponge or a soft brush. White spirit, cleaning-grade
kerosene or diesel oil.
Belt pulley Use a steel brush. Solvent
109
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion

[i], [o]
Inspect the separator parts for corrosion.

Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled.
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if:
- you suspect that the depth of the corrosion

damage exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body
and bowl hood (0,5 mm for other parts)
- cracks have been found
G0205241
- any corrosion damage on bowl discs where
its clear that material has corroded away,
(surface integrity is compromized).
NG
WARNI
!
If corrosion damage exceeds the limits stated above,
do NOT continue to use the separator until it has been
Laval.
Material Type of corrosive Appearance Measure

environment
Non-stainless steel and Water or dampness Rust If damage exceeds 0,5
cast iron parts mm, contact Alfa Laval.
Stainless steel Chlorides, Sulfide or Acidic solutions cause Polish dark-coloured
acidic solutions general corrosion. spots and other
Chloride and Sulfide corrosion marks with
corrosion begins as a fine grain emery
small dark spots that cloth. This may prevent
can be difficult to detect, further damage.
and goes on to local If damage exceeds 0,5
damage such as pitting, mm (0,2 mm for bowl
grooves or cracks. body and bowl hood) or
any bowl disc corrosion
which compromises
surface integrity contact
Alfa Laval.
Other metal parts “Aggressive” Possible corrosion If damage exceeds 0,5
environment damage can be in the mm, contact Alfa Laval.
form of pits and/or
cracks.
110
NG
WARNI
!
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are

totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be suspected

of affecting its strength or function.
If you suspect that corrosive media has entered the

separator, (corrosion damages on other equipment
etc.) an inspection of rotating parts is of paramount
importance.
111
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks

[i], [o]
Check the separator parts for cracks. It is

particularly important to inspect for cracks in
rotating parts, and especially the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
NG
WARNI
!
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Cracks can occur from cyclic material stresses

and corrosion. Keeping the separator and its
parts clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.
NG
WARNI
!
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if you
suspect that the depth of the damage exceeds 0,2 mm
for bowl body and bowl hood (0,5 for other parts) or
any bowl disc corrosion which compromises surface
integrity.
Do not continue to use the separator until it has been

Laval.
112
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion

[i], [o]
Erosion may occur when particles suspended in

the process liquid slide along or strike against
a surface.
Erosion is characterised by:
a. Burnished traces in the material.

b. Dents and pits having a granular and shiny surface.
1. Inspect the bowl and inlet/outlet parts for

erosion damages.
NOTE
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative

if you suspect that the depth of the damage
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood
(0,5 for other parts). Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and cleared
for operation by Alfa Laval.
2. Inspect inside and outside of the frame

hood.
NOTE
Pay extra attention at the groove.
G1034011
3. Replace parts if erosion is suspected.
NG
WARNI
!
Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing the
thickness of the material.
Pay special attention to the pillars between the
sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of affecting
strength or function.
113
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
e
a f
c h g
d
G1033641
a. The sealing edge of the discharge slide.

b. Bowl body and holder.
c. Holder and operating slide.
d. The underside of the distributor in the vicinity of the distribution holes and wings.
e. Paring disc and paring tube.
f. Lock ring.
g. Pillars between the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
h. The sealing edge of the discharge slide for the seal ring in the bowl hood.
i. Groove in frame hood. (Inspect both the inside and outside of the frame hood.)
114
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet

The frame feet have to be changed occasionally
due to rubber deterioration from age.
When replacing the frame feet, the separator

must be lifted. Follow the instructions in 6.7
Lifting instructions on page 183.
a. Loosen the central bolts (1) and prepare to
remove the separator frame
b. Remove the separator. See 6.7 Lifting

instructions on page 183.
c. Remove the existing screws (2), washers

and frame feet.
NOTE
Discard the old frame feet, screws and washers.
d. Fit the new feet, screws and washers.

e. Place the separator in its original position
and fasten the central mounting bolts (1).
Tightening torque: 160 Nm.
G08744A1
115
6.4.6 Change of motor bearings

1. Remove motor according to instructions on
page 100.
2. Place motor onto suitable support to protect

stud bolts.
NOTE
Make sure not to place motor onto guard (A).
3. Remove screws (B) holding the guard in

place.
B
G1067711
A. Guard
B. Screw
4. Dismantle the coupling according to

instructions in chapter 6.3.6 Centrifugal
clutch
5. Follow instructions from motor manufacturer

to proceed with change of motor bearings.
6. Assembly:
a. Fit the guard (A) to adaptor plate, motor

shaft going through guard and secure
with the two screws (B).
b. Assembly complete coupling to the

motor, see page 120.
c. Assembly motor to frame, see page 124
116
6.4.7 Lubrication of bowl parts

Apply a thin layer of Molykote, or equivalent
lubrication, on all the contact surfaces shown
in the illustration.
G09117j1
A. Molykote 1000
1. Bowl hood
2. Bowl body
3. Discharge slide
4. Operating slide
5. Holder
7. Screw
8. Nut
117
6.5 Assembly
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
supply before starting any assembly work.
118
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch

1. Assembly of the coupling.
a. Slip the belt pulley (1) over the coupling

hub and place them on a firm and level
foundation.
NG
WARNI
!
If the belt pulley must be renewed, check that
the new pulley has the correct diameter. An
incorrect pulley will cause the separator bowl
to run at either an excessive or insufficient
speed.
d=252 mm 50 Hz
d=210 mm 60 Hz
NOTE
Remove rust from the belt pulley using a

steel brush.
b. Apply a thin film of oil onto the external

and internal surfaces of the ball
bearings (2). [o]
c. Press the ball bearings (2) down one at

a time into the coupling hub, preferably
using a hydraulic press. Place the
spacing ring (4) between them.
NOTE
Never re-fit used ball bearings.

G08656a1
The ball bearings must not be heated as 1. Belt pulley

they are packed with grease and sealed with 2. Ball bearing
plastic membranes. 3. Mounting tool
4. Spacing ring
d. Fit the snap rings (5). [o] 5. Snap ring
119
2. Fitting the coupling to the motor.
NOTE
Make sure that the key (1) is in place on the motor

shaft. 1
2
NOTE 3
See mounting with optional hydraulic puller tool
(if purchased) on next page.
a. Clean the motor shaft and apply a thin

oil film.
b. Apply lubricating paste to the tool

threads (2). Keep the threads
lubricated. 4
NOTE
Left hand thread!

5 6
7
c. Remove the brass plug (3).
d. Fasten the sleeve of the tool to the

motor shaft with the screw (4) on the
tool.
e. Use a spanner to turn the nut on the 8

tool. This will press the centrifugal
clutch on to the shaft. Remove the tool.
f. Install and tighten the washer (5),

spring washer (6) and screw (7).
g. Attach a socket with extension rod and 9

handle (8) to the screw. G1046121
h. Fit the rod (9) into the hole in coupling 1. Key

hub and hold steady when tightening 2. Threads
the screw. 3. Brass plug
4. Screw
5. Washer
6. Spring washer
7. Screw
8. Socket with extension rod, and handle
9. Rod
120
3. Fitting the coupling to the motor with

optional hydraulic tool.
NOTE 1
Make sure that the key (1) is in place on the motor 3 4 5

2
shaft.
a. Clean the motor shaft and apply a thin

oil film.
b. Fit the sleeve (7) to the stud bolt.
Fit the stud bolt (2) with sleeve to the 6 7

motor shaft (6).
c. Screw the holder (3) to the coupling

8 9
nave. 10
d. Fit hydraulic cylinder as shown.
e. Fit the sleeve and secure with the

nut (5).
f. Attach the hose from the hand pump to 11

the hydraulic oil inlet (4)
g. Fit the friction coupling by pumping the

handle on the pump until stop
h. Release pressure on the hand pump 12

and adjust the nut on the stud bolt G1046131
1. Key
i. Repeat procedure until coupling is 2. Stud bolt
mounted. Note! The pressure on the 3. Holder
hand pump should not exceed 200 bar. 4. Hydraulic oil inlet
5. Nut
j. Remove the hydraulic tool. 6. Motor shaft
7. Sleeve
k. Install and tighten the washer (8), 8. Washer
spring washer (9) and screw (10). 9. Spring washer
10. Screw
l. Attach a socket with extension rod and
11. Socket with extension rod, and handle
handle (11) to the screw. Fit rod (12)
12. Rod
inside the hole in coupling hub and hold
steady when tightening screw.
121
4. Fitting the friction blocks.
a. Fit the friction blocks (2) onto the guide

pins (1). 1
2
NOTE
Be sure that the pins on the back of the

blocks project into the grooves in the clutch
hub.
NOTE
b. Place the cover (3) in position and

secure it with the snap ring (4).
3
CAUTI
ON 4
!
Flying objects
Risk for accidental release of snap ring.
G08652i1
1. Guide pin
2. Friction block
3. Cover
4. Snap ring
122
5. If fitting motor for first time or if replacing

motor with new one proceed as follows.
Otherwise proceed from next step.
a. Fit the four stud bolts to the adaptor

plate, with the longest threaded end
through the plate and secure stud bolts
with loctite (x). x
Put the adaptor plate on a workbench
with the unthreaded part of stud bolt
facing up, standing on the stud bolts.
b. Place adaptor plate onto suitable

support to protect stud bolts.
c. Fit motor to adaptor plate. Stud bolts

going through feet. G08646h1
d. Add washer and tighten nuts without

loctite to fit motor to adaptor plate.
e. Fit the guard to adaptor plate, motor

shaft going through guard and secure
with the two screws.
f. Assemble complete coupling to the 6

motor, See on page 120. 1 2
g. Fit one lifting sling to the motor and 7 3

another to the adaptor plate and lift
motor onto the separator frame. It will 5
rest on the ledge. 4
8
h. Tilt up the motor by tightening the outer
clamping screws (4).
i. Tighten the four stud bolt nuts (3) on

separator frame side to secure adaptor
plate to separator frame.
j. Loosen the four stud bolt nuts (7) on the

motor feet to allow the motor to find its
lowest position relative to adapter plate.
k. Tighten the bolt nuts (7) slightly.
l. Unscrew bolt nuts (7) one at a time and

apply loctite. Refit and tighten the bolt
nuts.
4
m. Release the bolt nuts (3) on separator G08646c1
frame side and tilting screws (4) to be 1. Motor foot

able to fit drive belt. 2. Separator frame
3. nut
4. Clamping screw
5. Stud bolt
6. Adaptor plate
7. Motor stud bolt nut
8. Washer 123
6. Fitting the motor.
a. Fit a lifting sling to the motor and

6
adaptor plate. Use a shackle from 1 2
the separator lifting tool. Weight of
motor with coupling and adaptor plate: 7 3
approx. 159 kg.
5
b. Lower the motor (while supported) on 4
to the separator frame. It will set on the
ledge. 8
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor with coupling
may drop when lifted.
c. Fit the two tilting screws (4) and tighten

until motor is in a slightly leaning
position.
d. Connect the electrical cables.

4
G08646c1
NG
WARNI 1. Motor foot
!
2. Separator frame
Electrical hazard 3. nut
To avoid electrical shock, switch off and lock 4. Tilting screw
power supply before starting assembly work. 5. Stud bolt
6. Adaptor plate
7. Motor stud bolt nut
8. Washer
NOTE
If carrying out change of friction blocks only,

continue with steps below.
If carrying out a complete machine assembly,

continue with Driving device instructions on
page 127.
124
7. Fitting the flat belt.
NOTE
Clean the inside of the frame before fitting the flat

belt, and make sure that there is no oil on the belt.
a. Lift up the belt (1) to the middle (centre)

of the spindle pulley.
NOTE 1
For correct position, centre the belt on the
spindle pulley camber.
b. Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c. Tighten the two tilting screws (4).
d. Tighten the four nuts (3) on separator

frame side.
2
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until the motor is

tightened properly to the frame.
3
4
3
6
5
4
G08646e1
1. Flat belt
2. Clearance
3. stud bolt nut
4. Tilting screw
5. Stud bolt
6. Adaptor plate
125
8. Fitting the belt cover.
a. Fit the belt cover.
b. Tighten the screws.
2
1
G1045941
1. Screw
2. Belt cover
126
6.5.2 Driving device

1. Assembling the bottom bearing holder
(where necessary)
NOTE
Clean the pipe and strainer before fitting.
NOTE
Make sure to fit the pipe the right way up!
a. Fit the pipe (1), O-rings (2,4) and

strainer (5).
b. Secure the pipe (1) with the screw (6)

secured with Loctite 222.
G1015741
1. Pipe
2. O-ring
4. O-ring
5. Strainer
6. Screw
127
2. Fitting the bottom bearing holder.
a. To secure the bottom bearing holder

(3) into the frame, apply Loctite 222 on
the surfaces directly above the upper
O-ring.
b. Thread the bottom bearing holder (3) 1

into the frame and fit the tool into the
bottom bearing housing.
2
c. Tighten the holder to a torque of
200 Nm.
3
G10157A1
1. Socket
2. Tool
128
3. Fitting the labyrinth ring holder.
1 3 2
G08663C1
1. O-ring
2. Labyrinth-ring
3. Separator frame
a. Lubricate and fit the O-ring (1). [o]
b. Lubricate and fit the labyrinth ring (2).

[o]
c. Fit the labyrinth ring holder into the

frame. Apply Loctite 222 to screws (3).
Fit and tighten the screws.
G08663g1
3. Screw
129
4. Fitting the ball bearing to the top bearing

seat. [o]
a. Heat the top bearing seat to minimum

110 °C and maximum 125 °C, either
using induction heater or hot clean oil
(induction heater is recommended).
NG
WARNI
! G1157941
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling any
heated parts.
b. Drop some oil onto the bearing.
NOTE
G1157921
Always fit a new bearing.
Pre-lubricate before fitting.
c. Fit the bearing (3) into the bearing

seat (4).
1
NOTE
2
Make sure the bearing rest in the bottom of
the bearing seat.
3
d. Fit the small lid (2) with at least two
screws (1) diagonally.
4
NOTE 1
If problem to assemble due to thermal
expansion leave the lid on top of bearing
seat, wait 5-10 minutes and try again.
G1157961
1. Screw
2. Small lid
3. Ball bearing
4. Bearing seat
130
5. Fitting the top bearing seat with bearing to

the spindle.
a. Heat the top bearing seat (1) and 1

bearing to minimum 110 °C and
maximum 125 °C, either using induction
heater or hot clean oil (induction heater
is recommended).
NG
WARNI
!
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling any
2
heated parts.
b. Wipe off the spindle and apply a thin

layer of oil on the bearing contact
3
surface (A).
c. Fit the top bearing seat to the spindle

using the sleeve (3) and puller (2).
NOTE
Make sure to fit the bearing seat correctly

or it might get stuck! A
G09848A1
1. Top bearing seat

2. Puller
3. Sleeve
131
6. Fitting the top bearing housing.
a. Apply a thin layer of lube oil to the axial

springs. 1
b. Fit the axial springs (2) to the top
bearing housing. [o]
A
c. Carefully lower the bowl spindle (1).
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses on the top bearing seat.
2
NOTE
Align the drill marks (A) in the top bearing

seat and the top bearing housing.
d. Unscrew the screws and remove the

small lid.
G08666C1
1. Bowl spindle
2. Axial spring
132
7. Fitting the rubber buffer
a. Apply a thin layer of lube oil to all the

contact surfaces between rubber buffer 2
and top bearing housing, small and
large lid.
3
b. Fit the rubber buffer (1) into the top
bearing seat.
Note hole-placement, (AlfaLaval logo
facing upwards) 1
c. Fit the small lid (2), tighten screws

crosswise to 5 Nm.
d. Fit the large lid (3), tighten screws

crosswise to 5 Nm.
e. Start with the small lid (2) and tighten

the screws alternately crosswise up to
10 Nm.
f. Continue with the large lid (3) and

tighten the screws alternately crosswise
up to 10 Nm. G1158311
1. Rubber buffer
g. Check that all screws are tightened to 2. Small lid
10 Nm. 3. Large lid
133
8. Fitting the spindle pulley.
a. Screw the cap nut (4) onto the spindle.
b. Turn the spindle assembly upside down

and let the spindle rest on the cap nut.
1
NOTE
It is of utmost importance to use cap nut

and the support as the neck bearing may be
forced out of its position and damage the
2
neck bearing when the bottom bearing is
mounted otherwise.
The cartridge has to stand on the spindle

top with a clearance of minimum 1 mm (“A”
in the picture) between top bearing housing
and the support.
c. Wipe off the spindle pulley seat on the

spindle (1) and nave bore in the spindle
pulley (2) with a dry cloth.
d. Fit the spindle pulley firmly on the bowl

spindle.
A
G08667a1
1. Spindle
2. Spindle pulley
3. Support
4. Cap nut
A. Minimum 1 mm
134
9. Fitting the self-aligning roller bearing. [o]
a. Lubricate the bearing with clean oil.
b. Lower the bearing onto the spindle

and press down onto the spindle pulley
using the special drift tool.
NOTE 1
Always fit a new bearing.
G08668f1
1. Bearing
135
10. Fitting the oil mist generator.
1 2 3 2
G08669k1
1. Nozzle
3. Threads
NOTE
Clean the oil mist generator and nozzles before

assembly.
a. Apply Loctite 222 and screw the two

nozzles (1) into the pump (2) so that
they lie level with the pump edge using
an Allen key.
b. Lubricate all threads (3) with a few

drops of oil before assembly.
c. Fit the oil mist generator. Use a spanner

and a crowfoot wrench head together
with a torque wrench handle. Tighten
to 150 Nm.
G08669g1
Crowfoot wrench head
136
11. Fitting the fan.
a. Turn the spindle assembly to up-right

position.
NOTE
Ensure that the spindle is seated against the

inner ring of the ball bearing.
b. Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the

O-rings (1) into the fan. [o]
NOTE
Make sure that the bearing is pre lubricated

before fitting the fan.
1
c. Place a spanner (or similar) on the
spindle pulley key-grip (3), as holder-up
and fit the fan. Tighten firmly, by hand, 2
with the spanner (2).
G09240r1
1. O-ring
2. Spanner
3. Key-grip
137
12. Fitting the air deflector.
a. Turn the spindle assembly up-side

down and fit the air deflector (1).
b. Tighten screws (2). 1
G1188131
1. Air deflector
2. Screw
138
13. Fitting the vibration sensor arm,

(If vibration sensor fitted to separator).
Fit the spacer sleeves (1), vibration sensor

arm (2) and secure with the screws (3).
Tightening torque, 8 Nm.
1
2
3
G1158271
1. Spacer sleeves
2. Vibration sensor arm
3. Screws
139
14. Lowering the spindle assembly into the

frame.
a. Turn the assembly and remove the cap

nut from the spindle. Fit the lifting tool
(1) to the spindle assembly and lift it.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during
1
lifting. The spindle assembly may otherwise
come loose from the lifting tool.
NOTE
- Check that the hole at the bottom of the oil

mist generator (2) and nozzles on the side
are clean before lowering the assembly.
2
b. Position the flat belt (3) so that the
spindle assembly can pass through
when lowering. [o]
NOTE
When replacing the belt with new one, make

3
sure it has the right article number according
to SPC.
- Check the direction arrows on the belt and

the machine plate for correct position.
- Make sure that the belt does not get
smudged with oil or grease during handling.
4
G11880B1
1. Lifting tool
3. Flat belt
140
c. Carefully lower the spindle assembly

and position the bolt holes over the
threaded frame holes. Make sure that
the bottom bearing, enters the bottom
bearing holder (4) correctly. Do not use
force.
If spindle not enters bearing holder
correctly, (gap between frame and
bearing housing), lift spindle and rotate
before lowering it again.
NG
WARNI
!
Cut hazard
Do not put fingers between the frame and air
deflector while lowering the assembly.
d. Fit and tighten the screws (5). 5
G11880C1
5. Screw
141
15. Fitting the flat belt.
NOTE
Clean the inside of the frame before fitting the flat

belt, and make sure that the belt is clean.
a. Lift up the belt (1) to the middle (centre)

of the spindle pulley.
NOTE 1
For correct position, centre the belt on the
spindle pulley camber.
b. Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c. Tighten the two tilting screws (4).
d. Tighten the four nuts (3) on separator

frame side.
2
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until the motor is

tightened properly to the frame.
3
4
3
6
5
4
G08646e1
1. Flat belt
2. Clearance
3. Nut
4. Tilting screw
5. Stud bolt
6. Adaptor plate
7. Separator frame
142
16. Fitting the neck bearing cover and deflector

ring.
1 4
2
4
G11880D1
1. Seal ring
2. O-rings
3. Neck bearing cover
4. Deflector ring
a. Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the

O-rings (2) and seal rings (1). [o]
b. Fit the neck bearing cover (3).
NOTE
The guide pin on the cover should enter one

of the two holes in the bearing housing.
c. Push the deflector ring (4) down until

it stops.
143
17. Fitting the operating water cover.
a. Check that the operating water channel

(5) is not clogged. Clean if necessary. 1
[o] 2
3
NOTE
A blocked operating water channel can lead

to failure of the separator discharge function.
b. Lubricate with oil and fit the seal ring

(1) and O-ring (3) into the operating
water cover (2). [o]
Renew the O-ring (4). [o] 4

c. Fit the operating water cover. Fit
washers and tighten the screws. 5
NOTE
4
The water pipe in the frame should enter the
hole in the cover.
G08681T1
1. Seal ring
2. Operating water cover
3. O-ring
4. O-ring
5. Operating water channel
144
18. Measuring the radial wobble of the bowl

spindle.
G0858721
A=max. 0,04 mm
a. Fit a dial indicator in a support and

fasten it in position as illustrated. Use
the flat belt to turn the spindle.
NOTE
Permissible radial wobble: max. 0,04 mm.

If the spindle wobble exceeds this value,
contact an Alfa Laval representative.
145
19. Fitting the belt cover.
a. Fit the belt cover (2).
b. Tighten the screws (1).
2
1
G1045941
1. Screw
2. Belt cover
146
20. Fill oil in the oil sump.
NOTE
The separator should be level when oil is filled.
a. Fit new washer and refit the drain plug

(B). [i]
b. Fill with new oil until the level is halfway

up the sight glass (C). For correct oil
volume see ‘‘Lubricating oil volume” on
page 196
NOTE A
6.6.6
For grade and quality of oil see
Lubricating oils on page 181. B
c. Refit the plug (A) with new washer. [i] C
G1041391
A. Plug
B. Drain plug
C. Sight glass
147
6.5.3 Bowl
1. Check for impact marks and corrosion in
bowl body nave and on spindle taper.[i], [o]
a. Remove any impact marks using a

scraper and/or a whetstone.
ON
CAUTI
!
Impact marks may cause the separator to
vibrate while running.
b. Rust can be removed by using a

fine-grain emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).
c. Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No.

600).
d. Lubricate to prevent further corrosion.
G0874621
148
2. Fitting new valve plugs on the operating

slide. [i]
a. Carefully tap in new valve plugs, using

a clean, soft-faced hammer.
NOTE
Make sure that the plugs are fitted as

described in the illustration.
G0874871
149
3. Fitting the guide ring. [o]
a. Pointwise apply a small amount of

silicone grease in the groove on bowl
body (2) and mount the guide ring (1)
into the groove on bowl body. Secure
that the guide ring is fully inserted into
the groove and that it is secured in its
position by the silicone grease.
NG
WARNI
!
If too much silicon grease is applied to the
guide ring there is a risk that the silicone
grease will clog the nozzles on the operating
slide.
G08610p1
150
4. Fitting the operating slide.
a. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease

and fit the rectangular ring (6) on the
operating slide and the rectangular ring
(8) and O-ring (7) on the bowl body (3).
[i],[o]
b. Fit the operating slide (2).
NOTE
The guide pin (4) in the bowl body (3) should

enter the hole (1) in the operating slide (this
hole is marked with a drill mark).
Nozzle (5) secured with Loctite 243
NOTE
Take special care to ensure that the guide

ring (9) is not pressed out of its position in
the groove during the fitting of operating
slide.
G0861261
1. Alignment hole
2. Operating slide
3. Bowl body
4. Guide pin
5. Nozzle
6. Rectangular ring
7. O-ring
8. Rectangular ring
9. Guide ring
151
5. Fitting the operating slide holder.
a. Fit the holder (1) over the operating 3 2 1

slide.
b. Apply a thin layer of molykote grease

and fit and tighten new screws (2) and
washers (3) to a torque of 30 ± 2 Nm.
[i], [o]
NOTE
It is very important NOT to refit used screws

and washers. Always fit new ones included
in the Inspection kit!
Every washer (3) consists of two parts which

must be correctly locked together.
G0861351
1. Holder
2. Screw
3. Washer
152
6. Fitting the operating water ring.
a. Assemble the seal ring (5) into the

operating water ring (2). [i], [o]
1 5
NOTE
It is very important not to refit used 2 4

screws. Always fit new ones included in the
Inspection kit!
3
b. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and
fit the O-ring (3). [i], [o]
c. Fit the ring (2) with screws (1) onto the

bowl body. [i], [o])
NOTE
G0861461
The drilled assembly mark (4) on the water

ring (2) should face the corresponding mark 1. Screw
on the bowl body. 2. Operating water ring
3. O-ring
d. Grease, fit and tighten the screws (1) to 4. Drill mark
a torque of 30 ± 2 Nm. 5. Seal ring
153
7. Lifting the bowl body onto the spindle taper.
a. Put a drop of oil on the spindle taper (1).
b. Wipe off the spindle taper (1) and nave

bore (2) with a dry cloth.
c. Turn the bowl body over. 1

2
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to
prevent it from rolling.
d. Fit the lifting tool (3) and lift the bowl

body using sling and hoist.
e. Carefully lower the bowl body (4) onto

the spindle taper.
f. Remove the lifting tool.
G0861741
1. Spindle taper
2. Nave bore
3. Lifting tool
4. Bowl body
154
8. Fitting and tightening the cap nut.
a. To prevent the bowl body from rotating 3 4

2
when fitting the cap nut; Fit one of the 1
clamps (2) to the bowl body and one of
the screws (4) for the frame hood in the
frame. Fasten a sling (1) between the
clamp and the screw around the bowl
body.
b. Apply a thin layer of molykote grease.

Fit and tighten the cap nut (3) to a
torque of 100 Nm.
NOTE
G0861891
Left-hand thread!
1. Sling
2. Clamp
3. Cap nut
4. Screw
155
9. Fitting the discharge slide.
a. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and

fit the rectangular ring (1). [i], [o] 1
b. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and

fit the O-ring (3). [i], [o]
2
c. Fit the lifting tool (2) and lower the
discharge slide into the bowl.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be pushed
down against the discharge slide, otherwise
it may come loose from the tool.
3
d. Remove the lifting tool.
e. Fit the nut (4). 4
f. Fit the spanner for nut (5) and tighten

the nut with a torque wrench to a torque
of min. 200 Nm.
g. Remove the spanner for nut.
G0861981
1. Rectangular ring
2. Lifting tool
3. O-ring
4. Nut
5. Spanner for nut
156
10. Assembly of the disc stack.
a. Fit the discs (1) one by one onto the

distributor. The distributor has a guide
rib (4) for the correct positioning of the
bowl discs. Always end with the disc
without caulks.
NG
WARNI 1
!
The number of discs may have to be
increased to adjust the disc stack pressure.
Always check before operating the separator.
See ‘‘Checking the disc stack pressure” .
ON
CAUTI
! 5
Cut hazard
Sharp edges (2) on the bowl discs may cause
cuts.
G08620E1
1. Bowl disc
2. Sharp edge
3. Recess on bowl disc
4. Guide rib on distributor
5. Distributor
157
11. Fitting the disc stack assembly to the bowl

body.
a. Fit the lifting tool (1) into the distributor.

1
b. Lower the disc stack into the bowl using
sling and hoist.
NOTE
The guide pin (2) on the bowl body should

face the drill mark (3) on the distributor. The
guide ribs (4) inside the distributor will then
fit the recesses (5) on the bowl body nave
in the right way.
G08621D1
1. Lifting tool
2. Guide pin on bowl body
3. Drill mark on distributor
4. Guide ribs inside the distributor
5. Recesses on bowl body nave
158
12. Fitting the inlet and outlet pipe.
a. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to

the O-rings and fit the O-rings (1) [i],
[o] to the pipe.
b. Carefully lower the inlet and outlet

pipe (2) assembly into the top of the
distributor.
G08622p1
1. O-rings
159
13. Fitting the top disc.
a. Fit the O-rings (2) [i], [o] and gravity

disc (1) to the top disc (4).
b. Lower the top disc. Make sure that the

drill mark (3) corresponds to the guide 1
lug (6) inside the bowl body.
2
The guide rib on the distributor should 3
enter one of the larger recesses on the
top disc. 4
G08623i1
1. Gravity disc
2. O-rings
3. Drill mark
4. Top disc
5. O-ring
6. Guide lug
160
14. Fitting the bowl hood.
a. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease and

fit the O-ring (1). [i], [o] 1
b. Fit the seal ring (2). Press the ring 2

down evenly into the groove all around.
[i], [o]
c. Gently tap down the seal ring crosswise

with a soft rubber mallet, until the entire
ring is fitted all the way around.
d. Fit the compressing tool (3) and attach

lifting eyes. Lower the bowl hood so
that its recess (4) fits into the guide pin
(5) in the bowl body.
e. Remove the compressing tool.
3 4
G08624D1
1. O-ring
2. Seal ring
3. Lifting tool
4. Recess in bowl hood
5. Guide pin on bowl body
161
15. Fitting the lock ring.
Place the lock ring (1) on the bowl hood

(3) with its guide pin (4) close to the
corresponding hole (5) in the bowl body (2).
1
4
3
NOTE
Make sure that the groove in the bowl body which

5
retains the lock ring is clean.
G08625d1
1. Lock ring
2. Bowl body
3. Bowl hood
4. Guide pin
5. Hole for guide pin
162
16. Checking the disc stack pressure. [i]
NOTE
The disc stack must always be compressed with

18 - 33 (Nm). Disc stacks that are compressed
with torque level outside recommendations
(18 - 33 Nm) might result in damaged parts or
instability when operating the separator.
1. Reaching correct disc stack pressure

(no extra discs added) (i)
a. Set torque wrench to 18 Nm. Tighten 2

the screws with washers on the 1
compressing tool (4) until the lock ring
(3) enters the groove. If lock ring does
not enter the groove, increase torque
value in increments from 18 to 33 Nm,
according to the table below.
NOTE
4
Always tighten screws alternately in
increments of 5 Nm.
Steps (Nm)
Step 1: 18 (minimum)
Step 2: 23
Step 3: 28
Step 4: 33 (maximum)
3
b. - If lock ring enters the groove with a
torque value less than 18 Nm refer
to step 2.
- If lock ring does not enter the
groove with torque value 33 Nm 5
refer to step 3.
G08749g1
1. Bowl disc
2. Disc without caulks
3. Lock ring
4. Compressing tool screw with washer
5. Groove
163
2. If Torque value is below 18 Nm when

lock ring enter the groove
Add disc when lock ring enters the groove

with torque less than 18 Nm (insufficient
compression).
• Fit one bowl disc and re-check disc

stack pressure (1a-1b).
NOTE
Always fit the disc without caulks on top of the

disc stack!
3. If lock ring does not enter the groove

with torque value 33 Nm
Remove disc when lock ring does not enter

the groove with torque level set on 33 Nm
(excessive compression).
• Remove one of the bowl discs and

re-check disc stack pressure (1a-1b).
NOTE
Always fit the disc without caulks on top of the

disc stack!
164
17. Checking that the lock ring is correct fitted.
a. Make sure that the lock ring is fully

engaged over it’s full length in the
C
groove and does not flex anywhere.
The lock ring ends must be facing each
other with a gap between them. The
lock ring ends must not be flush or
overlap each other. 3
NOTE
If there is not a gap between the lock ring

ends, the lock ring is damaged and must be
replaced with a new one immediately
b. Measure gap C of lock ring and make

sure it does not exceed 4,5 mm.
1
If the lock ring gap is greater than 4
4,5 mm, the lock ring is damaged
and must be replaced with a new one
immediately. 2
A B
NG
WARNI
! G08625g1
1. Lock ring
Health hazard 2. Bowl body
Welding of the lock ring is not allowed, as this 3. Compressing tool screw with washer
can seriously affect the material strength. If 4. Bowl hood
the lock ring is either worn beyond the safety A. Before compressing
limits or incorrectly assembled it may cause B. Lock ring in position
severe damage or fatal injury. C. Gap
NG
WARNI
!
Health hazard
Never remove any material from the lock
ring. This may cause severe damage or fatal
injury.
c. Release the pressure on the

compressing tool and remove it.
165
6.5.4 In- and outlet device

1. Fitting the frame hood [i], [o].
a. Apply a thin layer of silicone grease (a)

to the O-ring and fit the O-ring onto the
frame hood. [i], [o].
b. Lower the frame hood (1).
NOTE
Make sure that the frame hood is mounted in

its correct position according to the piping
arrangement.
NOTE
Make sure that the support ring (normally not

removed and mounted on the frame hood) is
fitted with its lug into corresponding groove
on the pipe.
c. Fit and tighten the screws and

washers (2).
G08637o1
1. Frame hood
2. Screws and washers
166
2. Control measurement of paring disc

height. [o]
a. Remove the guide screw (A).
b. Measure the distance D through the

screw hole.
Assemble the correct number of height

adjusting rings (B) according to the list.
- 29 ± 0,5 mm, 3 rings

- 28 ± 0,5 mm, 2 rings
- 27 ± 0,5 mm, 1 ring
c. Refit the guide screw (A)
B A
D
( 2)
G09115T1
A. Guide screw
B. Height adjusting rings
167
3. Fitting the connecting housing.
a. Lubricate the inlet pipe thread.

2
b. Fit the connecting housing (1) over the
inlet/outlet pipe.
NOTE
1
Make sure that the screw, on top of the frame
hood, enters the guide hole at the underside 3
of the connecting housing.
c. Lubricate the lock nut threads.
d. Fit the washer (3) and the lock nut (2)

using the hook spanner.
NOTE
Fine threads on the pipe. Make sure that

the lock nut has entered the pipe threads G0863981
correctly before tightening with the hook

spanner. 1. Connecting housing
2. Lock nut
3. Washer
168
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor

(optional)
1. Fitting the unbalance sensor holder.
a. Remove the cover (1).
b. Fit the O-ring (3) on the holder (2).

1
Fit the screw (4) into the holder and
mount the holder into the separator
frame (6).
NOTE 2
If removing the sensor holder; use a M10 screw

as a puller.
NOTE
See next page for fitting and correct adjustment

of the sensor.
6
4
5 3
G08734G1
1. Cover
2. Sensor holder
3. O-ring
4. Screw M8
5. Sensor arm
6. Frame
A. M10
169
2. Adjusting the unbalance sensor
a. Fit the sensor (1) into the holder. Do

not forget the nut (2).
b. Adjust the sensor so that a value of 3,5

appears on the display.
c. When correct distance is achieved

tighten the nut against the holder. Fit
the cover (see previous page).
1 2
3
4 G 6
A
5
G08734H1
1. Sensor
2. Nut
3. + = brown or red
4. J = black or white
5. OV = blue
6. 24 V DC
170
6.5.6 Speed sensor

1. Adjusting the speed sensor.
a. Adjust the speed sensor.

Distance A = 81 ± 0,1 mm.
b. Fit the sensor to the frame, see 4.4

Sensors (optional) on page 34.
G08734E1
A. Speed sensor distance
NOTE
If the sensor does not work properly, check the

distance between the sensor and the spindle belt
pulley.
Adjust the sensor to achieve measure (B) shown

below.
G08663F1
1. Spindle belt pulley

B. Distance between sensor and pulley
NOTE
The distance (B) between the sensor and the

spindle belt pulley (1) must be 3,5 ± 0,5 mm.
171
6.5.7 Actions after assembly
6.5.7.1 Control of machine plates and

safety labels
1. Check that the following signs are

attached.[o].
A
1 B
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxx. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxx xxxxx.
XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx XX
xxx xxxxx. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx.
8 3
XX XX
! WARNING
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxx xxxxxxxx. xx xxxxxxxx xxx xxx.
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxx
xx xxxxxxxx. xx xxxxxxx xx xxxx.
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xx xxxxxxx.
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx x. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxxx xx xxx xxxxxxxx xxx xx.
XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxxx xx.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
X XXXX XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXX XXX X XXX XX XXXX
XXXX XX X X XXXXX XXX X
Xxxxxx xx x Xxxxxx xx xxxxxx x xxxx
XXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX X XXXXX XX X XXXX
XXXXX XXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXX XX XX X X XXX XXX X XXXXXX XXX
XXXXXXXXX. XXX X XXX. XXX XXX X XXXXX XXX X
XXXX .
XXXXX XXX XXXX XXX
XXXXX XXXX X XXXX XXX XXXXX X XXXXX XX X XXX
XX. XX XXX XXX XX X.
XXXXXXX/XX,X XX
50Hz
10
60Hz
G1045711
1. Machine plate
3. Safety label
7. Indicating direction of rotation of horizontal driving device
8. Lifting instructions
10. Oil type plate
A. Space for additional label for numbering of separator and function
B. Space for label indicating representative
172
2. Check legibility.
Following texts should be read on the

labels.
Machine plate
Separator type
Serial No / Year
Product No
Main group no
Configuration no
Designation
Max. allowed speed (bowl)
Direction of rotation (bowl)
Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
Inside diameter of bowl body
Manufacturer
Service enquiries: www.alfalaval.com
Safety label
Text on label: Warning
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation

and maintenance. Consider inspection intervals.
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl

filled with liquid during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work

is started.
Lifting instructions
Text on label: Read instruction manual before lifting.
173
6.6 Oil change
NOTE
The separator should be level and at standstill when

oil is filled or the oil level is checked
6.6.1 Lubricating oil

Do not mix different oil brands.
Always use clean vessels when handling

lubricating oil.
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate

the lubricating oil. Of particular importance is to
avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a few
drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may
result in severe foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral

type oil is an indication that the oil base has
deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil
additives have precipitated. Always investigate
why black deposits occurs.
If changing from one oil brand to another it is

recommended to do this in connection with an
overhaul of the separator. Clean the oil bath
housing and the spindle parts thoroughly and
remove all deposits before filling the new oil.
NOTE
Always clean and dry parts (also tools) before

lubricants are applied.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start. Top up when
necessary. For correct oil volume, see “Lubricating
oil” in the table on page 196.
It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants

recommended in our documentation.
174
This does not exclude, however, the use of other

brands, provided they have equivalently high
quality properties as the brands recommended.
The use of other oil brands and lubricants
than recommended, is done on the exclusive
responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants
Always be sure to follow lubricants

manufacturer's instructions.
6.6.2 Check oil level

1. Check that oil level can be seen in the sight
glass.
6.6.3 Oil change procedure

1. Remove the oil filling plug (A).
2. Place a vessel under the drain plug (B).
3. Remove the drain plug.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
The lubricating oil and various machine surfaces A
can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
4. Collect the oil in the vessel.

B
5. Fit and tighten the drain plug (B).
C
6. Fill with new oil filler hole (A).
NOTE
For grade and quality of oil, see 6.6.6

Lubricating oils on page 181.
For correct oil volume, see “Lubricating oil” in G1041391
the table on page 196.

A. Oil fill plug
B. Oil drain plug
7. Check the oil sight glass for correct oil level.
C. Sight glass
8. Fit and tighten the plug (A)
175
6.6.4 Lubrication chart

Alfa Laval ref. 567329 02 Rev. 2
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start, top up when necessary and do not overfill.
Do not check the oil level when separator is running.
NOTE
If not otherwise specified, follow the supplier’s instructions about applying, handling and storing of lubricants.
NOTE
Check and pre-lubricate new spindle bearings and spindle bearings that have been out of service for three
months or longer. If the ambient temperature is below 25°C at start up, the spindle bearings that have been out
of service for a shorter period than three months must also be prelubricated.
Lubrication chart
Lubricating point Lubrication Interval
The oil bath. Lubricate with oil, see • Continous operation: 4000h
Bowl spindle bearings are Recommended oil brands.
• Seasonal operation: Before
lubricated by oil mist from the oil Lubricating oil volume see
every operating period
bath. Technical data.
• Short period´s operation:
12 months even if total
number of operating hours
is less than stated above.
Bowl spindle taper. Lubricate with oil. At assembly.
Only a few drops for rust
protection.
Bowl: Sliding contact surfaces, Lubricate with paste, see At assembly.
thread of lock nut and cap nut. Recommended lubricants.
Rubber seal rings. Lubricate with grease, see At assembly.
Recommended lubricants.
Friction clutch bearings. The bearings are pre-lubricated –
with grease and need no extra
lubrication.
Electric motor. Follow manufacturer’s Follow manufacturer’s
instructions. instructions.
Plug thread (neck bearing Lubricate with oil, if not otherwise At assembly.
assembly). stated.
176
6.6.5 Recommended lubricants
Lubricant recommendation for hygienic and non-hygienic applications

Lubricants with an Alfa Laval part number are approved and recommended for use.
The data in the tables below is based on supplier information.
Trade names and designations might vary from country to country. Please contact your local
supplier for more information.
Paste for assembly of metallic parts, non-hygienic applications
Part no Quantity Designation Manufacturer Remark

537086-02 1000 g Molykote 1000 Paste Dow Corning -
537086-03 100 g Molykote G-n plus Paste Dow Corning -
537086-06 50 g
537086-04 50 g Molykote G-rapid plus Dow Corning -
Paste
- - Gleitmo 705 Fuchs Lubritech -
- - Wolfracoat C Paste Klüber -
- - Dry Moly Paste Rocol -
- - MTLM Rocol -
Bonded coating for assembly of metallic parts, non-hygienic applications

535586-01 375 g Molykote D321R Spray Dow Corning -
- - Gleitmo 900 Fuchs Lubritech Varnish or spray
177
Paste for assembly of metallic parts, hygienic applications (NSF registered H1 is preferred)

- - Molykote D paste Dow Corning -
537086-07 50 g Molykote P-1900 Dow Corning NSF Registered H1 (22
Jan 2004)
- - Molykote TP 42 Dow Corning -
561764-01 50 g Geralyn 2 Fuchs Lubritech NSF Registered H1 (3
Sep 2004)
- - Geralyn F.L.A. Fuchs Lubritech NSF Registered H1 (2
April 2007). German
§ 5 Absatz 1 LMBG
approved.
554336-01 55 g Gleitmo 1809 Fuchs Lubritech -
- - Gleitmo 805 Fuchs Lubritech DVGW (KTW) approval
for drinking water (TZW
prüfzeugnis)
- - Klüberpaste 46 MR 401 Klüber White, contains no lead,
cadmium, nickel, sulphur
nor halogens.
- - Klüberpaste UH1 Klüber NSF Registered H1 (26
84-201 Aug 2005)
- - Klüberpaste UH1 Klüber NSF Registered H1 (25
96-402 Feb 2004)
252 OKS NSF Registered H1 (23
July 2004)
- - Foodlube Multi Paste Rocol NSF Registered H1 (13
April 2001)
178
Silicone grease/oil for rubber rings, hygienic and non-hygienic applications

- - No-Tox Food Grade Bel-Ray NSF Registered H1 (16
Silicone grease December 2011)
Dow Corning 360 Dow Corning Tested according to
Medical Fluid and complies with all
National Formulary
(NF) requirements
for Dimethicone
and European
Pharmacopeia (EP)
requirements for
Dimeticone or Silicone
Oil Used as a Lubricant,
depending on viscosity.
569415-01 50 g Molykote G 5032 Dow Corning NSF Registered H1 (3
June 2005)
- - Geralyn SG MD 2 Fuchs Lubritech NSF Registered H1 (30
March 2007)
- - Chemplex 750 Fuchs Lubritech DVGW approved
according to the German
KTW-recommendations
for drinking water.
- - Paraliq GTE 703 Klüber NSF Registered H1 (25
Feb 2004). Approved
according to WRAS.
- - Unisilkon L 250 L Klüber Complies with German
Environmental Agency
on hygiene requirements
for tap water. Certified
by DVGW-KTW, WRAS,
AS4020, ACS.
- - ALCO 220 MMCC NSF Registered H1 (25
March 2002)
- - Foodlube Hi-Temp Rocol NSF Registered H1 (18
April 2001)
179
Always follow the lubrication recommendations of the bearing manufacturer.
Grease for ball and roller bearings in electric motors

- - Energrease LS2 BP -
- - Energrease LS-EP2 BP -
- - Energrease MP-MG2 BP -
- - APS 2 Castrol -
- - Spheerol EPL 2 Castrol -
- - Multifak EP2 Chevron -
- - Multifak AFB 2 Chevron -
- - Molykote G-0101 Dow Corning -
- - Molykote Multilub Dow Corning -
- - Unirex N2 ExxonMobil -
- - Mobilith SHC 460 ExxonMobil -
- - Mobilux EP2 ExxonMobil -
- - Lagermeister EP2 Fuchs Lubritech -
- - Rembrandt EP2 Q8/Kuwait Petroleum -
- - Alvania EP2 Shell -
- - LGEP 2 SKF -
- - LGMT 2 SKF -
- - LGFP 2 SKF NSF Registered H1 (17
Aug 2007)
- - Multis EP2 Total -
180
6.6.6 Lubricating oils

Mineral lubricating oil HM/HV 68 (Alfa Laval oil group A)

Trade names and designations might vary from country to country. Please contact your local
supplier for more information.
Recommended oil brands (general demands)

Manufacturer Designation
Alfa Laval 567334-01 1 litre
567334-02 4 litre
BP Castrol Hyspin ZZ 68
Castrol Hyspin AWS 68
Chevron Hydraulic oil AW 68
Rando HD 68
ExxonMobil Nuto H 68
Mobil DTE 26 (ISO VG 68)
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Haydn 68
Shell Tellus Oil S2 M 68
Tellus Oil S3 M 68
Statoil/Fuchs HydraWay HMA 68
Total Azolla AF 68
Azolla ZS 68
Recommended oil brands (general demands, oils for use at cold start)
These oils should be used at cold start, when the ambient temperature is below 20°C. These oils
can also be used at ambient temperatures above 20°C.
BP Castrol Hyspin AWH-M 68
Chevron Rando HDZ 68
ExxonMobil Univis N 68
Mobil DTE 10 Excel 68
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Handel 68
Shell Tellus S2 V 68
Statoil/Fuchs HydraWay HVXA 68
Total Equivis ZS 68
Lubmarine Visga 68
181
Recommended oil brands (special hygienic demands)

Conform to U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requirements of lubricants with incidental
food contact, Title CFR 21 178.3570, 178.3620 and/or those generally regarded as safe (US 21
CFR 182).
The hygienic oil on the list is in the online “NSF White Book™ Listing” at the time of the revision of
this document. For more information about the NSF registration and up to date H1 registration, see
www.nsf.org (http://www.nsf.org/business/nonfood_compounds/)
Bel-Ray No-Tox HD oil 68
Chevron Lubricating oil FM 68
ExxonMobil Mobil DTE FM 68
Fiske Brothers Lubriplate FMO AW 350
Total Nevastane AW 68
Requirements
• Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 68 / Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI>95 (general demands
and special hygienic demands).
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 68 / Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI>130 (general demands,
oils for use at cold start).
The oil must have the correct viscosity grade. No other viscosity grade than specified should
be used.
• The oil must follow the requirements in one of the standards below.
Standard (general demands and special Designation

hygienic demands)
ISO 11158 (International standard) ISO-L-HM 68
DIN 51524 part 2 (German standard) DIN 51524 – HLP 68
Standard (general demands, oils for use at Designation

cold start)
ISO 11158 (International standard) ISO-L-HV 68
DIN 51524 part 3 (German standard) DIN 51524 – HVLP 68
NOTE
Other oil brands may be used as long as they fulfill the requirements and have equivalent quality as the brands
recommended.
182
6.7 Lifting instructions

6.7.1 Lifting the separator
G08684D1
A. Weight to lift: 431 kg

B. Sling length: Min. 750 mm
1. Bolts, Tightening torque 35-45 Nm
1. Disconnect all connections.
2. Remove the inlet and outlet device, the

frame hood and the bowl according to the
instructions in 6.3 Dismantling on page 57.
NOTE
Never lift or transport the separator with the bowl

still inside.
3. Fit the lifting tool (not included in set of

tools). All four bolts on the lifting tool must
be fastened to the frame.
4. Unscrew the foundation bolts.
183
5. Use two lifting slings to lift the separator.

Total length of each loop: minimum 1,5
metres.
6. When lifting and moving the separator,

follow normal safety precautions for lifting
large heavy objects.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
A falling separator can cause accidents resulting
in serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method than

described in this manual.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
Never lift the separator by the motor adapter
plate.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight specifications,

always use lifting straps with the capacity of at
least 500 kg.
184
6.7.2 Lifting the bowl

When lifting and moving an assembled bowl,
always follow these instructions.
1. Fit the lifting tool with lifting eyes to the

bowl assembly.
A
2. Check that the lock ring is mounted
correctly before lifting the complete bowl.
3. Lift the bowl using a sling with the proper

rating.
NOTE
Never try to lift the bowl while it is still in the

1
frame. The bowl body is fastened to the frame
with the cap nut.
2
G08684A1
A. Weight to lift: 75 kg
1. Lifting eye, Tightening torque 40±5 Nm
2. Lock ring (Make sure that lock ring is fitted.)
185

7 Fault finding
These fault finding instructions are for the separator only. If a fault occurs, study the System
Documentation fault finding section (if applicable).
7.1 Mechanical functions
7.1.1 Separator vibration
NG
WARNI
!
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep
bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and
corrected before the separator is restarted.
NOTE
Some vibration is normal during the starting and

stopping sequences when the separator passes
through its critical speed.
Cause Corrective action

Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the assembly
- poor cleaning and cleaning.
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other
separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge space. Dismantle and clean the separator bowl.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure, and if necessary,
adjust the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
Spindle top bearing spring broken. Renew all springs.
187
7 Fault finding
7.1.2 Smell
Normal occurrence during start while the friction None.
blocks are slipping. If smell continues when separator is at full speed,
stop the separator and replace friction blocks.
Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
7.1.3 Noise
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and adjust the
height.
7.1.4 Speed too low

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.
Bowl is not closed or leaking. Dismantle the bowl and check.
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Incorrect transmission parts (60 Hz belt pulley
for 50 Hz power supply). NG
WARNI
!
7.1.5 Speed too high

WARNI
!
188
7 Fault finding
7.1.6 Starting power too high

WARNI
!
Wrong direction of rotation. Change electrical phase connections to the
motor.
7.1.7 Starting power too low

WARNI
!
Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.
7.1.8 Starting time too long

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Renew or clean friction blocks.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop, check and adjust the height.
189
7 Fault finding
7.2 Separating functions
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
No water in the operating water system. Check the operating water system and make
sure the valve(s) are open.
Hoses between the supply valves and separator Correct.
are incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective. Renew the rectangular ring.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
Supply valve for opening water is leaking. Rectify the leak.
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for

sludge discharge
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Water flow too low. Check the water flow
Hoses between the supply valves and separator Correct.
are incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide missing. Fit the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in the operating slide or bowl Renew the rectangular rings.
body is defective.
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature. Adjust.
Throughput too high. Adjust.
Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time between sludge
discharges.
Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power transmission
including the belt transmission (clutch).
Bowl rotates in the wrong direction. Check the electrical connections to the motor.
Gravity disc diameter to small. Use gravity disc with larger diameter.
190
7 Fault finding
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close

Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean nozzle.
Hoses reversed. Adjust.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective Renew rectangular ring.
Valve plugs in operating slide missing or Renew valve plugs.
defective.
No water. Turn on water supply.
Operating water ring leaking Renew operating water ring
191
7 Fault finding
8 Technical reference
8.1 Product description

NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system including a monitoring system. If the technical
data in the system description does not agree with the technical data in this instruction manual, the data in
the system description is the valid one.
Product specification: 881203 09 02
Commercial name: P 646
Application: Cleaning of fuel oil and lubrication oil.

Technical Design: Intended for marine- and land installations.
Total discharge.
Centrilock® lock ring.
Directives and standards: 8.1.1 Directives and standards on page 194.
Operational limits:
Feed temperature: 0 °C to +100 °C
Ambient temperature: +5 °C to +55 °C
Maximum allowed speed: 9340 r/min.
Discharge intervals: Min. 2 minutes to max. 4 hours.
Maximum allowed density of
operating liquid: 1000 kg/m3.
Viscosity max.: 700 cSt at 50 °C.
Max. light phase density, mineral 991 kg/m3 at 15°C.
oil/fresh water separation:
Not to be used for liquids with flashpoint below 60 °C.

Risk for corrosion and erosion have to be investigated in each case.
Remote restart allowed under certain conditions, see Interface description.
193
8.1.1 Directives and standards

This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer.
Manufacturer: ......................................................................................................
Manufacturer address: ......................................................................................................
Separator type: ......................................................................................................
Product specification: ......................................................................................................
Configuration number: ......................................................................................................
Serial number: ......................................................................................................
Declaration of Incorporation of Partly Completed Machinery

The machinery complies with the relevant, essential health and safety requirements of:
Designation Description
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive
To meet the requirements the following standards have been applied:
EN 12547 Centrifuges - Common safety requirements
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
General requirements
EN ISO 12100 Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk
assessment and risk reduction
EU Declaration of Conformity
The machinery complies with the following Directives:
2004/108/EC (to 2016-04-19) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
2014/30/EU (from 2016-04-20)
To meet the requirements the following standards have been applied:
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic
standards - Immunity for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic
standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
194
The technical construction file for the machinery is compiled and retained by the authorized person
Hans Thomasson within the Product Centre for High Speed Separators, Alfa Laval Tumba AB,
SE-14780 Tumba Sweden.
This machinery is to be incorporated into other equipment and must not be put into service until
it has been completed with starting/stopping equipment, control equipment, auxiliary equipment.
e.g. valves, according to the instructions in the technical documentation, and after the completed
machinery has been declared in conformity with the directives mentioned above, in order to fulfill
the EU-requirements.
Signed for and on behalf of: ......................................................................................................

Place: ......................................................................................................
Date of issue: ......................................................................................................
Signature: ......................................................................................................
Name: ......................................................................................................
Function: ......................................................................................................
195
8.2 Technical data

General technical data

Description Value Unit
Motor power
- 50 Hz 9.5 kW
- 60Hz 9.5 kW
Jp reduced to motor
- 50 Hz 9.85 kgm2
- 60 Hz 6.87 kgm2
Gear ratio
- 50 Hz 3.03:1 -
- 60 Hz 2.53:1 -
Alarm levels for vibration monitor, connection 752, 1st 0.3 mm
Alarm levels for vibration monitor, connection 752, 2nd 0.45 mm
Discharge interval 2-240 minute
Maximum density of operating liquid 1000 kg/m3
Maximum density of sediment 1400 kg/m3
Maximum density of feed 1100 kg/m3
Minimum ratio of density 0.797
Maximum ratio of density 0.977
Feed temperature 0 to +100 °C
Maximum running time without flow, bowl empty 60 minute
Maximum running time without flow, bowl filled 60 minute
Bowl material AL 111 2377-02 -
Operating data
Bowl speed, synchronous
- 50 hz 9090 r/min
- 60 Hz 9108 r/min
Motor speed, synchronous
- 50 hz 3000 r/min
- 60 hz 3600 r/min
Maximum allowed speed 9340 r/min
Maximum power consumption, start-up 17 kW
Power consumption idling 3.5 kW
Power consumption at maximum capacity 9.2 kW
Minimum starting time 1.5 minute
Maximum starting time 2.5 minute
Minimum stopping time 18 minute
Maximum stopping time 35 minute
Sound power level (uncertainty) 9.1 (0.3) Bel(A)
196

Sound pressure level (uncertainty) 76 (3) dB(A)
Maximum vibration level, separator in use 9.1 mm/s
(r.m.s.)
Volume and capacity data

Bowl liquid volume 4.3 litre
Discharge volume (fixed) 4 litre
Sludge volume, efficient 0.63 litre
Sludge volume, total 1.6 litre
Lubricating oil volume 2.8 litre
Weight information
Motor drive weight 159 kg
Bowl weight 76 kg
Weight of separator (total) 550 kg
197
8.3 Connection list

200 - Connections for process flows

201 Inlet for process liquid
Remark -
- Inlet pressure See
206 Inlet for liquid seal and displacement liquid

Remark -
- Flow, set value: 13,5 - 16,5 litres/
minute
- Quality requirements See 8.5 Demand specification water
220 Outlet for light phase

Remark -
- Max. counter pressure See
(221) Outlet for heavy phase

Remark -
222 Outlet for solid phase

Remark -
- Discharge volume: See 8.2 Technical data
- Interface: The outlet from the sludge cover must
always be arranged to prevent the cover
from being filled up with sludge.
198
300 - Connections for flushing, CIP, and operating systems

375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid
Remark -
- Quality requirements See 8.5 Demand specification water
- Max. density min. 1000 kg/m³
- Pressure min. 150 kPa
Make-up liquid < 80 °C
- Flow (momentary) 2,8 litres/
minute
- Interval See 8.6.5 Operating water interface
- Time See 8.6.5 Operating water interface
Discharge liquid
- Flow 11 litres/
minute
- Consumption See 8.6.5 Operating water interface
Closing liquid
- Flow 2,8 litres/
minute
Start up closing liquid
- Flow 11 litres/
minute
(377) Outlet for operating liquid

Remark -
400 - Connections for liquids

462 Drain of frame top part, lower
Remark Should be possible to drain liquids by
gravity
(463) Drain of frame top part, upper

Remark -
700 - Connections for electricity

701 Motor for separator
Remark -
- Max. deviation from nominal ± 5% (± 10% momentarily during 5
frequency: seconds)
199
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle

Remark See 8.4 Interface description
- Type Inductive proximity switch
- Supply voltage, nominal 8 V
- With sensor activated (near metal) Less or equal to 1,2 mA.
- With sensor not activated (far from More or equal to 2,1 mA.
metal)
- Number of pulses per revolution 1
752 Position transducer for bearing holder (unbalance sensor)

Remark See 8.4 Interface description
- Type Inductive analogue sensor
- Supply voltage 15 to 30 V DC
- Operation range (mild steel) 3,5 ±0,25 mm
- Output current analogue 4 to 20 mA
- Load resistance, RL Max. 1 kΩ
200
8.4 Interface description

8.4.1 Scope
This document gives information, requirements,
and recommendations about operational
procedures and signal processing for safe and
reliable operation of the separator. It is intended
to be used for designing auxiliary equipment
and control systems for the separator.
8.4.2 References
This Interface Description is one complementary
document to the separator. Other such
documents that contain necessary information
and are referred to here are:
• Interconnection Diagram
• Connection List
• Technical Data
Standards referred to are:

• EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency
stop equipment, functional aspects -
Principles of design
• EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention
of unexpected start-up
• EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety
related parts of control systems - Part 1
General principles for design.
8.4.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following
definitions apply:
• Synchronous speed: The speed the
machine will attain when it is driven by a
three phase squirrel-cage induction motor
and there is no slip in the motor and the
drive system.
• Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.
201
8.4.4 Goal
To eliminate situations that can cause harm,
i.e. injury, damage to health or property and
unsatisfactory process result are e.g.:
Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing system
accumulation in the bowl. which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who accidentally
touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Information and instructions given in this

document aim at preventing these situations.
Control and supervision can be more or less

comprehensive depending on the type of used
control equipment. When a simple control unit
is used it would be impossible or too expensive
to include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at nearly
no extra cost when a more advanced control
unit is used. For this reasons functions that
are indispensable or needed for safety reasons
to protect the machine and/or personnel are
denoted with shall while other functions are
denoted with should.
8.4.5 Description of separator

modes
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes. The normally used modes are
described below but other modes might exist. It
is assumed that:
• The separator is correctly assembled.
• All connections are made according to
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
• The separator control system is activated.
202
If above conditions are not fulfilled the separator

will be in SERVICE mode.
Stand still means:

• The power to the separator motor is off
• The bowl is not rotating.
Starting means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating and accelerating.
Running means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating at full speed.
• RUNNING is a collective denomination for
a number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
- STAND BY: Separator is in a waiting

mode and not producing.
- PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
- CLEANING: Separator is fed with
cleaning liquids with the intention to
clean the separator.
Stopping means:
• The power to the separator motor is off.
• The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
• STOPPING is a collective denomination for
a number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
- NORMAL STOP: A manually or

automatically initiated stop.
- SAFETY STOP: An automatically
initiated stop at too high vibrations.
- EMERGENCY STOP: A manually
initiated stop at emergency situations.
This stop will be in effect until it is
manually reset.
203
8.4.6 Remote start

This machine may be started from a remote
location under the following conditions;
• First start after any kind of service or
manual cleaning must be supervised locally
in order to ensure that no mistakes has
been made during assembly.
• The unbalance sensor is mandatory for
remote start.
• The installation must include equipment
to prevent unintentional start-up from
remote location when the machine is
disassembled.
• The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start of process flow
from remote location when the machine is
not properly connected to the piping.
8.4.7 Handling of connection

interfaces
Electrical connections
701 Separator motor.
The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL

- (direct on line) started motor. The separator
can also be started by a Y/D starter, but then
the time in Y-position must be maximized to 5
seconds.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit

designed according to EN 418 and a power
isolation device according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the

separator that shall be used for first start after
assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of

running hours.
There should be a current transformer to give

an analogue signal to the control unit about the
motor current.
204
740 Speed sensor
A proximity sensor of inductive type according

to Namur standard is giving a number of pulses
per revolution of the bowl (see Connection List).
Signal processing in STARTING:

• The separator should be stopped
automatically according to NORMAL STOP
procedure and an alarm should be given
when the accumulated time for acceleration
is longer than the maximum time specified
in Technical Data. An abnormal start time
indicates some malfunction of the separator
equipment and should be investigated.
• If the speed exceeds “Bowl speed,
synchronous” in Technical Data with more
than 5% the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP and a
high speed alarm shall be given.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g. by checking
that pulses are coming). In case of failure
indication the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP with a
timer controlled stop sequence and an
alarm for speed monitoring system failure
shall be given.
• The acceleration should be supervised
to ensure that a certain speed (e.g. 250
r/min.) has been reached within a certain
time (e.g. 30 seconds).
205
Signal processing in RUNNING:

• If the speed exceeds “Bowl speed,
synchronous” in Technical Data with more
than 5% for a period longer than 1 minute
or momentarily during maximum 5 seconds
more than 10% the separator shall be
stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP
and a high speed alarm shall be given.
• If the speed falls more than 10% below
the synchronous speed for a period longer
than 1 minute or 15% during more than
5 seconds a low speed alarm should
be given. Low speed indicates some
malfunction of the separator equipment and
shall be investigated.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g. by checking
that pulses are coming). In case of a failure
indication an alarm for speed monitoring
system failure shall be given. If there is a
risk of too high speed the separator shall
be stopped by NORMAL STOP.
• The speed drop during DISCHARGE.
compared to the measured speed
immediately before, should be between
3-8% which will indicate a proper discharge.
Signal processing in STOPPING:

• STAND STILL shall be indicated when no
pulses are detected within 30 seconds.
• Stopping the separator when alarm for
speed monitoring system failure is active,
shall cause a timer controlled stop. (See
“Stop time” in 8.2 Technical data on page
196.)
752 Unbalance sensor (optional).
For indication of any abnormal unbalance

and to be able to perform appropriate
countermeasures, the separator has been
equipped with an inductive analogue sensor
monitoring the radial position of the Top bearing
seat on the separator frame. The signal from
the sensor shall be monitored and two alarm
levels according to the vibration alarm levels in
Technical data on page 196 should be set.
The vibration level shall be high for 3 seconds to

generate an alarm. The first level is only used to
generate an alarm while the second level shall
stop the machine.
206
The vibration monitor shall include self check

function to be performed at least at initiation of
STARTING.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the

separator shall be stopped the quickest way
possible and it shall not been restarted until the
reasons for the unbalance have been found and
measures to remove them have been taken.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the

separator shall be stopped automatically by
SAFETY STOP.
If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall

be given and an automatic stop by NORMAL
STOP shall be initiated.
Signal processing in RUNNING:

• If vibrations exceed the first alarm level
an alarm should be given. Vibrations of
this magnitude will reduce the expected life
time of the bearings and should therefore
be eliminated.
• If vibrations exceed the second alarm
level the separator shall be stopped
automatically by SAFETY STOP.
• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in STOPPING:

• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:

• If vibrations exceed the second level the
system shall turn over automatically to
SAFETY STOP.
207
Fluid connections
Complementary information is given in the
document Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:

• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Should be closed. Bowl will be open and
empty or closed and filled depending on
if start is done from STAND STILL or
STOPPING.
Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in CLEANING:
• A sequence of cleaning liquids should be
fed to the separator. The flow rate should
be as high as possible and preferably not
less than the production flow rate.
Processing in NORMAL STOP or EMERGENCY

STOP:
• Could be closed or open but the bowl
should be filled unless the stop is initiated
in STARTING.
Processing in SAFETY STOP:

• Could be closed or open but the bowl
shall be filled unless the stop is initiated in
STARTING.
206 Inlet for conditioning and displacement

liquid
• According to process
220, 221 and 222 Outlets
Processing in STAND STILL:

• Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:

• Shall be open.
208
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid
Processing in all modes:

• It is recommended to supervise the
supply pressure. If pressure is too low (see
Connection List), start should be interlocked
and if it happens in PRODUCTION or
CLEANING turn over to STAND BY should
take place.

• Below 85 % of synchronous bowl speed no
water supply may be made.
• When coming from PRODUCTION a
discharge shall be initiated to remove
sediment from bowl to avoid problems due
to solidification, see Connection List.
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:

• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by
timer or ALCAP system.
Signal processing in CLEANING:

• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by
timer or CIP-control system.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:

• Discharges should not be made.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and

EMERGENCY STOP:
• Discharges should not be made.
209
8.5 Demand specification water

Operating water is used in the separator for

several different functions: e.g. to operate the
discharge mechanism, to lubricate and cool
mechanical seals.
Poor quality of the operating water may cause

erosion, corrosion and/or operating problem in
the separator and must therefore be treated to
meet certain demands.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating water
supplied by the customer.
The following conditions must be fulfilled:

1. Turbidity free water, solids content <0.001%
by volume.
Deposits must not be allowed to form in
certain areas in the separator.
2. A maximum particle size of 50 µm.
3. A total hardness of <180 mg CaCO3 per
litre, which corresponds to 10°dH or 12.5°E.
Hard water may with time form deposits in
the operating mechanism. The precipitation
rate is accelerated with increased operating
temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe as the
hardness of the water increase.
4. A chloride content of maximum 100 ppm
NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l).
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/l is
not recommended.
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on
the separator surface in contact with the
operating water, including the spindle.
Corrosion is a process that is accelerated
by increased separating temperature, low
pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
5. 6.5 < pH < 9
Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the
risk for corrosion; this is accelerated by
increased temperature and high chloride
ion content.
6. A bicarbonate content (HCO3) of minimum
70 mg HCO3 per litre, which corresponds
to 3.2°dKH.
210
8.6 Drawings
8.6.1 Basic size drawing

206
201
220
701
975
C
752
932
899
740
22
2
(2
21
)(
37
291
7)
380
330
(4
63
)
462
462
21
A
38
40
300 715
222
28
E
D
201
,5
88
220
158
167
25
32
45
375
85
113
90
90
206
ISO-G 1/2
22
17
2
ISO-G /2
462
F
G
375
10
M
x
4
G1140711
A. Tightening torque 160 Nm.

B. Maximum horizontal displacement at the inlet and outlet connections during operation ± 5 mm.
C. Maximum vertical displacement at the sludge connection during operation ± 2 mm.
D. depth 45
E. 2 holes M10, thread depth 30
F. 25 min.
G. 32 max.
Connection house, with connections 201, 220 and 206, turnable in 60° steps all around.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible.
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
211
8.6.2 Foundation drawing

D
E
500
2100
1400
160
800
391
1800
800
H
V
B
300 min.
14
451
180 ( 144)
I
G J
205
K
410
H
L
V
C H M
A 505
G1048711
A. Centre of separator bowl

B. 8 holes ø14 for foundation bolt.
C. Centre of motor
D. Max. height of largest component incl. lifting tool
E. Min. lifting capacity required during service: 300 kg.
F. Service side
G. Foundation bolt
H. Installation according to stated foundation force. Foundation turnable 360°
I. Recommended free floor space for unloading when doing service.
J. No fixed installation within this area.
K. Centre of gravity (complete machine)
L. Dynamic forces (static force excluded) from separator do not exceed. Vertical ±12 kN. Horizontal ±12 kN
M. Total foundation force (sum of all feet): Vertical ±12 kN. Horizontal ±12 kN.
Total static load max. 4.5 kN
212
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram

X 8
YW
WT
BU
BN
PU
GN
BK
RD
752
BU
BN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
740
BU
BN
BU
BN
BK
1
DC
-
+
A B
N
J
740 752
G1145811
A: Wiring without junction box Wiring of connector “X”: Wire colour codes:
B: Junction box RD=A BK=Black
740: Speed sensor BU=B BN=Brown
WT=C BU=Blue
752: Unbalance sensor, (position
YE=D RD=Red
trans. for bearing holder)
GN=E GN=Green
BK=F PU=Purple
BN=G YE=Yellow
PU=H WT=White
Demand specification wire

Approval: UL 1007/1569
CSA TR-64
Area acc. to AWG 18
Items showed in this document are not included in all separators. See product specification.
213
8.6.4 Performance data in- and

outlet device
Maximum light phase counter pressure as a

function of throughput and viscosity.
[kPa]
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
10 cSt
100 36 cSt
48 cSt
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
[m3/h]
G1163611
214
8.6.5 Operating water interface

Proposed operation of operating water

interface.
Connection numbers refer to operation of the
corresponding ancillary valves. Connections
372 and 376 converge to become connection
375 of the separator.
Information about the flows through connections

206 and 375 see: 8.3 Connection list.
Closing the bowl and supplying liquid seal after

start-up:
1. Close the operating slide valves by
supplying discharge water (connection 372)
for 5 seconds.
2. Pause for 15 seconds.
3. Close the bowl by supplying make-up water
(connection 376) for 15 seconds.
4. Apply liquid seal by opening connection
206 for 5 seconds.
5. Open the feed (connection 201)
Start-up sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
G1189211
215
Performing a discharge:
1. Close the feed (connection 201).
2. Perform a displacement (of the interface)
by opening connection 206 for 20 seconds.
3. Initiate a discharge by supplying discharge
water (connection 372) for 3 seconds.
4. Pause for 15 seconds.
5. Close the bowl by supplying make up water
(connection 376) for 15 seconds.
6. Apply liquid seal by opening connection
206 for 5 seconds.
7. Open the feed (connection 201).
Discharge sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
G1189221
During the separating process the make-up

water supply volume is maintained by opening
connection 376 for 1 seconds every 5 minutes.
216
8.6.6 PX sealing diagram

rs
2,4
A
2,2
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
B
1
C
0,8
0,6 rf
0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8
G1067911
A. No sealing
B. Operational envelope
C. Non physical
Separator bowl number: 9006109-01, 9006111-01, 9017343-01, 9023414-01,

9023415-01, 9020188-01
Separator bowl speed: 9090 r/min

References density for Feed: 1100 kg/m3
References density for Wet solids: 2270 kg/m3
NOTE
Max. allowed operating liquid density: 1000 kg/m3
217
8.6.7 Electric motor

G1058831
For information regarding motor specifications, see motor plate.
For further information see motor manufacturer’s documentation.
NOTE
For complete information about motor variants, please

contact your Alfa Laval representative.
218
9 Installation
9.1 Introduction
The installation instructions are specifications,
which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification

societies or other local authorities must be
followed.
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval can

not be held responsible for any malfunctions related
to the installation.
219
9 Installation
9.2 Upon arrival at the storage area

Ensure that the separator delivered is suitable
for the application.
9.2.1 Transport
1. When lifting the separator, make sure
that tools and lifting devices are fastened
securely. See 6.7.1 Lifting the separator
on page 183.
NG
WARNI
!
Crush hazard
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
2. When lifting the bowl see 6.7.2 Lifting the

bowl on page 185.
3. During transport of the separator, the in-

and outlet device, frame hood and bowl
must always be removed.
G08735B1
220
9 Installation
9.2.2 Protection and storage of

goods
1. Before storing a separator that has been
in operation, make sure to drain any parts
containing water, such as Operating water
module (if any), Operating water system
and Cooling jackets.
2. The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -

55 °C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.
G08736B1
3. If there is a risk for water condensation, the

equipment must stand well ventilated and
at a temperature above dew point.
4. If the storage time exceeds 12 months,

the equipment must be inspected every 6
months and, if necessary, the protection be
renewed.
The following protection products are recommended:

1. Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long lasting effective
treatment for external surfaces. The oil should prevent corrosion
attacks and leaves a waxy surface.
2. Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin lubricant for inside
protection. It gives a lubricating transparent oil film.
3. Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust oil after the
storage period.
4. Moist remover to be packed together with the separator
equipment.
221
9 Installation
9.3 Planning of installation
9.3.1 Important measurements
G0873711
Important measurements are:

- minimum lifting height for lifting bowl parts
- shortest distance between driving motor
and wall
- space for control and operation
- free passage for dismantling and assembly
- space for maintenance work
- space on floor for machine parts during
maintenance work
For more detailed information, see 8.6.1 Basic

size drawing on page 211 and 8.6.2 Foundation
drawing on page 212.
222
9 Installation
9.3.2 Maintenance service
G08738N1
A work bench should be installed in the

separator room.
Hot water, compressed air and diesel oil should

be available near the work bench to make
maintenance work easier.
An overhead hoist with capacity of 300 kg

is required for transport of bowl parts to the
working bench. Lifting point should be above
the centre of the separator.
NOTE
When two or more separators are installed, the lifting

height should be increased to enable bowl parts from
one separator to be lifted and moved over an adjoining
separator.
See 8.6.2 Foundation drawing on page 212.
223
9 Installation
9.3.3 Connections to
surrounding equipment
Local safety regulations
If the local safety regulations prescribe that the
installation has to be inspected and approved
by responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
plant design approved by them.
G0873911
Service media
Ensure that all service media (electric power,
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity.
G0874021
Sludge discharge tank

If the sediment from the separator is discharged
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size
and configuration specified. If the solids are
discharged from the separator bowl casing into
a closed system, ensure that this system cannot
be overfilled or closed in such a way that the
solids cannot leave the bowl casing. This could
cause a hazardous situation.
G0874311
224
9 Installation
9.4 Storage at out of operation

If the separator is out of operation for more than
1 month:
Preferred alternative - Run every month:

Start the separator at least ones every month.
NOTE

lubrication.
If separator will not be run ones every

month:
1. Lift out the bowl.
2. Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by

lubricating it with oil.
3. Keep the separator and bowl well stored,

dry and protected from mechanical
damage.
For details see 9.2.2 Protection and storage of

goods on page 221.
9.5 Before start-up

If the separator has been out of operation for:
3 months or longer
• Pre-lubricate the spindle bearings
6 months or longer
• Perform an Inspection service [i] and make

sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.
18 months or longer
• Perform an Overhaul service [o] and make

sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings. G1041361
• Change the oil before starting.
See 6.6.4 Lubrication chart on page 176.
225
.P646
Spare Parts Catalogue
Specification No. 881203-09-02/2

Book No. 9028505 02 Rev. 4
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de piéces de Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων
rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
Каталог запасных Reservedelskatalog
частеи
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2018-03-26

means without prior written permission of
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 21
2 Machine bottom part 26

2.1 Driving device vertical 28
3 Separator bowl 30
4 Inlet and outlet device 32
5 Belt driving device, 50 Hz 34

5.1 Centrifugal clutch, 50 Hz 36
6 Belt driving device, 60 Hz 38

6.1 Centrifugal clutch, 60 Hz 40
7 Set of plates 42
8 Commissioning kit 44
9 Monitoring kit, for speed 46
10 Monitoring kit, for vibration 48
11 Set of tool 50
12 Inspection kit 52
13 Overhaul kit 54
14 Lifting tool 56
3
15 Support kit 58
16 Hydraulic tool kit 60

16.1Hydraulic components 62
16.2Hydraulic tool 64
17 Motor service kit 66
18 Cross reference list 68
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
The name plate - the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers. See also Warnings
in chapter ‘‘1.1 General information” on page 7.
Maskinskylten - en guide till det rätta reservdelsnumret. Se även Varningar i kapitel “1.1
Allmän information” på sidan 8.
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer. Siehe auch Warnhinweise
in Kapitel “1.1 Allgemeine Informationen” auf Seite 9.
La plaque de la machine - un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct.
Voir à ce propos les mises en garde du chapitre “1.1 Informations générales ” en page 10.
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto. Consulte también
las Advertencias del capítulo “1.1 Información General” en la página 11.
Фирменная табличка машины — указатель правилного номера запасной части. См.
также предупреждения в главе “1.1 Общие сведения” на странице 12.
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi. Vedere anche le
Avvertenze nel capitolo “1.1 Informazioni generali” a pagina 13.
A placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes.
Consultar também os Avisos no capítulo “Informação Geral 1.1” da página 14.
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon. Katso myös kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15
olevaa kohtaa “Yleiset tiedot ”.
Η πινακίδα της μηχανής είναι ο οδηγός του σωστού ανταλλακτικού. ∆είτε επίσης τις
προειδοποιήσεις του κεφαλαίου "1.1 ΓΕΝΙΚΕΣ ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΕΣ", στη σελίδα 16.
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer. Zie ook
Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk “1.1 Algemene informatie”, op blz. 17.
first Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer. Se også under Advarsler i
kapitel “1.1 Generelle oplysninger” på side 18.
zh 铭牌：用于查找正确备件号的参考。另请参见 19 页“1.1 概要信息” 一章中的“ 警告”。
Az adattábla – a segítségével megtalálhatók a megfelelő pótalkatrészszámok. Lásd még:

hu Figyelmeztetések az „1.1. Általános tudnivalók” fejezetben (20. oldal).
5
1 Read this first
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We
guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
XXXXXX
WARNING B
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly,

the vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life
time of components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe
unbalance occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into
contact with the frame causing damage to equipment and injuries
to personnel. It is strongly recommended that the exchange of
parts is supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alfa
Laval assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to
personnel resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
XXXXXX
WARNING C
Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
7
P646
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten hos våra egna produkter.
XXXXXX
VARNING B
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsnivån

komma att öka. Detta kan i sin tur leda till förkortad livslängd
på t.ex. lager och växlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppstår, kan
den roterande kulan komma att slå i stativets delar, vilket kan
medföra allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Det är därför av stor
vikt att utbyte av kulans delar övervakas av en serviceingenjör
från Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval tar inget ansvar för maskin- eller
personskador som kan uppkomma på grund av att delar bytts ut
av icke auktoriserad personal.
XXXXXX
VARNING C
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfrästa spår som resultat

av balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut
utan att en ombalansering av kulan görs. För att bästa resultat
ska uppnås, ska den kompletta kulan sändas till en Alfa Laval
serviceverkstad för ombalansering.
8
Sichern Sie sich Ihren Anspruch auf Qualität durch

ausschließliche Verwendung von original Alfa Laval
Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daß Alfa Laval keine Verantwortung für den
Ausfall eines Separators übernimmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen
ausgestattet ist. Wir garantieren für die Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG B
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommel-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies
kann zu einer kürzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.B.
Wälzlagern und Getrieben, führen. Bei einer schweren
Unwucht kann die rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt
mit dem Gestell kommen, was zu Beschädigungen der
Ausrüstung oder Personenverletzungen führen kann. Es wird
dringend empfohlen, den Austausch von einem Alfa Laval
Service-Ingenieur beaufsichtigen zu lassen. Alfa Laval
übernimmt keine Haftung für eine Gerätebeschädigung oder
Personenverletzung aufgrund einer ungenehmigten Montage
dieser Teile.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG C
Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Fräsmarken vom Auswuchten

der kompletten Separatortrommel. Diese Teile dürfen nicht ohne
eine Neuauswuchtung der kompletten Trommel ausgetauscht
werden. Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alfa Laval
Service-werkstatt erfolgen.
9
P646
Respectez votre engagement de qualité en utilisant toujours

des pièces de rechange d’origine Alfa Laval.
Attention, Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas de
panne d’un séparateur équipé de pièces de rechange qui ne
sont pas d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la fiabilité de
nos produits.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pièces du bol du séparateur

risque d’augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et donc de réduire la
durée de vie des composants tels que les paliers à roulements
et les engrenages. En cas de déséquilibre trop important, le
bol en rotation risque d’entrer en contact avec des pièces du
bâti, provoquant ainsi des détériorations de l’équipement et
des blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons fortement
à faire réaliser le remplacement sous la surveillance d’un
technicien de maintenance Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval n’assume
aucune responsabilité en cas de détérioration du matériel ou de
blessure du personnel résultant d’une installation non approuvée
de ces pièces.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT C
Certaines pièces du bol présentent des marques de repérage

effectuées lors de l’équilibrage du bol du séparateur. Il ne faut
pas remplacer ces pièces sans avoir au préalable procédé à un
nouvel équilibrage de l’ensemble du bol. Cet équilibrage doit
être réalisé dans un atelier de réparation Alfa Laval.
10
Proteja su compromiso con la calidad utilizando siempre

repuestos originales Alfa Laval.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad
por el fallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no
originales. Alfa Laval garantiza la calidad y la fiabilidad de sus
productos.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor

de la separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del
nivel de vibraciones, lo que puede provocar un desgaste de
algunos componentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los
engranajes. Si se produce un desequilibrado importante, el
conjunto del rotor en movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor,
causando serios daños al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda
encarecidamente que el cambio sea supervisado por un
técnico de mantenimiento de Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval no se
hace responsable de los daños materiales o daños personales
provocados por la instalación no autorizada de esas piezas.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA C
Algunas piezas del rotor llevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor completo de la separadora. Siempre que
se cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el
rotor, operación que debe ser realizada por un experto de un
centro de servicio Alfa Laval.
11
P646
Для обеспечения качества работы вашего оборудования

используйте только подлинные запасные детали компании
Alfa Laval.
Помните: компания Alfa Laval не несет ответственность за
нарушения работы сепаратора, на котором установлены не
подлинные запасные детали. Мы гарантируем качество и
надежность нашей продукции.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ B
В случае замены некоторых частей устройства барабана

сепаратора может повыситься уровень вибрации.Это
может привести к сокращению срока службы компонентов,
таких как подшипники и привод. В случае значительного
дисбаланса, устройство вращающегося барабана может
войти в контакт со станиной, что приведет к серьезному
повреждению оборудования и травмам обслуживающего
персонала. Настоятельно рекомендуется, чтобы замена
была проконтролирована инженером по обслуживанию
компании Alfa Laval. Компания Аlfa Laval не несет никакой
ответственности за повреждения собственности или травмы
персонала в результате неразрешенной установки этих
деталей.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ C
На некоторых частях барабана поставлены отметки после

балансировки барабана сепаратора полностью. Эти части
не могут быть заменены без повторной балансировки всего
устройства барабана сепаратора. Повторная балансировка
должна быть произведена в ремонтном центре Alfa Laval.
12
Salvaguardate la qualità del vostro separatore utilizzando

sempre ricambi originali Alfa Laval.
Ricordate che la Alfa Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilità
in caso di difetti al separatore dovuti all’utilizzo di ricambi non
originali. La Alfa Laval garantisce la qualità e l’affidabilità
esclusivamente dei propri prodotti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alla sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del

separatore, il livello di vibrazioni può aumentare. Questo può
comportare la riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali
cuscinetti a rulli ed ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il
tamburo può entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando
seri danni all’attrezzatura e lesioni alle persone. Si raccomanda
caldamente di far controllare la sostituzione da un tecnico
di assistenza Alfa Laval. La Alfa Laval non assume alcuna
responsabilità per danni alle cose o lesioni al personale dovuti
all’installazione non autorizzata delle suddette parti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA C
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento

complessivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti
non possono essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo
bilanciamento. Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un
centro assistenza Alfa Laval per il ribilanciamento dell’intero
gruppo.
13
P646
Preserve o seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando

sempre peças originais Alfa Laval.
Não se esqueça de que a Alfa Laval não assume quaisquer
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que não esteja
equipado com peças originais. Por isso, asseguramos a
garantia da qualidade e fiabilidade dos nossos produtos.
XXXXXX
AVISO B
Ao mudar determinadas peças no conjunto do rotor da

separadora, poderá provocar um aumento da vibração.
Tal poderá originar a redução do tempo de duração dos
componentes, tais como rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens.
Caso se verifique um desequilíbrio acentuado, o conjunto do
rotor giratório poderá entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo
a provocar danos no equipamento e ferimentos pessoais.
Recomenda-se vivamente que a substituição de peças seja
vistoriada por um técncico de serviço da Alfa Laval. A Alfa
Laval não assume qualquer responsabilidade por danos em
bens ou ferimentos pessoais resultantes da instalação não
autorizada daquelas peças.
XXXXXX
AVISO C
Determinadas partes do rotor contêm marcas de atrito do

balanceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas peças
não devem ser substituídas sem reequilibrar o rotor completo.
O reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistência
Alfa Laval.
14
Varmista käyttämiesi tuotteiden laatu käyttämällä aina aitoja ja

alkuperäisiä Alfa Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alfa Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toimintahäiriöstä, jossa on käytetty muita kuin alkuperäisiä
varaosia. Me takaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja
luotettavuuden.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS B
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyjä osia vaihdetaan,

sen tärinän taso voi kasvaa. Tämä voi johtaa joidenkin osien,
kuten vierintälaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, käyttöiän
lyhenemiseen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epätasapainoon,
pyörivä kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa
laite- ja henkilövahinkoja. Suosittelemme, että Alfa Lavalin
huoltoinsinööri valvoo vaihtoa. Alfa Laval ei ota vastuuta
omaisuudelle tai henkilökunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista,
mikäli ne johtuvat näiden osien väärin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS C
Tietyissä kuulan osissa on merkinnät koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Näitä osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, että koko
kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainotus on annettava Alfa Laval -
korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
15
P646
∆ιασφαλίστε τη δέσμευσή σας για ποιότητα χρησιμοποιώντας

πάντοτε γνήσια ανταλλακτικά Alfa Laval.
Σας υπενθυμίζουμε ότι η Alfa Laval δεν αναλαμβάνει ευθύνη
για τη βλάβη διαχωριστήρα που δεν είναι εξοπλισμένος με
αυθεντικά ανταλλακτικά. Εγγυώμαστε την ποιότητα και την
αξιοπιστία των προϊόντων μας.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ B
Όταν αλλάζετε ορισμένα εξαρτήματα στο σύστημα του τυμπάνου

του διαχωριστήρα, η στάθμη κραδασμών μπορεί να αυξηθεί.
Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν αποτέλεσμα μικρότερη διάρκεια ζωής
των εξαρτημάτων, όπως ρουλεμάν και γρανάζια. Σε περίπτωση
σοβαρής έλλειψης ζυγοστάθμισης, το περιστρεφόμενο σύστημα
του τυμπάνου μπορεί να έλθει σε επαφή με το πλαίσιο,
προκαλώντας ζημιές στο μηχάνημα και τραυματισμό του
προσωπικού. Οι οποιεσδήποτε αλλαγές εξαρτημάτων
πρέπει να γίνονται υπό την επίβλεψη μηχανικού της Alfa
Laval. Η Alfa Laval δεν φέρει καμμία ευθύνη για υλικές ζημιές
ή για τραυματισμό του προσωπικού λόγω τοποθέτησης αυτών
των εξαρτημάτων από μη εξουσιοδοτημένα άτομα.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ C
Ορισμένα εξαρτήματα του τυμπάνου φέρουν ίχνη φρεζαρίσματος

από τη ζυγοστάθμιση ολόκληρου του συστήματος του
τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα. Αυτά τα εξαρτήματα δεν
πρέπει να αντικατασταθούν χωρίς να ξαναγίνει ζυγοστάθμιση
ολόκληρου του συστήματος του τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα.
Η επαναζυγοστάθμιση πρέπει να γίνει σε κάποιο από τα
επισκευαστικά κέντρα της Alfa Laval.
16
Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alfa Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop, dat Alfa Laval geen verantwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor defecten aan een separator die is uitgerust
met nietoriginele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de
kwaliteit en de betrouwbaarheid van onze producten.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING B
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden

vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden
tot een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers
en tandwielen. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van
onbalans, kan de roterende trommel in contact komen met het
frame, wat kan leiden tot ernstige schade aan goederen of tot
persoonlijk letsel. Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden
om onderdelen te laten vervangen onder supervisie van een
onderhoudstechnicus van Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval aanvaardt
geen enkele aansprakelijkheid voor schade aan goederen of
persoonlijk letsel als gevolg van onoordeelkundige installatie
van die onderdelen.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING C
Op bepaalde onderdelen van de trommel zitten freesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
onderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de
gehele trommel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw
uitbalanceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alfa Laval.
17
P646
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele fra Alfa Laval.
Husk at Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for fejl i separatorer,
der er udstyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestår for vore
produkters kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL B
Ved udskiftning af visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan

vibrationsniveauet blive forøget. Dette kan forkorte levetiden for
komponenter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tilfælde af kraftige
vibrationer kan den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt
med rammedele, hvilket kan medføre alvorlig beskadigelse
af udstyr og personskade. Det anbefales på det kraftigste,
at udskiftningen sker under tilsyn af en servicetekniker fra
Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for ting- eller
personskade som følge af ikke-autoriseret montering af disse
dele.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL C
Visse kugledele er forsynet med mærker fra afbalanceringen af

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning af disse dele skal
der foretages en ny afbalancering af den samlede kugleenhed.
Afbalanceringen bør foretages af et Alfa Laval-servicecenter.
18
zh
请始终使用阿法拉伐真品备件以保证您产品的质量。
请注意，阿法拉伐对使用非原装备件的分离设备的故障不承担
责任。我们保证我们产品的质量与可靠性。
XXXXXX
警告 B
在更换分离器转鼓装置的某些部件后，振动水平可能会升高。
这可能会导致滚动轴承和齿轮等部件的寿命缩短。如果出现
严重不平衡状态，转鼓装置可能会碰到框架，导致设备损坏
甚至人员伤害。强烈建议由阿法拉伐服务工程师主持部件的
更换。对于非授权安装的此类部件导致的财产损失和人身伤
害，阿法拉伐不承担责任。
XXXXXX
警告 C
某些转鼓部件带有整个分离设备转鼓平衡部分的研磨痕迹。在
未重新校准整个转鼓的平衡前，不得更换这些部件。平衡校准
应由阿法拉伐服务点进行。
19
P646
hu
Minőség iránti elkötelezettségének megfelelően mindig eredeti
Alfa Laval pótalkatrészeket használjon.
Az Alfa Laval nem vállal felelősséget a nem eredeti
pótalkatrészekkel felszerelt szeparátor meghibásodásáért. A
saját termékeink minőségét és megbízhatóságát garantáljuk.
XXXXXX
B. FIGYELMEZTETÉS
A szeparátor dobszerelvénye bizonyos alkatrészeinek cseréje

esetén emelkedhet a vibráció szintje. Ez lerövidítheti egyes
komponensek, például a görgőscsapágyak és a fogaskerekek
élettartamát. Súlyos kiegyensúlyozatlanság esetén a
forgó dobszerelvény hozzáérhet a kerethez, a berendezés
károsodását és személyi sérülést okozva. Az alkatrészek
cseréjét komolyan javasolt az Alfa Laval szervizmérnökének
felügyelete mellett végezni. Az Alfa Laval nem vállal
felelősséget az alkatrészek jogosulatlan beépítése miatt
bekövetkező vagyoni kárért vagy személyi sérülésért.
XXXXXX
C. FIGYELMEZTETÉS
A dob bizonyos alkatrészein bemart jelek láthatók az egész

szeparátordob kiegyensúlyozásához. Ilyen alkatrész cseréje
esetén az egész dobot újból ki kell egyensúlyozni. Az újbóli
kiegyensúlyozással egy Alfa Laval műhelyt bízzon meg.
20
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
21
P646
Словарь перевда
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Деталь № Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty Кол—во Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Наименование Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Примечания Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type Машина тнпа Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Артикул № Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Наименование блока Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
машины macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Блок машины № Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Наименование группы Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Группа № Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page См. страницу Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Ссылка на зскиз Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name Наименование артикула Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates Замена требует La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl балансировки барабана la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts См. отдельный перечень Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list запасных частей parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Не поставлена вместе с Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part запасными частями ricambio de recambio
22
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
翻译列表、
zh
Part no. Λριθμός ανταλλακτικού Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer 部件号
Qty Σύνολο Hoeveelheid Antal 数量
Description Περιγραφή Beschrijving Betegnelse 说明
Notes Παρατηρήσεις Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger 注释
Machine type Τύπος μηχανήματος Machinetype Maskintype 机器类型
Product no. Αριθμός προϊόντος Produktnr. Produktnr. 产品编号
Machine unit description Περιγραφή Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse 机器说明

συγκροτήματος μηχανής
Machine unit no. Αριθμός συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr. 机器部件号

μηχανής
Subassembly description Περιγραφή Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse 子装置说明

υποσυγκροτήματος
Subassembly no. Αριθμός Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr. 子装置编号

See page Βλέπε σελίδα Zie blz. Se side 请参阅页
Fig. ref. Παραπομπή σε εικόνα Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning 图片参考
Product name Ονομασία προϊόντος Produktnaam Produktnavn 产品名
Exchange necessitates Ανταλλαγή απαιτεί Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever 更换前应校准转鼓平衡

rebalancing of bowl επαναρρύθμιση herbalanceren van de afbalcering af kuglen
ισορροπίας του τύμπανου kogel
See separate spare parts Βλέπε ειδική λίστα Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reservedelsliste 参见备件清单
list ανταλλακτικών de kogel
Not delivered as spare ∆εν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som 未作为备件提供
part ανταλλακτικό reserveonderdeel reservedel
23
P646
Fordítási lista
hu
Part no. Cikkszám
Qty Menny.
Description Leírás
Notes Megjegyzés
Machine type Gép típusa
Product no. Termékszám
Machine unit description Gépegység leírása
Machine unit no. Gépegység száma
Subassembly description Részegység leírása
Subassembly no. Részegység száma
See page Lásd a következő oldalt:
Fig. ref. Ábra. ref.
Product name Termék neve
Exchange necessitates Csere esetén a dobot ki

rebalancing of bowl kell egyensúlyozni.
See separate spare parts Lásd a külön

list pótalkatrészjegyzéket.
Not delivered as spare Nem szállítjuk

part pótalkatrészként.
24
25
P646
2 Machine bottom part

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
9026944-
Ref Part No Description -01 Notes
Quantity
1 599537 80 frame bottom part 1
1A 592947 01 Frame bottom part 1
1B 596726 01 Solid plug square 2
2 560131 02 Frame support 4
3 70490 Washer 4
4 2210462 32 Screw 4
5 552766 09 Washer 2
6 526350 06 Plug 2
7 593612 01 Sight glass 1
8 586732 01 Bottom bearing holder 1
9 589704 01 Pipe 1
10 221706 03 Screw 1
11 2234121 38 O-ring 1
12 562091 01 Strainer 1
13 2234121 40 O-ring 1
14 223412 24 O-ring 1
15 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1
16 599934 01 Labyrinth ring holder 1
17 221716 23 Screw 4
18 9024292 80 Driving device vertical 1 See page 28
19 221721 25 Screw 3
20 561950 80 Neck bearing cover 1
20A 221711 18 Screw 1
21 223412 48 O-ring 1
22 566788 01 Seal ring 2
23 565056 04 Deflector ring 1 Brass
23 598744 01 Deflector ring 1 Brass
24 223406 29 O-ring 2
25 560202 01 Pipe 1
26 223404 20 O-ring 1
27 539418 02 Elbow 1
28 526352 06 Bushing 1
29 564591 02 Operating water cover 1
30 566788 06 Seal ring 1
31 223412 48 O-ring 1
32 41456 Washer 3
33 221040 46 Screw 3
34 221040 08 Screw 2
36 17812 Screw 2
37 221716 23 Screw 1
38 561773 03 Plug 1
38 561773 07 Plug 1
39 74067 O-ring 1
40 221716 23 Screw 1
41 579885 01 Front casing 1
42 9007509 01 Captive screw 4
43 532333 03 Clamp 1
44 223101 94 Washer 1
45 221126 04 Screw 1
47 9007510 01 Low Nut 4
26
2 Machine bottom part
33
30
32
34 29
31
26
24
25 23
28 22
20
27
20A 21
19
18
17
16
14
15
9
13
10
11
12
39 38
40
4 41
37
3 45 42
43
44
7
5
6
47
1;1A 2
1B 36
2631K
27
P646
2.1 Driving device vertical

9024292-
Quantity
1 561977 01 Bowl spindle 1
2 548747 10 Single row ball bearing 1
3 9026739 01 Bearing seat 1
5 562109 03 Helical spring 3
6 9024293 02 Top bearing housing 1
7 9024284 80 Rubber buffer 1
8 9024283 01 Lid 1
9 9024239 01 Screw 6
10 9024282 01 Lid 1
11 9024239 01 Screw 6
12 564149 01 Spindle pulley 1
13 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1
14 586513 01 Oil mist generator 1
15 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 2
16 580042 01 Air deflector 1
17 221716 22 Screw 3
18 565057 02 Fan 1
19 223406 29 O-ring 2
99 9000794 01 Bearing Grease 1
28
2.1 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
19
18
2
11
10
9
8
7
3
5
17
16
12
13
14
15
2275G
29
P646
3 Separator bowl
9020188-
Quantity
1 597752 80 Bowl body 1
1A 560637 01 Guide lug 1
1B 68564 Cylindrical pin 1
2 560638 05 Rectangular ring 1
3 561831 01 Operating slide 1
4 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1
5 565308 01 Valve plug 3
6 597777 05 Guide ring 1
8 223403 63 O-ring 1
9 576397 01 Holder 1
10 576279 01 Lock washer 6
11 576173 05 Hexagon head screw 6
12 68011 O-ring 1
13 579464 02 Operating water ring 1
14 566788 16 Seal ring 1
15 576173 05 Hexagon head screw 6
16 546095 77 O-ring 1
17 574233 01 Discharge slide 1
19 561897 01 Nut 1
20 561724 01 Cap nut 1
21 9021028 80 Distributor 1
22 9017249 80 Bowl disc complete 95
23 9017249 80 Bowl disc complete 2 Delivered loose
25 9017249 01 Bowl disc 1 Delivered loose
26 9020189 80 Top disc 1
27 9021334 03 Gravity disc Ø 99,5 mm 1
28 9021334 80 Set of gravity discs 1 Delivered loose
28A 9021334 01 Gravity disc, Ø 55 mm 1
28B 9021334 02 Gravity disc, Ø 107,1 mm 1
28C 9021334 03 Gravity disc Ø 99,5 mm 1
28D 9021334 04 Gravity disc, Ø 93,3 mm 1
28E 9021334 05 Gravity disc, Ø 88, 3 mm 1
28F 9021334 06 Gravity disc, Ø 84,3 mm 1
28G 9021334 07 Gravity disc, Ø 81,1 mm 1
28H 9021334 08 Gravity disc, Ø 78,6 mm 1
28I 9021334 09 Gravity disc, Ø 76,6 mm 1
28J 9021334 10 Gravity disc, Ø 75,1 mm 1
28K 9021334 11 Gravity disc, Ø 73,9 mm 1
28L 9021334 12 Gravity disc, Ø 73,0 mm 1
28M 9021334 13 Gravity disc, Ø 72,3 mm 1
28N 9021334 14 Gravity disc, Ø 71,8 mm 1
29 9021334 01 Gravity disc, Ø 55 mm 1 Delivered loose
30 223406 36 O-ring 1
31 223406 41 O-ring 1
32 223406 17 O-ring 1
33 9021018 01 Bowl hood 1
34 564406 01 Seal ring 1
34 9033047 01 Seal ring 1 High resistance material. Only as Spare
part
35 546198 15 O-ring 1
36 561876 80 Lock ring 1
36A 560637 01 Guide lug 1
30
3 Separator bowl
2926N
31
P646
4 Inlet and outlet device

9021384-
Quantity
1 9021385 80 In & oulet pipe paring pl 1
2 563317 01 Splash sealing 1
3 566022 02 Support ring 1
4 561957 01 Height adjusting ring 3
5 9021410 80 Frame hood 1
5A 9028336 01 Frame hood 1
5B 221716 09 Screw 1
6 221036 27 Screw 4
7 223406 30 O-ring 2
8 223406 20 O-ring 2
9 9022426 80 Connecting housing 1
9A 260149 32 Thread insert 2
10 561962 01 Washer 1
11 562343 02 Round nut 1
12 260190 05 O-ring 1
13 223101 61 Washer 6
14 221041 01 Screw 6
32
4 Inlet and outlet device
11
10
6
5B
14
13
5, 5A
12
1
2052Z
33
P646
5 Belt driving device, 50 Hz

599546-
Quantity
1 599566 01 Motor adapter plate 1
2 9003965 01 Stud bolt 4
3 223101 49 Washer 13x24x2,5 8
4 221803 33 Nut, M12 8
5 598717 01 Guard 1
6 67141 Screw 2
7 599547 80 Centrifugal clutch, 50 Hz 1 See page 36
8 562523 01 Washer 1
9 66727 Spring washer 1
10 2210462 45 Screw, M16x45 1
11 9018935 01 Washer 4
12 9007623 01 Low nut 4
13 221045 47 Screw 2
14 221803 33 Nut, M12 2
15 599794 01 Flat belt 50 Hz 1
16 598772 01 Belt cover 1
17 70560 Washer 4
34
1
4 3
14 11 2
3
4
13
11
6
5
15
8
9
10
16
2678A
18
17
12
35
P646
5.1 Centrifugal clutch, 50 Hz

599547-
Quantity
1 564590 02 Motor belt pulley 1
2 548051 49 Ball bearing 2
3 547833 01 Spacing ring 1
4 66251 Snap ring 1
5 599548 80 Coupling hub, 50 Hz 1
5A 599553 01 Coupling hub 1
5B 549552 02 Parallel pin 5
6 223641 18 Snap ring 1
7 564557 80 Friction block 5
8 549325 01 Cover 1
9 223641 20 Snap ring 1
36
5.1 Centrifugal clutch, 50 Hz 5 Belt driving device, 50 Hz
6
4
2
3
2
5A
5
5B
7
9
2041E
37
P646

599550-
Quantity
1 599566 01 Motor adapter plate 1
2 9003965 01 Stud bolt 4
3 223101 49 Washer 13x24x2,5 8
4 221803 33 Nut, M12 8
5 598717 01 Guard 1
6 67141 Screw 2
7 599551 80 Centrifugal clutch, 60 Hz 1 See page 40
8 562523 01 Washer 1
9 66727 Spring washer 1
10 2210462 45 Screw, M16x45 1
11 9018935 01 Washer 4
12 9007623 01 Low nut 4
13 221045 47 Screw 2
14 221803 33 Nut, M12 2
15 599976 01 Flat belt, 60Hz 1
16 598772 01 Belt cover 1
17 70560 Washer 4
38
1
4 3
14 11 2
3
4
13
11
6
5
15
8
9
10
16
2678A
18
17
12
39
P646
6.1 Centrifugal clutch, 60 Hz

599551-
Quantity
1 564589 02 Motor belt pulley, 60 Hz 1
3 547833 01 Spacing ring 1
4 66251 Snap ring 1
5 599552 80 Coupling hub, 60 Hz 1
5A 549552 02 Parallel pin 3
6 223641 18 Snap ring 1
7 564557 80 Friction block 3
8 549325 01 Cover 1
9 223641 20 Snap ring 1
40
6.1 Centrifugal clutch, 60 Hz 6 Belt driving device, 60 Hz
6
4
2
3
2
5
5A
9
2041D
41
P646
7 Set of plates
9002941-
Quantity
1 557714 01 Machine plate 1
2 66169 Drive screw 4
3 1270019 Set of safety labels 1
4 577802 01 Name sign 1 For GL approval, see order
4 577803 01 Name sign 1
4 591263 01 Name sign 1 DNV approval, see order
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz 1
6 553272 01 Label 60 Hz 1
7 555529 01 Plate with arrow 1
8 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
9 554214 02 Cable tie 1
12 9025110 Separator checkpoints 1
42
7 Set of plates
1 2,5,11 3
! WARNING
Read the instruction

manuals before
installation, operation If excessive vibration
and maintenance. occurs, stop separator Separator must stop
and keep bowl filled rotating before any
Failure to strictly with liquid during dismantling work is
Information heading Information text follow instructions Out of balance
rundown.
can lead to fatal vibration will become
Information heading Information text worse if bowl is not
Information heading Information text 1270018-02-V9
Information heading Information text

Information heading Information text 4
Information text
Made by Alfa Laval Tumba AB,

Tumba, Sweden
Services enquires www.alfalaval.com
6 8 9
50 Hz
60 Hz GB
1.
FR
2.
Read instruction manual before lifting. Lire le manuel d´instructions avant le
DE SE
Vor dem Heben immer erst Anleitungen im Hand- Läs instruktionsboken före lyft.
buch lesen!
7 IT
Leggere il manuale d'istruzione prima di

sollevare.
NL
Lees voor het tillen eerst de
ES PT
Lea el manual de instrucciones antes de Leia o manual de instruções antes de qualquer

operação de elevação.
RU JP
Читайте инструкцию перед ちげるにをおみさ
FI GR
Lue käyttöohjeet ennen nostamista. Διαβάστε το εγχειρίδιο με τις οδηγίες προτού
βγάλετε τη συσκευή από το κιβώτιο.
DK
CH
Læs instruktionsmanualen, inden der

Art. No. 1270001 Rev. 5
12 NOTE! This information does not exclude the importance of

following the instructions in the Service Manual and Service bulletines! P- SEPARATOR CHECKPOINTS
Before start-up Height adjusting rings Support ring Check for erosion damages. Replace parts if
If the separator is out of Always contact your Alfa Laval
If the separator has been out of operation for: operation for more than Guide screw representative if you suspect that the erosion is suspected.
1 month: depth of the corrosion damage Contact your Alfa Laval representative if you
3 months or longer suspect that the depth of the damage exceeds
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and
Pre-lubricate the spindle bearings. - Lift out the bowl. 0,2 mm bowl body, bowl hood. (0,5 mm for
bowl hood (0,5 for other parts) or if
A cracks have been found. other parts).
6 months or longer
Perform an Inspection service - Protect the spindle taper from
and make sure to pre-lubricate corrosion by lubricating it with Also Check for cracks. It is particulary
the spindle bearings. oil. important to inspect for cracks on
Frame hood
Change the oil before starting. Bowl hood rotating parts and especially between
- Keep the separator and bowl the discharge holes in the bowl wall.
18 months or longer well stored, dry and protected
Perform an Overhaul service from mechanical damage. Do not continue to use the separator
and make sure to pre-lubricate until it has been inspected and given
the spindle bearings. Measure the distance “A”. Add or remove height adjusting rings clearance for operation by Alfa Laval.
Change the oil before starting. to achieve correct measurement.
After service always run the separator continuously

for at least 5 hours to ensure proper lubrication.
Paring disc height = Molykote
Corrosion / Cracks
Erosion
Check the disc stack pressure
Note: Only use clean discs at assembly! Bowl hood
The disc stack must always be compressed with
correct compression force stated in the manual.
Disc stack which is compressed with torque level Lubricate

outside recommendations stated in the manual might bowl parts
result in damaged parts or instability when Bowl body
Disc stack
operating the separator.
pressure
For correct disc stack pressure see manual!
Discharge slide
NOTE! The number of discs stated in the SPC is a
Do NOT unscrew
nominal value that might vary. motor stud bolts
Operating slide
Screw
Operating
Clean spindle Holder Operating water ring Nut
device and
assembly and
nozzles NOTE! Replace screws and washers for holder with
check direction new ones included in IS-kit. Replace screws (IS-kit) for
arrow on belt operating water ring.
Tighten with correct torque: = 30 Nm + 2
Check the manual for correct torque Clutch coupling
for the oil pump, or oil mist generator,
at assembly. Bowl spindle cone Friction blocks Clean the nozzle on the operating slide using a soft
Check that the hole, or nozzles, at the Bowl body nave iron wire or a similar object.
bottom of the vertical driving device is Change oil
clean before lowering the assembly.
Mounting tool Press the ball bearings down
If the blocks are worn; one at a time into the
Check the oil level. Top up when necessary.
Check for impact marks and coupling hub, preferably
corrosion on bowl body nave and 1. Clean the inside of the belt pulley. using a hydraulic press.
Position the flat belt so that the Do not overfill!
spindle assembly can pass spindle bore. 2. Fit new friction blocks. Make sure that Place the spacing ring
through when lowering. Remedy as follows; Make sure that correct oil type is being used! it is mounted as illustrated. between them.
All friction blocks should be replaced Never re-fit used ball
1. Remove any impact marks using Always follow the instructions in the bearings.
Check the direction arrows on at the same time.
a scraper and/or a whetstone. Separator Manual and make sure that
the belt and the machine plate When handling friction
the oil bath is free from deposits. The ball bearings must not
for correct position. blocks wear a dust mask
2. Remove rust using a fine-grin be heated as they are
emery cloth (e.g. No.320). to make sure not to packed with grease and
Make sure that the belt does inhalate dust.
not get smudged with oil or sealed with plastic
grease during handling. 3. Finish with polishing paper membranes.
(e.g. Number 600). Do not use compressed
air for removal of any
Never use Molykote on any dust. Remove dust by Approved / Date: Departement: Revision: Document No.
part on the spindle assembly. vacuum or wet cloth. TEN /2016-11-18 BCDTD 1 9025109
2161E
43
P646
8 Commissioning kit
576452-
Quantity
1 260104 22 O-ring 4 Oil pipe/ Connecting housing
2 223404 51 O-ring 2 Water pipe/ Connecting housing
3 223406 20 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Connecting housing
4 223406 30 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Connecting housing
5 563317 01 Splash sealing 1 Inlet and outlet pipe
99 576498 Exploded view 1
44
8 Commissioning kit
2635C
45
P646
9 Monitoring kit, for speed

566718-
Quantity
1 562902 81 Sensor with support 1
3 552870 41 Tube gland, angle 90 degr 1
5 556416 14 Protective tube 1
6 566692 80 Junction box 1
46
9 Monitoring kit, for speed
1
3
5
6
1904E
47
P646
10 Monitoring kit, for vibration

9026213-
Quantity
1 570142 01 Inductive analogue sensor 1
2 561773 04 Sensor holder 1 Stainless steel
2 561773 08 Sensor holder 1 Brass
3 552870 21 Tube gland, straight 1
4 556416 18 Protective tube 1
5 9026164 02 Sleeve 2
6 9024255 01 Sensor arm 1
7 221711 39 Hexagon socket head screw 2
48
10 Monitoring kit, for vibration
3
5
2
1768B
49
P646
11 Set of tool
561614-
Quantity
1 9007012 80 Fan mounting tool 1 Fan
2 561584 81 Puller 1 Bowl body
3 565679 80 Lifting tool 1 Distributor/ Bowl spindle
4 562246 02 Spanner for nut 1 Nut/ Discharge slide
5 562239 80 Puller 1 Spindle pulley/ Neck bearing
5A 561829 02 Screw 1
6 574564 80 Tool for coupling 1 Motor/ Coupling
6A 574565 01 Screw 1
6B 574566 01 Nut 1
6C 573558 01 Plug 1
6D 223404 20 O-ring 1
7 589776 01 Key 1 Bottom bearing housing
8 561439 01 Drift 1 Bottom bearing
9 575135 81 Compressing tool 1 Disc stack
9A 575135 80 Compressing tool 1
9B 556465 01 Label 1
9C 575139 02 Clamp 3
9D 575098 01 Screw 3
9E 221045 52 Screw 3
9F 223101 49 Washer 13x24x2,5 3
9G 561551 01 Screw 3
10 563084 80 Puller 2 Neck bearing cover
10A 221040 05 Screw 1
10B 221035 46 Screw 1
11 260154 01 Lifting eye bolt 2
12 561607 81 Puller 1 Discharge slide
12A 562249 01 Support ring 1
12B 221040 43 Screw 1
13 221706 05 Screw 6 Lock ring/ Bowl body
14 548043 01 Mounting tool 1 Coupling bearing
15 527395 11 Hook spanner 1 Nut/ Inlet and outlet pipe
16 565673 01 Pin 1 Distributor
17 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 Lock ring/ Bowl body
18 566441 01 Sleeve 1 Neck bearing
19 566606 01 Chisel 1 Seal ring
20 585810 01 Crowfoot wrench head 1 Oil pump
99 588054 Exploded view 1
50
11 Set of tool
1 2 3
4 5 A 6 D C
B
A
7 8 9
EF A
D
B G
C
10 11 12 B
A B
13 14 15
16 17 18
19 20
2043S
51
P646
12 Inspection kit
9023605-
Quantity
1 560638 05 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/Operating slide
2 560638 05 Rectangular ring 1 Operating slide/Holder
3 565308 01 Valve plug 3 Operating slide/Bowl body
4 68011 O-ring 1 Bowl body/Operating water ring
5 546095 77 O-ring 1 Bowl body/Discharge slide
6 565295 02 Rectangular ring 1 Discharge slide/Bowl body
7 564406 01 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood/Discharge slide
8 546198 15 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/Bowl body
10 223406 30 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipe/connecting housing
11 223406 20 O-ring 2 Inlet an outlet pipe/Connecting housing
12 260190 05 O-ring 1 Frame hood/Frame bottom part
13 552766 09 Washer 2 Frame bottom part/ Plug
15 537086 06 Molykote G-n plus 1
16 569415 03 Lube grease Food H1 1
17 221706 05 Screw 6 Lock ring/Bowl body
18 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 Lock ring/Bowl body
20 563317 01 Splash sealing 1 Inlet pipe
21 566788 16 Seal ring 1 Operating Water Ring
22 223403 63 O-ring 1 Bowl Body/Holder
24 260104 22 O-ring 4 Oil pipe/Connecting housing
26 576279 01 Lock washer 6 Bowl body/Holder
27 576173 05 Hexagon head screw 12 Bowl body/Holder + Operating water ring
28 223406 36 O-ring 1
29 223406 41 O-ring 1
30 223406 17 O-ring 1
98 9025110 Separator checkpoints 1
99 9024643 Exploded view: Inspectio 1
52
12 Inspection kit
13
13
18
30
29
28
21
17
7
8
1
3
2
6
27
22
4
5
26
27
12
10
20
11
24
2677D
53
P646
13 Overhaul kit
9026133-
Ref Part No Description -05 -06 Notes
Quantity
50 Hz ↓
60 Hz ↓
1 9023605 02 Inspection kit 1 1 See page 52
2 2234121 38 O-ring 1 1 Strainer/Bottom bearing housing
3 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1 Bottom bearing housing/Frame bottom
part
4 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/Spindle pulley
5 223412 24 O-ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/Frame bottom part
6 223412 48 O-ring 1 1 Neck bearing cover/Frame bottom part
7 566788 01 Seal ring 2 2 Neck bearing cover/Deflector ring
8 223406 29 O-ring 2 2 Deflector ring/Bowl spindle
9 223404 20 O-ring 1 1 Pipe/Operating water cover
11 74067 O-ring 1 1 Plug/Frame bottom part
12 566788 06 Seal ring 1 1 Bowl spindle/Operating water cover
13 548747 10 Single row ball bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle/Top bearing seat
15 562109 03 Helical spring 3 3 Top bearing seat/Top bering housing
16 9024284 80 Rubber buffer 1 1 Lids/Top bearing housing/Bearing seat
17 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1 1 Top bearing seat/Plug
19 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1 1 Operating slide
20 597777 05 Guide ring 1 1 Bowl body/operating slide
22 548051 49 Ball bearing 2 2 Coupling hub/Motor belt pulley
23 66251 Snap ring 1 1 Motor belt pulley/Ball bearing
24 223641 18 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/Ball bearing
25 564557 80 Friction block 5 3 Coupling hub/Motor belt pulley
26 223641 20 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/Cover
27 66727 Spring washer 1 1 Motor shaft/Screw
28 599794 01 Flat belt 50 Hz 1 Motor belt pulley/Spindle pulley
28 599976 01 Flat belt, 60Hz 1 Motor belt pulley/Spindle pulley
29 596723 02 Locking liquid Low 1 1 Bottom bearing holder
30 223406 29 O-ring 2 2 Bowl spindle/Fan
31 223412 48 O-ring 1 1 Frame bottom part/Operating water
cover
32 596718 02 Locking liquid Medium 1 1 Screws
99 9027257 Exploded view 1 1
54
13 Overhaul kit
22
22
26
24
23
25
27
28
20
19
16
15
13
30
17
31
12
11
6
2
3
4
5
8
7
2511L
9
55
P646
14 Lifting tool
SEPARATOR

563453-
Quantity
2 563454 01 Lug 4
3 221035 53 Screw 4
5 27345 Nut, M8 4
6 260236 03 Shackle 2
7 556465 01 Label 1
56
14 Lifting tool
7
6
5
1686E
57
P646
15 Support kit
9023617-
Quantity
1 221040 46 Screw 3 Operating water cover
2 41456 Washer 3 Operating water cover
3 565056 04 Deflector ring 1 Bowl spindle, Brass
3 598744 01 Deflector ring 1 Bowl spindle, Stainless steel
4 221721 25 Screw 3 Top bearing h./Frame b. part
5 221716 23 Screw 4 Labyrinth ring holder / Frame bottom part
6 221716 22 Screw 3 Top bearing seat / Air deflector
7 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 2 Oil pump
8 526350 06 Plug 2 Frame bottom part - oil drainage / refill
9 561876 80 Lock ring 1 Bowl body/Bowl hood
9A 560637 01 Guide lug 1
10 562343 02 Round nut 1 Inlet pipe/Connecting housing
12 221036 27 Screw 4 Frame hood/Height adjust. ring
16 2210462 32 Screw 4 Frame bottom part / Frame support
17 70490 Washer 4 Frame bottom part / Frame support
18 560131 02 Frame support 4 Frame bottom part
19 589704 01 Pipe 1 bottom bearing holder
20 221706 03 Screw 1 bottom bearing holder/pipe
21 561962 01 Washer 1 in-and outlet pipe/connecting housing
22 593612 01 Sight glass 1 Frame bottom part
99 9024591 Exploded view: Support ki 1
58
15 Support kit
9, 9A
21
10
12
7
6
5
1
2
20
19
18
4
17
2677C
16
22
8
59
P646
16 Hydraulic tool kit

574986-
Quantity
1 574618 80 Hydraulic components 1 See page 62
2 574626 81 Hydraulic tool 1 For coupling
See page 64
60
16 Hydraulic tool kit
2
1
2047D
61
P646
16.1 Hydraulic components

574618-
Quantity
1 574618 01 Pump with hose 1
2 574618 02 Hydraulic cylinder 1
62
16.1 Hydraulic components 16 Hydraulic tool kit
2
2050A
63
P646
16.2 Hydraulic tool
For coupling

574626-
Quantity
1 571624 01 Stud bolt 1
2 574627 02 Sleeve 1
3 571626 01 Holder 1
4 221803 35 Nut, M20 1
5 574954 01 Sleeve 1
6 571620 01 Plate 1
7 571622 01 Screw 3
64
16.2 Hydraulic tool 16 Hydraulic tool kit
2047A
65
P646
17 Motor service kit

9008869-
Quantity
3 9008869 01 Fan 1
4 570844 02 Springwasher 1
5 528929 18 V-ring 2
66
17 Motor service kit
0782E
67
18 Cross reference list
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1270001 42 8 223404 20 54 9 537086 06 52 15
1270019 42 3 223404 51 44 2 539418 02 26 27
17812 26 36 223406 17 30 32 545869 03 54 19
221035 46 50 10B 223406 17 52 30 545869 03 58 7
221035 53 56 3 223406 20 32 8 545869 03 28 15
221036 27 32 6 223406 20 44 3 545869 03 30 4
221036 27 58 12 223406 20 52 11 546095 77 52 5
221040 05 50 10A 223406 29 26 24 546095 77 30 16
221040 08 26 34 223406 29 54 8 546198 15 30 35
221040 43 50 12B 223406 29 54 30 546198 15 52 8
221040 46 58 1 223406 29 28 19 547833 01 36 3
221040 46 26 33 223406 30 32 7 547833 01 40 3
221041 01 32 14 223406 30 44 4 548043 01 50 14
221045 47 34 13 223406 30 52 10 548051 49 36 2
221045 47 38 13 223406 36 30 30 548051 49 40 2
221045 52 50 9E 223406 36 52 28 548051 49 54 22
2210462 32 58 16 223406 41 30 31 548051 82 66 1
2210462 32 26 4 223406 41 52 29 548051 87 66 2
2210462 45 34 10 223412 24 26 14 548744 03 54 17
2210462 45 38 10 223412 24 54 5 548744 03 28 13
221126 04 26 45 223412 48 26 21 548747 10 54 13
221706 03 26 10 223412 48 54 6 548747 10 28 2
221706 03 58 20 223412 48 54 31 549325 01 36 8
221706 05 50 13 223412 48 26 31 549325 01 40 8
221706 05 52 17 2234121 38 26 11 549552 02 36 5B
221711 18 26 20A 2234121 38 54 2 549552 02 40 5A
221711 39 48 7 2234121 40 26 13 552766 09 52 13
221716 09 32 5B 2234121 40 54 3 552766 09 26 5
221716 22 58 6 223641 18 36 6 552870 21 48 3
221716 22 28 17 223641 18 40 6 552870 41 46 3
221716 23 26 17 223641 18 54 24 553171 01 42 6
221716 23 58 5 223641 20 36 9 553272 01 42 6
221716 23 26 37 223641 20 40 9 554214 02 42 9
221716 23 26 40 223641 20 54 26 555529 01 42 7
221721 25 26 19 260104 22 44 1 556416 14 46 5
221721 25 58 4 260104 22 52 24 556416 18 48 4
221803 33 34 4 260149 32 32 9A 556465 01 50 9B
221803 33 34 14 260154 01 50 11 556465 01 56 7
221803 33 38 4 260190 05 32 12 557714 01 42 1
221803 33 38 14 260190 05 52 12 560131 02 58 18
221803 35 64 4 260236 03 56 6 560131 02 26 2
223101 49 34 3 27345 56 5 560202 01 26 25
223101 49 38 3 41456 58 2 560637 01 30 36A
223101 49 50 9F 41456 26 32 560637 01 58 9A
223101 61 32 13 526350 06 58 8 560637 01 30 1A
223101 94 26 44 526350 06 26 6 560638 05 52 1
223403 63 52 22 526352 06 26 28 560638 05 52 2
223403 63 30 8 527395 11 50 15 560638 05 30 2
223404 20 50 6D 528929 18 66 5 560638 05 30 7
223404 20 26 26 532333 03 26 43 561439 01 50 8
68
P646
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
561551 01 50 9G 565308 01 52 3 586732 01 26 8

561584 81 50 2 565308 01 30 5 588054 50 99
561607 81 50 12 565673 01 50 16 589704 01 26 9
561724 01 30 20 565679 80 50 3 589704 01 58 19
561773 03 26 38 566022 02 32 3 589776 01 50 7
561773 04 48 2 566441 01 50 18 591263 01 42 4
561773 07 26 38 566606 01 50 19 592947 01 26 1A
561773 08 48 2 566692 80 46 6 593612 01 58 22
561829 02 50 5A 566788 01 26 22 593612 01 26 7
561831 01 30 3 566788 01 54 7 596718 02 54 32
561876 80 30 36 566788 06 54 12 596723 02 54 29
561876 80 58 9 566788 06 26 30 596726 01 26 1B
561897 01 30 19 566788 16 52 21 597752 80 30 1
561950 80 26 20 566788 16 30 14 597777 05 54 20
561957 01 32 4 569415 03 52 16 597777 05 30 6
561962 01 32 10 570142 01 48 1 598717 01 34 5
561962 01 58 21 570844 02 66 4 598717 01 38 5
561977 01 28 1 571620 01 64 6 598744 01 26 23
562091 01 26 12 571622 01 64 7 598744 01 58 3
562095 02 26 15 571624 01 64 1 598772 01 34 16
562095 02 54 4 571626 01 64 3 598772 01 38 16
562109 03 54 15 573558 01 50 6C 599537 80 26 1
562109 03 28 5 574233 01 30 17 599547 80 34 7
562239 80 50 5 574564 80 50 6 599548 80 36 5
562246 02 50 4 574565 01 50 6A 599551 80 38 7
562249 01 50 12A 574566 01 50 6B 599552 80 40 5
562343 02 32 11 574618 01 62 1 599553 01 36 5A
562343 02 58 10 574618 02 62 2 599566 01 34 1
562523 01 34 8 574618 80 60 1 599566 01 38 1
562523 01 38 8 574626 81 60 2 599794 01 34 15
562902 81 46 1 574627 02 64 2 599794 01 54 28
563084 80 50 10 574954 01 64 5 599934 01 26 16
563317 01 32 2 575098 01 50 9D 599976 01 38 15
563317 01 44 5 575135 80 50 9A 599976 01 54 28
563317 01 52 20 575135 81 50 9 66169 42 2
563454 01 56 2 575139 02 50 9C 66169 42 5
564149 01 28 12 576173 05 52 27 66169 42 11
564406 01 30 34 576173 05 30 11 66251 36 4
564406 01 52 7 576173 05 30 15 66251 40 4
564557 80 36 7 576279 01 52 26 66251 54 23
564557 80 40 7 576279 01 30 10 66414 50 17
564557 80 54 25 576397 01 30 9 66414 52 18
564589 02 40 1 576498 44 99 66727 34 9
564590 02 36 1 577802 01 42 4 66727 38 9
564591 02 26 29 577803 01 42 4 66727 54 27
565056 04 26 23 579464 02 30 13 67141 34 6
565056 04 58 3 579885 01 26 41 67141 38 6
565057 02 28 18 580042 01 28 16 68011 52 4
565295 02 52 6 585810 01 50 20 68011 30 12
565295 02 30 18 586513 01 28 14 68564 30 1B
69
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
70490 58 17 9024283 01 28 8
70490 26 3 9024284 80 54 16
70560 34 17 9024284 80 28 7
70560 38 17 9024292 80 26 18
74067 54 11 9024293 02 28 6
74067 26 39 9024591 58 99
9000794 01 28 99 9024643 52 99
9003965 01 34 2 9025110 42 12
9003965 01 38 2 9025110 52 98
9007012 80 50 1 9026164 02 48 5
9007509 01 26 42 9026739 01 28 3
9007510 01 26 47 9027257 54 99
9007623 01 34 12 9028336 01 32 5A
9007623 01 38 12 9033047 01 30 34
9007627 01 34 18
9007627 01 38 18
9008869 01 66 3
9017249 01 30 25
9017249 80 30 22
9017249 80 30 23
9018935 01 34 11
9018935 01 38 11
9020189 80 30 26
9021018 01 30 33
9021028 80 30 21
9021334 01 30 29
9021334 01 30 28A
9021334 02 30 28B
9021334 03 30 28C
9021334 03 30 27
9021334 04 30 28D
9021334 05 30 28E
9021334 06 30 28F
9021334 07 30 28G
9021334 08 30 28H
9021334 09 30 28I
9021334 10 30 28J
9021334 11 30 28K
9021334 12 30 28L
9021334 13 30 28M
9021334 14 30 28N
9021334 80 30 28
9021385 80 32 1
9021410 80 32 5
9022426 80 32 9
9023605 02 54 1
9024239 01 28 9
9024239 01 28 11
9024255 01 48 6
9024282 01 28 10
70
.P 646 Flex system

Spare Parts Catalogue
Specification No. 881501-01-05/1 Config No. 117245

Book No. 9033722 02 Rev. 1 Product No. 881501 02 05
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de piéces de Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων
rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
Каталог запасных Reservedelskatalog
частеи
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2017-10-26

means without prior written permission of
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 10
2 Regulating valve with drive 14
3 Sludge outlet block 16

3.1 Sludge outlet 18
4 Feed supervision block 22

4.1 Pressure tansmitter 24
5 Regulating valve 26
6 3-way valve DN25 DIN 28
7 Flexible hose block 30

7.1 Flexible Hose Kit P646 32
8 Operating water valve Bl 36

8.1 Valve block water 38
8.2 Flexible connection kit 40
8.3 SV10A 44
9 Control Block 46
9.1 Control_Unit excl.Starter 48
10 Spare parts 58
11 Cross reference list 60
3
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer på maskinskylten innan du använder katalogen
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto
Фирменная табличка машины — указатель правилного номера запасной части
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi
La placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon
Η πινακίδα της μηχανής είναι ο οδηγός του σωστού ανταλλακτικού
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer
5
P 646 Flex system
zh 使用目录前，检查铭牌上的机器部件号。
A katalógus használatbavétele előtt ellenőrizze a gépegység számát az adattáblán.

hu
6
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator, som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten endast hos våra egna produkter.
Aus Rücksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualität sollten Sie

nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung für
das Versagen eines Separators übernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
Préservez la qualité de vos équipments en n‘employant que des

pièces de rechange Alfa Laval.
N'oubliez pas q'Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas
de panne d'un séparateur non équipé de pièces de rechange
d'origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la fiabilité de nos
produits.
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas

de repuesto Alfa Laval auténticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el
fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no
originales. Garantizamos la calidad y fiabilidad de nuestros
productos.
7
P 646 Flex system
Гарантируйте надежность качества всегда используя

подлинные запасные части фирмы Alfa Laval.
Запомните, что Alfa Laval не несет ответственности за
повреждение сепаратора, оснащенного неподлинными
запчастами. Мы гарантируем качестьо и надежность наших
изделий.
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualità facendo sempre uso

di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non può accettare
responsabilità per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti
di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualità l'affidabilità
dei nostri prodotti.
Proteja o seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre peças

sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Laval.
Não esqueça que Alfa Laval não aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com peças sobressalentes
não genuinas. Nós garantimos a qualidade e a confiança dos
nossos produtos.
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta käyttämällä aina alkuperäisiä

Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyväksyä vastuuta ei-alkuperäsillä
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja käyttövarmuuden.
Εξασφαλίοτε υψηλή ποιότητα χρησιμοποιώντας μόνο γνήσια

ανταλλακτικά της Alfa Laval.
Έχετε υπόψην ότι η Alfa Laval δεν αναλαμβάνει καμμιά ευθύνη
για βλάβες βουτυρομηχανής, οτην οποία έχουν εφαρμοστεί μή
γνήσια ανταλλακτικά. Εγγυόμαστε ποιότητα και καλή λειτουργία
μόνο για τα δικά μας προϊόντα.
8
Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik

uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse på, ved altid at
anvende ægte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan påtage sig noget ansvar for fejl
på en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed på vore egne produkter.
zh
请始终使用阿法拉伐真品备件以保证您产品的质量。
请注意，阿法拉伐对使用非原装备件的分离设备的故障不承担
责任。我们保证我们产品的质量与可靠性。
hu
Minőség iránti elkötelezettségének megfelelően mindig eredeti
Alfa Laval pótalkatrészeket használjon.
Az Alfa Laval nem vállal felelősséget a nem eredeti
pótalkatrészekkel felszerelt szeparátor meghibásodásáért. A
saját termékeink minőségét és megbízhatóságát garantáljuk.
9
P 646 Flex system
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
10
Словарь перевда
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Деталь № Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty Кол—во Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Наименование Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Примечания Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type Машина тнпа Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Артикул № Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Наименование блока Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
машины macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Блок машины № Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Наименование группы Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Группа № Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page См. страницу Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Ссылка на зскиз Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name Наименование артикула Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates Замена требует La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl балансировки барабана la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts См. отдельный перечень Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list запасных частей parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Не поставлена вместе с Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part запасными частями ricambio de recambio
11
P 646 Flex system
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
翻译列表、
zh
Part no. Λριθμός ανταλλακτικού Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer 部件号
Qty Σύνολο Hoeveelheid Antal 数量
Description Περιγραφή Beschrijving Betegnelse 说明
Notes Παρατηρήσεις Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger 注释
Machine type Τύπος μηχανήματος Machinetype Maskintype 机器类型
Product no. Αριθμός προϊόντος Produktnr. Produktnr. 产品编号
Machine unit description Περιγραφή Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse 机器说明

συγκροτήματος μηχανής
Machine unit no. Αριθμός συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr. 机器部件号

μηχανής
Subassembly description Περιγραφή Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse 子装置说明

Subassembly no. Αριθμός Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr. 子装置编号

See page Βλέπε σελίδα Zie blz. Se side 请参阅页
Fig. ref. Παραπομπή σε εικόνα Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning 图片参考
Product name Ονομασία προϊόντος Produktnaam Produktnavn 产品名
Exchange necessitates Ανταλλαγή απαιτεί Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever 更换前应校准转鼓平衡

rebalancing of bowl επαναρρύθμιση herbalanceren van de afbalcering af kuglen
ισορροπίας του τύμπανου kogel
See separate spare parts Βλέπε ειδική λίστα Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reservedelsliste 参见备件清单
list ανταλλακτικών de kogel
Not delivered as spare ∆εν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som 未作为备件提供
part ανταλλακτικό reserveonderdeel reservedel
12
Fordítási lista
hu
Part no. Cikkszám
Qty Menny.
Description Leírás
Notes Megjegyzés
Machine type Gép típusa
Product no. Termékszám
Machine unit description Gépegység leírása
Machine unit no. Gépegység száma
Subassembly description Részegység leírása
Subassembly no. Részegység száma
See page Lásd a következő oldalt:
Fig. ref. Ábra. ref.
Product name Termék neve
Exchange necessitates Csere esetén a dobot ki

rebalancing of bowl kell egyensúlyozni.
See separate spare parts Lásd a külön

list pótalkatrészjegyzéket.
Not delivered as spare Nem szállítjuk

part pótalkatrészként.
13
P 646 Flex system
2 Regulating valve with drive
DN 15

578787-
Quantity
1 578784 05 Regulating valve 1
2 578785 01 Valve drive 1
3 539436 01 Article number sign 1 Marked with article No for valve with
drive
14
2 Regulating valve with drive
2358F
15
P 646 Flex system
3 Sludge outlet block
* This is an internal number and cannot be ordered. Use numbers from the item list below when ordering.

9000351-
Ref Part No Description -AA* Notes
Quantity
1 599048 82 Sludge outlet 1 See page 18
2 1765908 07 Gasket 1
16
3 Sludge outlet block
2205U
17
P 646 Flex system
3.1 Sludge outlet

599048-
Quantity
1 582593 80 Sludge outlet 1 See page 20
2 561339 02 Gasket 1
3 221040 08 Screw 4
18
3.1 Sludge outlet 3 Sludge outlet block
2518D
19
P 646 Flex system
3.1.1 Sludge outlet

582593-
Quantity
3 1762017 07 Hose 1
4 1766096 01 Plug 1
20
3.1 Sludge outlet 3 Sludge outlet block
2209B
21
P 646 Flex system
4 Feed supervision block

9000152-
Quantity
2 582752 82 Pressure tansmitter 1 See page 24
3 597256 01 Temperature sensor 1
22
4 Feed supervision block
1 3
2 2
2518F
23
P 646 Flex system
4.1 Pressure tansmitter

582752-
Quantity
1 9015523 01 Pressure Transmitter 1 Range -1 to 5 bar
2 1763903 03 Needle valve 1
3 53551716 02 Washer 2
4 1765082 09 Nipple 1
24
4.1 Pressure tansmitter 4 Feed supervision block
2221T
25
P 646 Flex system
5 Regulating valve
1762570-
Quantity
02 1761731 80 Insert 1
26
5 Regulating valve
2221A
27
P 646 Flex system
6 3-way valve DN25 DIN

9001721-
Quantity
1 597909 01 3-Way Valve DN25 DIN 1
2 9018580 80 3-Way Solenoid Vavle 1
3 1763491 01 Nipple 1 G1/8-G1/4
Z 598018 80 Spare parts See page 58
28
6 3-way valve DN25 DIN
2519F
29
P 646 Flex system
7 Flexible hose block

9000428-
Quantity
1 9000188 43 Flexible Hose Kit P646 1 See page 32
30
7 Flexible hose block
2518L
31
P 646 Flex system
7.1 Flexible Hose Kit P646

9000188-
Quantity
1 9026282 80 Flexible Hose Kit P646 1
2 582476 12 Throttle washer block kit 1 See page 34
3 1760924 08 Sleeve 2
4 534240 01 Coupling nut 2
32
7.1 Flexible Hose Kit P646 7 Flexible hose block
2518O
33
P 646 Flex system
7.1.1 Throttle washer block kit

582476-
Quantity
1 1766811 18 Throttle washer 1
2 582542 01 Nipple 1
34
7.1 Flexible Hose Kit P646 7 Flexible hose block
2270Z
35
P 646 Flex system
8 Operating water valve Bl

9000340-
Quantity
1 598371 03 Valve block water 1 See page 38
2 598372 03 Flexible connection kit 1 See page 40
3 592550 80 SV10A 1 See page 44
4 571395 03 Elbow coupling G1/2 1
36
8 Operating water valve Bl
2518P
37
P 646 Flex system
8.1 Valve block water

598371-
Quantity
1 582496 80 Valve block water 1
2 1766037 09 Flow valve 15.0 l/min 1
3 1766037 02 Flow valve, 11.0 l/min 1
4 1766037 03 Flow valve, 2.8 l/min 1
38
8.1 Valve block water 8 Operating water valve Bl
2518R
39
P 646 Flex system
8.2 Flexible connection kit

598372-
Quantity
1 1767071 80 Non return valve kit 1 See page 42
3 1765936 02 Flexible connection wate 1
4 1765937 01 Flexible connection 1
40
8.2 Flexible connection kit 8 Operating water valve Bl
2518S
41
P 646 Flex system
8.2.1 Non return valve kit

1767071-
Quantity
1 1766162 01 Non return valve 1
2 1761834 09 Cu washer 1
42
8.2 Flexible connection kit 8 Operating water valve Bl
2099F
43
P 646 Flex system
8.3 SV10A
592550-
Quantity
1 591719 80 Actuator Kit 1 With SMC 5/2 way
4 1761834 09 Cu washer 2
5 53551320 06 Hose 1
44
8.3 SV10A 8 Operating water valve Bl
5
2270P
45
P 646 Flex system
9 Control Block

9006435-
Quantity
1 9000238 AA* Control_Unit excl.Starter 1 See page 48
3 581009 80 Emergency Stop 1
46
9 Control Block
2270H
47
P 646 Flex system
9.1 Control_Unit excl.Starter

9000238-
Quantity
1 581043 83 Control Cabinet 1 P 626/636
See page 50
3 581001 80 ESD kit 1
14 581044 80 Steam heater kit 1
15 581045 80 Speed sensor kit 1
17 581047 80 Extra I/O board kit 1
17A 580999 84 Extra I/O board 14-16/17-18 1 See page 54
22 9004096 80 Wall Mounting Kit 1 See page 56
48
9.1 Control_Unit excl.Starter 9 Control Block
Control_ Unit incl_starter
13a 13c 13d
13b
Control_ Unit excl_starter
2270B
49
P 646 Flex system
9.1.1 Control Cabinet

581043-
Quantity
1 581961 01 Enclosure box 1
2 580999 80 PLC standard kit 1 See page 52
3 580993 03 Transformer 1
4 589945 02 Circuit Breaker 4A 1
6 581803 30 Bussbar NSch 3
6.1 581803 25 Rail support 6
6.2 581803 31 DS to NSch 40
6.3 581803 32 BS M5x8 40
7 580989 05 Terminal 25
8 580994 01 Copper plait 1
9 597881 02 On-Off Switch 25A 1
10 580936 03 Communication Cable 1
11 581016 01 Fan 1
12 591480 32 Relay 1SPDT 24VAC/DC 1 K28
13 9015892 80 Circuit Breaker 1A kit 1 Q10
15.1 591480 32 Relay 1SPDT 24VAC/DC 3 K22, K25, K26
15.2 591480 31 Relay 1DPDT 24VAC/DC 1 K27
15.3 591480 34 Divisible shunt 10 pol 1 Cut to 3 pol(S2) and 4 pol(S1)
50
2202R
51
P 646 Flex system
9.1.2 PLC standard kit

580999-
Quantity
1 580986 01 Operator panel 1 4B1260.00-K07
2 580986 02 CPU 1 X20CP0292
3 580986 14 Supply module 1 X20PS9500
4 580986 26 Terminal block 1 0TB103.91
5 580986 04 6 Digital input 1 X20DI6371
6 580986 05 2 Relay output 1 X20DO2649
7 580986 06 6 Relay output 1 X20DO6529
8 580986 07 4 Relay output 1 X20DO4529
9 580986 08 4 Analogue input 1 X20AI4622
10 580986 09 2 Analogue input 1 X20AT2222
11 580986 17 Bus module 6 X20BM11
140 580986 16 Terminal block 12-pin 7 X20TB12
150 580986 03 Power supply 1 0AC524.9
160 580986 18 Bus module for CPU 1 X20BB22
52
2205O
53
P 646 Flex system
9.1.3 Extra I/O board 14-16/17-18

580999-
Quantity
1 580986 17 Bus module 2 X20BM11
2 580986 16 Terminal block 12-pin 2 X20TB12
3 580986 04 6 Digital input 1 X20DI6371
4 580986 06 6 Relay output 1 X20DO6529
54
2205P
55
P 646 Flex system
9.1.4 Wall Mounting Kit

9004096-
Quantity
2 9010269 01 Plug 6,3 mm 8
3 221031 21 Screw 8 Screw M6x16
4 223101 32 Washer 8 Washer M6
5 221803 28 Nut 8 Nut M6
6 9004092 01 Plug 4
56
2207C
57
P 646 Flex system
10 Spare parts
598018-
Quantity
1 598018 01 Gasket 1 SMC code: 00090/ A
2 598018 02 Stuffing box 1 SMC code: 01184
3 598018 03 Body gasket 1 SMC code: MD2119/GRAF
4 598018 04 O-Ring 1 SMC code: 04185
5 598018 05 O-Ring 1 SMC code: 01047
6 598018 06 O-Ring 1 SMC code: 01053
7 598018 07 Plug gasket 2 SMC code: MD2106-PK
8 598018 08 Flat gasket 1 SMC code: 23180
58
10 Spare parts
2519G
59
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1760924 08 32 3 580986 26 52 4
580989 05 50 7 9015523 01 24 1
1761731 80 26 02
580993 03 50 3 9015892 80 50 13
1761834 09 42 2
580994 01 50 8 9018580 80 28 2
1761834 09 44 4
580999 80 50 2 9026282 80 32 1
1762017 07 20 3
1763491 01 28 3 580999 84 48 17A
1763903 03 24 2 581001 80 48 3
1765082 09 24 4 581009 80 46 3
1765908 07 16 2 581016 01 50 11
1765936 02 40 3 581043 83 48 1
1765937 01 40 4 581044 80 48 14
1766037 02 38 3 581045 80 48 15
1766037 03 38 4 581047 80 48 17
1766037 09 38 2 581803 25 50 6.1
1766096 01 20 4 581803 30 50 6
1766162 01 42 1 581803 31 50 6.2
1766811 18 34 1 581803 32 50 6.3
1767071 80 40 1 581961 01 50 1
221031 21 56 3 582476 12 32 2
221040 08 18 3 582496 80 38 1
221803 28 56 5 582542 01 34 2
223101 32 56 4 582593 80 18 1
534240 01 32 4 582752 82 22 2
53551320 06 44 5 589945 02 50 4
53551716 02 24 3 591480 31 50 15.2
539436 01 14 3 591480 32 50 12
546229 04 34 3 591480 32 50 15.1
546229 35 32 7 591480 34 50 15.3
561339 02 18 2 591719 80 44 1
571395 03 36 4 592550 80 36 3
578784 05 14 1 597256 01 22 3
578785 01 14 2 597881 02 50 9
580936 03 50 10 597909 01 28 1
580986 01 52 1 598018 01 58 1
580986 02 52 2 598018 02 58 2
580986 03 52 150 598018 03 58 3
580986 04 52 5 598018 04 58 4
580986 04 54 3 598018 05 58 5
580986 05 52 6 598018 06 58 6
580986 06 52 7 598018 07 58 7
580986 06 54 4 598018 08 58 8
580986 07 52 8 598018 80 28 Z
580986 08 52 9 598371 03 36 1
580986 09 52 10 598372 03 36 2
580986 14 52 3 599048 82 16 1
580986 16 52 140 9000188 43 30 1
580986 16 54 2 9000238 AA* 46 1
580986 17 52 11 9004092 01 56 6
580986 17 54 1 9004096 80 48 22
580986 18 52 160 9010269 01 56 2
60
Component
Description
Heating System Kit

including Heatpac® CBM Brazed
plate heat exchanger
P 00 32 61 A
Product No. 583382-11 to 20
Printed Apr 2014

Book No. 9007143-02 V5

Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be gratefully
appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alfa Laval
company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel Equipment
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB Apr 2014.
Contents
1 Function Description ........................................................................................... 7

1.1 Application ........................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Design .................................................................................................................... 8
2 Operation..................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Start ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 10
2.3 Stop....................................................................................................................... 10
3 Fault Finding .......................................................................................................... 11
4 Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 13
4.1 General information ........................................................................................ 13
4.2 Manual Cleaning ............................................................................................... 14
4.3 Cleaning with CIP............................................................................................. 15
5 Technical Data ..................................................................................................... 17

5.1 Specification...................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Dimensions CBM 30......................................................................................... 18
5.3 Dimensions CBM 110 ...................................................................................... 19
6 Installation .............................................................................................................. 21
6.1 System Design .................................................................................................. 21
6.2 Heater Mounting .............................................................................................. 22
6.3 Installation of Ancillary Components ........................................................ 23
6.4 Installation Drawings...................................................................................... 24
6.4.1 Heatpac® CBM Heating Kit for Separator System ................................................ 24
6.4.2 Installation drawing, steam system ........................................................................ 25
6.4.3 Installation drawing, thermal oil/hot water system.................................................. 26
6.4.4 Heatpac® CBM connection kit for CIP unit............................................................. 27
7 Spare Parts ............................................................................................................. 29
8 Ancillary Equipment ......................................................................................... 31

8.1 Steam Regulating Valve ................................................................................ 31
8.1.1 Application ............................................................................................................. 31
8.1.2 Design .................................................................................................................... 31
8.1.3 Motor Drive Assembly ............................................................................................ 32
8.1.4 Valve....................................................................................................................... 33
8.1.5 Motor Drive ............................................................................................................. 34
8.1.6 Valve Options ......................................................................................................... 34
8.1.7 Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................................... 34
9007143-02
8.1.8 Technical Data ........................................................................................................36

8.1.9 Dimensions ............................................................................................................37
8.1.10 Installation...............................................................................................................39
8.1.11 Spare parts .............................................................................................................46
8.2 Safety Valve .......................................................................................................48
8.2.1 Application..............................................................................................................48
8.2.2 Design ....................................................................................................................48
8.2.3 Working Principle ...................................................................................................48
8.2.4 Technical Data ........................................................................................................49
8.2.5 Dimensions ............................................................................................................49
8.3 Steam Shut-off Valve ......................................................................................50
8.3.1 Technical Data ........................................................................................................50
8.4 Steam Trap .........................................................................................................52
8.4.1 Technical Data ......................................................................................................52
8.5 Vacuum Breaker ...............................................................................................53
8.5.1 Technical Data .....................................................................................................53
8.6 Inlet Strainer ......................................................................................................54
8.6.1 Technical Data .....................................................................................................54
9007143-02
Study instruction manuals and observe the warnings before

installation, operation, service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in serious accidents with
fatal injuries.
Not following the instructions can result in
serious accidents with fatal injuries.
P0 0 02 72 A
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have
been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations arising
from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter under
divider 1.
1 Function Description
1.1 Application
The heating system is primarily for heating of
mineral oils. The heating medium can be
steam, hot water or thermal oil.
The main components in the heating system
are supplied separately.
The heating system is suitable for both
separator systems and fuel conditioning
systems.
9007143-02 7
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1.2 Design
The heater consists of a number of corrugated
stainless steel plates brazed together to form a
plate pack. The pack is designed so that the
mineral oil flows through every second space
between the plates, and the heating medium
through every second space. Highly efficient heat
transfer is generated by allowing the two liquids
to flow in opposite directions.
P0 0 35 31 A
Heat transfer priciple
The heater has a manufacturing plate, which

can be found behind the cover plate between the
connection flanges. When contacting Alfa Laval,
please state the heater type and manufacturing
number. 2007
30
X0 24 6 22 B
1. Manufacturer, manufacturing year

2. Manufacturing serial number
3. Type designation
4. Part number
5. Connection description
6. Dessign pressure, maximum
7. Design temperature
8. Volume, litres
9. Approval
8 9007143-02
2 Operation
Operation of the Heatpac® CBM system will

depend on the actual heating system
configuration. Information regarding operation
is therefore mainly to be found in the relevant
instructions for the control equipment. General
start and stop procedures are described below.
2.1 Start
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
The heater must not be used without the insulated
protection cover. This shields the hot surfaces and
also acts as a safety cover in the unlikely event of
leakage.
1 Make sure that all valves in the oil line are

fully open.
2 Start the oil feed pump.
3 If necessary vent air from the heater through
the safety valve.
4 Start the heater controller.
5 Open the heating media supply and outlet
valves.
6 Check that the correct oil outlet temperature
is reached. If the right temperature is not
reached, see the Fault finding chapter.
9007143-02 9
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 2 OPERATION
2.2 Operation
The Heatpac® CBM does not require any

particular attention during normal operation.
However, regularly check the pressure indicators
(if installed) before and after the heater. The
pressure difference indicates the pressure drop
in the heater. If the pressure drop increases to
more than approx. 
0.5 – 1 bar, the heater is starting to clog and
needs to be cleaned, see Maintenance.
ON
CAUTI
P0 03 48 1 A
!
Pressure drop checking

Burn Hazard 1. Inlet pressure
To prevent pressure or heat shocks in the system, 2. Outlet pressure
adjustment of the flow rate must be carried out
slowly. The heater can otherwise be damaged.
2.3 Stop
1 Stop the heater controller.
2 Close the heating medium supply and outlet
valves.
3 Wait until the oil outlet temperature starts to
drop.
4 Stop the oil feed pump.
10 9007143-02
3 Fault Finding
Fault Probable cause Remedy

High pressure Deposits inside the heater. Clean the heater, see the maintenance chapter.
drop.
High temperature. Set-point changed in the control unit. Adjust set-point.
Flow irregularities or abnormal input Check oil flow and inlet temperature. Adjust
conditions. process condition.
Regulating valve not functioning. Check fuse in the control unit or check for broken
wiring.
Check the regulating valve.
Safety valve Oil valves closed causing oil to overheat. Shut off heating medium. Open oil inlet and outlet
opens. valves.
Low temperature. Set-point changed in the control unit. Adjust set-point.

Flow irregularities or abnormal input Check oil flow and inlet temperature. Adjust
conditions. process condition.
Regulating valve not functioning. Check fuse in the control unit or check for broken
wiring.
Check the regulating valve.
Deposits inside the heater. Clean the heater, see the maintenance chapter.
Incorrect installation. Check if the heater is connected according to the
installation drawings, see Technical data.
Steam trap not functioning. By-pass the steam trap for a while to ensure that
the condensate line is not blocked or shut off. If the
flow of the condensate is in order, then check the
steam trap.
Leakage between Misalignment between flange and connection. Rearrange the pipe in order to eliminate stress and
flange and heater. to correct alignment.
Dislocated or damaged gasket. Relocate or replace damaged gaskets.
Foreign objects on the surfaces. Check and clean the surfaces. Fit new gaskets.
Mixing of media. Pipe connections mixed. Relocate the piping to the heater according to the
Installation chapter.
9007143-02 11
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 3 FAULT FINDING
12 9007143-02
4 Maintenance

The plate corrugations are designed to create
high turbulence which, to a high degree, will
prevent the formation of deposits on the plate
surfaces. However, fouling cannot always be
eliminated and will cause pressure drop and
poor heat transfer, resulting in reduced
performance and increased energy
requirement. Therefore, never wait with
cleaning until the heater is choked-up.
Cleaning should be carried out every six
months or at other intervals based on
experience. If the heating medium is steam or
hot water, the heating cirquit must also be
cleaned.
Recommended cleaning agents:
For fuel oil heater:
• Alfa Laval fuel oil liquid 
(Art. No. 1763500-02).
For lube oil heater:
• Alfa Laval lube oil liquid 
(Art. No. 1762852-01).
The Alfa Laval cleaning liquids are specially
suitable for the materials used in the
Heatpac® CBM. Liquids that are corrosive to
copper or stainless steel, for example
hydrochloric acid and nitric acid, must not be
used.
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
Shut off the oil flow and the heating medium flow
before starting maintenance.
9007143-02 13
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 4 MAINTENANCE
ING
WARN
!
Corrosion Hazard
Pay strict attention to the safety instructions for the
cleaning liquid used.
NOTE
Only use cleaning liquids as specified. Other

cleaning agents may corrode the metal surfaces.
4.2 Manual Cleaning

Manual cleaning is carried out as follows:
1 Disconnect the heater.
2 Drain the heater.
3 Flush the heater through with fresh water.
4 Drain the heater from water.
5 Fill the heater with hot cleaning liquid (50-
70 °C). Use the type and concentration
required for the deposits present.
6 Let the liquid stay in the heater for at least 60
minutes. If possible, let the cleaning liquid
circulate in the heater.
7 Drain the cleaning liquid.
8 Flush through with clean water.
9 Reconnect the CBM heater using new
gaskets.
14 9007143-02
4 MAINTENANCE HEATING SYSTEM KIT
4.3 Cleaning with CIP
Alfa Laval CIP System type 10M (for in place

cleaning of separators) can be used for cleaning
the CBM heater (a CIP unit connection kit is
required). The cleaning procedure when using
the CIP unit is described below (see figure). See
also the CIP System Manual for information
regarding the operation of the CIP.
1 Disconnect the heater.
2 Connections suitable for either of the two CIP
hose dimensions are available in the CIP-CBM
connection kit. Use the appropriate
P0 0 35 01 A
connection to fit the CIP hoses to the CBM
heater oil inlet and outlet flanges, see
1. Return from the heater
drawings in Technical Data. 2. Outlet to the heater
3. Plugged connections
3 Connect a hose between the highest
connection on the CIP unit and the heat
exchanger oil outlet (2)
4 Connect a hose to the heat exchanger oil inlet
and put the free end into the CIP tank (1).
5 Plug the two remaining connections on the
CIP (3). Make sure that the bottom valve on
the CIP tank is closed. Close the valve in the
CIP tank also.
6 Fill the CIP with hot water (50-70 °C) and
cleaning liquid at recommended
concentrations. Total volume should be 15-20
litres.
7 Start the CIP pump and run it for at least 60
minutes.
8 Stop the CIP pump.
9 Empty the CIP tank by opening the CIP drain
valve.
10 Close CIP tank drain valve.
11 Fill the CIP with fresh water, volume 
15-20 litres.
12 Start the CIP pump and rinse the CBM heater
for 10 minutes.
13 Stop the CIP pump.
9007143-02 15
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 4 MAINTENANCE
14 Empty the CIP tank by opening the CIP drain

valve.
15 Disconnect the CIP.
Reconnect the CBM heater using new gaskets.
NOTE
Take care not to reinstall the heater upside-down.
16 9007143-02
5 Technical Data
5.1 Specification
Operating pressure, maximum 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
Test pressure 2.4 MPa (24 bar)
Operating temperature, maximum 200 °C
Medium Mineral oil
Heating media Steam, hot water, thermal oil
The following shall apply to the heating media:
Steam:condensate pH 8.8 - 9.2
sodium in condensate < 0.01 mg/l
Water:pH value Shall be neutral to minimize corrosion risk
Thermal oil The thermal oil must be highly resistant to oxidation and
thermal desintegration. It must also have good corrosion
protection properties.
Materials:Plates and connections Stainless steel AISI 316
Brazing material Copper
Insulation Mineral wool (30 mm)
Cover Aluminium
Mounting style:for hot water or thermal oil Vertically or horizontally
for steam Vertically
Ref. 1764560-61 Rev. 3
9007143-02 17
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5.2 Dimensions CBM 30
X0 0 65 63 A
Ref. 9007089 Rev. 0
A. Mounting brackets (2x) D.Mounting holes (4x)Ø9

B. Identification plate E.For welding
C. Installation label F.Depth of heater (see table below)
Part No. Type Depth of heater Volume each side Weight

(mm)
583382-11 CBM 30 – 20 160 0.5 litres 10 kg
583382-12 CBM 30 – 40 160 1.0 litres 13 kg
583382-13 CBM 30 – 60 260 1.6 litres 15 kg
583382-14 CBM 30 – 80 260 2.1 litres 17 kg
583382-15 CBM 30 – 100 310 2.7 litres 19 kg
18 9007143-02
5 TECHNICAL DATA HEATING SYSTEM KIT
5.3 Dimensions CBM 110
X00 65 5 2A
Ref. 9007096 Rev. 0
A. Mounting brackets (2x) D.Mounting holes (4x) Ø11

B. Identification plate E.For welding
C. Installation label F.Depth of heater (see table below)
Part No. Type Depth of heater Volume each side Weight

(mm)
583382-16 CBM 110 – 20 190 2.0 litres 27 kg
583382-17 CBM 110 – 40 190 4.0 litres 35 kg
583382-18 CBM 110 – 60 310 6.2 litres 44 kg
583382-19 CBM 110 – 80 310 8.2 litres 47 kg
583382-20 CBM 110 – 100 370 10.5 litres 55 kg
9007143-02 19
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 5 TECHNICAL DATA
20 9007143-02
6 Installation
6.1 System Design

Heatpac® CBM is designed for use in an oil
preheating system for separator feed oil, or in a
fuel conditioning system for engine fuel oil.
Because of its small volume, the
Heatpac® CBM is very sensitive to temperature
fluctuations in the various media. This must be
taken into consideration when designing the
control system.
 Use a PI temperature controller.
 Select a regulating valve with the fastest
possible reaction rate. It should also be
installed close to the steam inlet in order to
avoid condensate build up.
 The temperature sensor, TT1/TT2 should be
placed as close to the oil outlet of the heater
as possible. This will give rapid reaction
even at low media flow.
 The heating media inlet should be equipped
with a strainer to trap impurities in the
heating system.
Strainer mesh size should be:
For Steam and Hot Water - 500 
For Thermal oil - 800 
 When using steam, a vacuum breaker
should be installed downstream the steam
regulating valve.
 When using steam, a mechanical float type
steam trap must be used. Other types of
steam trap are not allowed.
9007143-02 21
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 6 INSTALLATION
6.2 Heater Mounting

When installing the Heatpac® CBM, the
following should be taken into consideration:
• If steam is to be used, the heater must be
mounted vertically. If both media are liquids
the heater can be mounted either vertically
or horizontally.
• Before connecting any piping to the heater,
make sure that all foreign objects have
been rinsed out of the system.
• Vibrations or other forces from the
connected piping must be avoided.
• When connecting the pipe system to the
heater make sure that no stress or strain is
P0 03 4 91 A
placed on the heater by the piping system.
Also remember that expansion of the piping
due to heat can result in high stress. 1. Heating medium inlet
2. heating medium outlet
3. Drip tray
4. Safety valve drain
5. Oil inlet pressure indicator
6. Oil inlet
7. Heated oil outlet
8. Oil outlet pressure indicator
• The heater should be connected so that the

media flow in opposite directions.
• The heating medium shall always be
connected to the upper and lower left
connections as seen from the front of the
Heatpac® CBM. Make sure that the
X0 0 65 62 A
installation and identification labels are right
side up. Consequently the oil should be
connected to the right connections. A. Heating medium inlet
B. Heating medium outlet
• Use the flange bolts supplied with the C. Oil inlet
heater as longer bolts may damage the D. Oil outlet
heater plates.
• Install a drip tray under the heater for
collection of oil and heating medium when
the heater is disconnected for cleaning.
22 9007143-02
6 INSTALLATION HEATING SYSTEM KIT
6.3 Installation of Ancillary Components
Specifications
A safety valve with provision for pressure relief
must be installed in the oil inlet line. See the
installation drawings
ING
WARN
!
Burn Hazard
Make sure that the safety valve outlet leads into a
collecting tank or below floor level.
• All connections to the heater shall be fitted

with shut-off valves so that the heater can
be removed if necessary. The valves must
not be of the fast-closing type as these can
cause pressure shocks in the heater.
• When using steam as heating medium, a
mechanical float type steam trap must be
installed at least 200 mm lower than the
outlet of the heater, providing a hydraulic
head above the steam trap.
• The condensate collection should be
installed below the steam trap. Otherwise
there is a risk that the discharge pressure
becomes too high and the condensate can
not be drained off.
• A vacuum breaker should be mounted on
the steam inlet side to facilitate condensate P0 0 34 91 D
drainage. (Not used for Hot Water or

Thermal Oil.)
A. min. 200 mm
Recommendation
• Pressure indicators should be installed on
the oil side before and after the heater in
order to detect pressure drops, which
indicate fouling of the heater.
9007143-02 23
6.4 Installation Drawings
6.4.1 Heatpac® CBM Heating Kit for Separator System
Controller
D
B
A
E
F
X0 09 5 21 B
Ref. 1764576 Rev. 3
1. Heater , Heatpac® CBM A.Oil inlet

2. Regulating valve B.To separator
3. Temperature sensor, 2x Pt100 C.Voltage supply
4. Temperature indicator D.Steam (Hot water or Thermal oil)
5. Steam trap (Steam heating only) E.Condensate
6. Shut-off valve F.Min. 200 mm
7. Safety valve
8. Temperature controller
9. Pressure indicator
10. Vacuum breaker (Steam heating only)
11. Non return valve
12. Strainer. Compulsory for good operation. 
0,5 mm mesh for Steam and Hot Water
0,8 mm mesh for Thermal Oil
13. CIP connection
14. Draining point
All low points in the steam pipe should be drained.
Technical data:
Media: Mineral oil
Heating media: Steam, hot water, thermal oil
Max. working pressure: Oil-side: 0,6 MPa (6 bar)
Heating media-side: 1,6 MPa (16bar)
Max. media temperature: Oil 160°C
Heating media: 225°C
24 9007143-02
6.4.2 Installation drawing, steam system
X0 27 0 60 A
Ref. 9012390 Rev.0
1. CBM heater
2. Strainer (optional)
3. Vacuum breaker
5. Steam trap
6. Non-return valve (not Alfa Laval scope of supply)
7. Safety valve
8. Ball valve (not Alfa Laval scope of supply)
9. Heating shut-off kit (optional)
Connections
CBM30 A DN15/DN20/DN25
CBM30 A1 DN20
CBM110 A1 DN25
CBM30 B DN25
CBM110 B DN40
C G 1/2 Male
C1 G 1/2 Female
D G 1/4 Male
E G 3/4 Male
a. Vertical or horizontal installation e. Steam inlet

b. Oil outlet f. Alternative
c. Oil inlet g. Plugged, for drain
d. CIP connections h. Condensate outlet
9007143-02 25
6.4.3 Installation drawing, thermal oil/hot water system
X0 27 0 61 A
Ref. 9012391 Rev.0
1. CBM heater
2. Strainer (optional)
3. Heating regulating valve
4. Thermal oil extension kit
5. Non-return valve (not Alfa Laval scope of supply)
6. Ball valve (not Alfa Laval scope of supply)
7. Safety valve
8. Heating shut-off kit
Connections
CBM30 B DN25
CBM110 B DN40
C G 1/2 Male
D G 1/4 Male
E G 3/4 Male
a.Vertical or horizontal installation e. Hot water/thermal oil inlet

b.Oil outlet f. Alternative
c. Oil inlet g. Plugged, for drain
d. CIP connections h. Hot water/thermal oil outlet
i. Extra extension (thermal oil only)
26 9007143-02
6.4.4 Heatpac® CBM connection kit for CIP unit
X0 06 38 2A
Ref. 1764630 Rev. 2
1. Flange complete A.CIP Unit

2. Gasket B.To CIP tank
3. Couplings nut C.CBM heater
4. O-ring D.Oil outlet side
5. Caps E.Oil inlet side
6. Nut F.Lower (2x) connections on CIP unit blinded
G.For CIP connection R 1 1/2
Kit No.CBM26, CBM 30 – 1764630-80 H.For CIP connection R 1 1/4
CBM76, CBM 110 – 1764630-81
9007143-02 27
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 6 INSTALLATION
28 9007143-02
7 Spare Parts
G 0 52 89 1 A
Spare Parts for Heatpac® CBM 30
Item Part No. Type Remarks Parts Recommended
included for 3 years
in operation
delivery
1 583382-11 Heater CBM 30 – 20 incl. insulation - -
583382-12 Heater CBM 30 – 40 incl. insulation - -
2 1764629-01 Gasket for flange 4 24
9007143-02 29
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 7 SPARE PARTS
Spare Parts for Heatpac® CBM 110

Item Part No. Type Remarks Parts Recommended
included for 3 years
in operation
delivery
1 583382-16 Heater CBM 110 – 20 incl. insulation - -
2 1764628-01 Gasket for flange 4 24
30 9007143-02
8 Ancillary Equipment
8.1 Steam Regulating

Valve
8.1.1 Application
The steam regulating valve is designed to
regulate the flow of steam, water of all
temperatures, or thermal oil.
8.1.2 Design
The valve has a two-way valve housing and a 24

V AC motor drive. The valve spindle is moved to
the open, closed, or any intermediate position by
the motor drive mounted on the valve housing.
X02 3 96 3A
9007143-02 31
HEATING SYSTEM KIT 8 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
8.1.3 Motor Drive Assembly
The motor drive is mounted on top of the valve

housing by two Allen screws and a clamp which
fasten the drive mounting rods to the valve neck.
LEDs
indicating
A spring-loaded circular grip on the drive Motor drive valve position
operating shaft is locked onto the valve spindle.

If the shaft and valve neck are not already
Crank handle
mounted together, before the regulating unit can
be used for the first time, wind the crank handle Drive operating shaft
Mounting
to lower the drive operating shaft until the rods
Spring-loaded circular grip
spring-loaded circular grip connects to the
spindle top.
Continue to wind the crank handle until the Clamp
valve is in the completely open position. Allen screws
Check that the level indicator disc is mounted
X02 39 6 4A
correctly, showing that the valve is in the open Valve neck
position. Otherwise if not already mounted, click

a level indicator into place.
Wind the crank handle back until the valve is in
the completely closed position.
Check that the level indicator disc is mounted

correctly, showing that the valve is in the closed
position. Otherwise if not already mounted, click
a level indicator into place.
Closed
When the valve is closed, fold the crank handle
Level indicator
back into its locked position. disc
The upper LED flashes green when the valve is

closing and the lower LED flashes green when
the valve is opening.
When one of the LEDs shines green steadily, the
drive is in a rest position and the last running Open
X0 2 39 64 A
direction is in accordance with the LED.

When one of the LEDs shines red steadily, an
end position is reached.
32 9007143-02
8 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT HEATING SYSTEM KIT
8.1.4 Valve
The upper part of the valve housing forms the
valve neck with inside threads for the stuffing
box and for mounting of the motor drive. The
stuffing box components provide a high
temperature seal for the spindle.
To improve sealing, teflon inserts are fitted in
recesses in the lower guide boss and the
stuffing box. A stuffing box gasket prevents
leakage through the thread.
LED display
The display consists of two dual-colour LEDs
(red / green).
Both LEDs flashing red: initialisation procedure
Upper LED lit red: upper limit stop or "CLOSED" position reached
Lower LED lit red: lower limit stop or "OPEN" position reached
Upper LED flashing green: drive running, moving towards "CLOSED" position
Upper LED lit green: drive stationary, last direction of running "CLOSED"
Lower LED flashing green: drive running, moving towards "OPEN" position
Lower LED lit green: drive stationary, last direction of running "OPEN"
Both LEDs are lit green: waiting time after switching on, or after emergency function
No LED lit: no voltage supply (terminal 2a or 2b)
Both LEDs flashing red and green: drive is in manual mode
NOTE
With 3-point control it will apppear as though the

LED flashes. This is because power is only
supplied when the valve moves.
9007143-02 33
8.1.5 Motor Drive
Power supply 24 V 50/60 Hz AC should be

supplied by a 4-core cable, providing common, 24 V AC
open and close signals.

Terminal 21 is only valid for drive with spring-
return.
NOTE
The extra supply to connection 21 goes to a solenoid that 24 V 2b 2a GND

holds the spring in place. If there is no voltage to Incr. Decr.
connection 21, the spring closes the valve.
RTM
*
Brown
Black
Blue
2b 2a 1
21 *
X 02 39 75 A
* Only with spring return
8.1.6 Valve Options

Eleven versions of the regulating valve are
available to cover the range of flow rates
required.
The valves have different plug and spindle
assemblies to obtain the different flow rates.
There are six different bore sizes with different
valve housings and bottom cover gaskets. The
remaining components (stuffing box and
options) are identical in all valves.
8.1.7 Preventive Maintenance

No preventive maintenance of the motor drive
is recommended.
The stuffing box seals should be periodically
checked, and the valve inspected for erosion
and cavitation damages. Any worn parts must
be replaced.
34 9007143-02
The frequency of valve maintenance necessary

to avoid breakdown can vary between every
three months and a number of years depending
on the working environment.
9007143-02 35
8.1.8 Technical Data
Actuator
Electric motor 24 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 20 VA (while running)
Ambient temperature Max 60 °C
Enclosure IP 66
Knock-out holes for cable glands M20x1.5 (2x)
M16x1.5 (1x)
Cover material Fire resistant plastic
Mounting position Upright or horizontal
Ref. 578787 Rev. 0
Valve
Media Steam, water or thermal oil
Maximum media temperature 240 °C
Maximum working pressure 25 bar up to 120 °C
20 bar up to 240 °C
Permanent working temp. with teflon packing box -20 °C – 240 °C for steam and water
Max. 230 °C for thermal oil
Leakage 0.5 % of kvs value
Valve characteristic Equal percentage (logarithmic)
Valve plug with soft sealing (GF PTFE)
Material
Housing Ductile nodular cast iron
Packing box housing Brass
Spindle Stainless steel
Valve seat plug Stainless steel
Ref. 578787 Rev. 0
36 9007143-02
8.1.9 Dimensions
X0 23 9 69 A
Ref. 578787 Rev. 0, Ref. 578788 Rev. 0
Part No. A B C D Kvs Size Notes

value
578787-11 126 415 230 60 40 DN50 Actuator without spring-return
578787-09 110 417 180 60 16 D432 Actuator without spring-return
578787-07 94 396 150 60 6.3 DN20 Actuator without spring-return
578787-05 84 402 130 60 2.5 DN15/1 Actuator without spring-return
578787-03 84 402 130 60 1 DN15/3 Actuator without spring-return
9007143-02 37
Part No. A B C D Kvs Size Notes

value
578788-11 126 415 230 73 40 DN50 Actuator with spring-return
578788-09 110 417 180 73 16 D432 Actuator with spring-return
578788-07 94 396 150 73 6.3 DN20 Actuator with spring-return
578788-05 84 402 130 73 2.5 DN15/1 Actuator with spring-return
578788-03 84 402 130 73 1 DN15/3 Actuator with spring-return
38 9007143-02
8.1.10 Installation
Specification
There must be enough free space to allow for

maintenance and repair.
The ambient temperature must be within the
range -5 to +55 °C.
The valve must be installed to close against the
operating pressure.
The valve must not be installed with the motor
drive upside down.
X 02 39 66 A
Procedure
1 Fit the valve and motor assembly to the piping

system.
2 Remove the motor drive cover and the plastic
protection in the cable entry.
3 Slide the cable gland parts on to the cable.
4 Insert the cable and secure it by tightening the
gland nut.
X0 2 47 39 A
9007143-02 39
5 Connect the cable leads to the Response

Time Module terminals:
 Common Terminal GND (1)
 Valve Close Terminal 2a
 Valve Open Terminal 2b
 Power supply Terminal 24 V
 Solenoid for spring Terminal 21( with
spring return only)
X0 2 47 40 A
6 Fit the motor drive cover and run a system test
to check that the valve assembly is operating
properly.
40 9007143-02
Extension kit, 240 °C

Use an extenssion kit at temperatures above
180 °C.
1 Unscrew the two Allen screws and remove the

clamp.
X 02 39 79 A
2 Release the spring loaded grip.
X0 2 39 81 A
click
3 Push the intermediate piece into the grip.
click
OK
X02 39 8 2A
9007143-02 41
4 Fasten the mounting rod extensions and

mount the clamp.
X0 23 98 3 A
42 9007143-02
Potentiometer mounting
1 Switch off the power supply.
2 Remove the cover of the motor drive.
3 Adjust and hold the position of the crank
handle.
hold position!
X0 23 98 4A
9007143-02 43
4 Connect the terminals.
stroke = 14 mm stroke = 20 mm
stroke = s
connection terminal connection terminal

front side rear side
stroke connection connection adjustment

terminal side position
rear R
front F
Position
X0 23 9 85 A
44 9007143-02
5 Mount the potentiometer.
front or rear side see step 3.
X023986A
6 Adjust the position.
adjustment position see step 3.
X023987A
9007143-02 45
8.1.11 Spare parts
Actuator
XO 2 39 70 C
Ref. 578785 Rev. 5
A B Part no. Description

578785-07 Response Time Module
578785-05 Adaptor kit
578785-04 Potentiometer kit
578785-03 Extension kit, 240 °C
73 578785-02 Valve drive
60 578785-01 Valve drive
410 With extension kit 578785-03
350 Without extension kit
46 9007143-02
Regulating Valve
XO 23 96 7 B
Ref. 578784 Rev. 0
Pos. C A L Kvs Size Part no. Description

4 All 578784-61 Packing box
3 DN50 578784-51 Gasket
3 DN40 578784-50 Gasket
3 DN22 578784-49 Gasket
3 DN25 578784-48 Gasket
3 DN20 578784-47 Gasket
3 DN15 578784-46 Gasket
1 111,5 126 230 40 DN50 578784-11 Valve
1 107.5 116 200 25 DN40 578784-10 Valve
1 103.5 110 180 16 DN32 578784-09 Valve
1 94.5 97 160 I0 DN25 578784-08 Valve
1 92.5 94 150 6.3 DN20 57878407 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 4 DN15/0 578784-06 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 2.5 DN15/1 578784-05 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 1.6 DN15/2 578784-04 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 1 DN15/3 578784-03 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 0.63 DN15/4 578784-02 Valve
1 98.5 84 130 0.40 DN15/5 578784-01 Valve
9007143-02 47
8.2 Safety Valve
8.2.1 Application
The safety valve is for use in Alfa Laval
mineral oil systems.
8.2.2 Design
The relief valve consists of a housing with a

spring-loaded cone and spindle. A gasket ensures
efficient sealing between the cone and the
housing seat.
G003411A
8.2.3 Working Principle
The safety valve is delivered with preset opening

pressure. If the pressure in the system exceeds
the preset pressure, the spring-loaded cone is
affected, and the valve opens.
The cone movement can be tested by lifting the
spindle using the manual relief on the top of the
valve.
G003421A
48 9007143-02
Specifications
Nominal pressure 1600 kPa (16 bar) (PN16)
Material:
Housing Brass
Cone and seat Stainless steel
Max. temperature 160 °C
Weight 0.3 kg
8.2.5 Dimensions
X011561A
Part no. Preset at:

1761805-01 600 kPa (6 bar)
1761805-02 1500 kPa (15 bar)
9007143-02 49
8.3 Steam Shut-off Valve
Ball valve
Media Steam
Maximum media temperature 198 °C
Material
Valve body steel
Ball SS
Sealing carbographite
Ref. 1766465 Rev. 3
Pneumatic actuator
Operating pressure 500 – 700 kPa (5 – 7 bar)
Max. pressure 1 MPa (10 bar)
Ambient temperature -20 °C – +85 °C
Material aluminium-elax
Ref. 1766465 Rev. 3
Pilot ventil
Media air
Ambient temperature -20 °C – +60 °C
Material aluminium-elax
Supply voltage 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ref. 1766465 Rev. 3
50 9007143-02
Dimensions
Air inlet 
G 1/4
X024628A
Part no. DN A B C D E F G Actuator Air Total weight Ball valve
consumption kg item
1766465 01 15 168 213 173 90 35 M12 65 SR 52 0.126 Nl/ Conn.15 – 3.2 1765948 05
stroke
1766465 02 20 184 234 193 100 40 M12 75 SR 63 0.233 Nl/ Conn.20 – 4.5 1765948 01
stroke
1766465 03 25 188 243 196 110 46 M12 85 SR 63 0.233 Nl/ Conn.25 – 5.3 1765948 02
stroke
1766465 04 32 221 286 250 130 54 M16 100 SR 85 0.531 Nl/ Conn.32 – 7.6 1765948 09
stroke
Ref. 1766465 Rev. 3
9007143-02 51
8.4 Steam Trap

Working temp. max. 250 °C
Working pressure max. 16 MPa (16 bar)
Valve seat 10 bar
Ref. 1766169 Rev. 1
Dimensions
X024629A
Ref. 1766169 Rev. 1
Part no. Conn A B C D Dh E Weight kg

1766169 01 DN 15 150 107 101  95 65 51 4.5
1766169 02 DN 20 150 107 101 105 75 55 5.0
1766169 03 DN 25 160 117 70 115 85 100 6.5
Ref. 1766169 Rev. 1
52 9007143-02
8.5 Vacuum Breaker

Media Steam
Media temp. max. 260 °C
Media pressure max. 16 bar
Material Brass
Ref. 1766607 Rev. 2
Dimensions
X024630B
Ref. 1766607 Rev. 2
Part no.
1766607-01
9007143-02 53
8.6 Inlet Strainer
X027590A
DN L Part no. MDO/ Part no. LO/ D Dh Ds B C
Steam (500) Thermal oil (800)
15 130 7060128-01 7060128-09 95 65 14 80 110
20 150 7060128-02 7060128-10 105 75 14 85 130
25 160 7060128-03 7060128-11 115 85 14 105 150
32 180 7060128-04 7060128-12 140 100 18 110 225

Media Steam/Thermal oil
Gasket Graphite
Flanges UNI PN 16/40 - DIN 2633
Material, body Cast steel GS C25
Strainer insert Stainless steel
Ref. 7060128 Rev. 1
54 9007143-02
Component
Description
Oil Feed Pumps ALP 15-85
X02 7 35 1A
Product No.
Printed Nov 2017

Book No. 9006009-02 V8
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 EC Declaration of Conformity 7
2 Warning signs in text 9

2.1 Warning signs 9
3 Function Description 11
3.1 Application 11
3.1.1 Safety information 11
3.2 Design 12
3.2.1 Mechanical seal 12
3.2.2 Direction of Rotation 13
3.2.3 Pressure relief valve 13
3.3 Parts 14
4 Fault Finding 19
4.1 Possible faults 19
4.2 Troubleshooting 19
5 Maintenance 23
5.1 Safety instructions on maintenance and
repairs 23
5.2 Required maintenance 24
5.3 Mechanical seal 24
5.4 Ball bearing 24
5.5 Cleaning the leakage vent hole 25
5.6 Replacing the elastomer coupling 26
5.7 Replacing the mechanical seal and ball
bearing 29
5.7.1 Dismantling 29
5.7.2 Assembly 31
6 Technical Data 33
6.1 Operating limits 33
6.2 Required Net Positive Suction Height
(NPSH) values 33
3
6.3 Weights 34
6.4 Dimensions 35
6.4.1 Dimension drawing of ALP pump and pump unit 36
6.5 Capacity tables 37

6.5.1 Capacity at 50 Hz, delta = 4 bar 37
6.5.2 Capacity at 60 Hz, delta = 4 bar 38
6.5.3 Noise levels 39
6.5.4 Labelling 39
7 Installation 41
7.1 Installing the pump 41
7.2 Protect the pump against contamination 42
7.3 Piping 43
7.4 Strainer 43
7.5 Gauges 44
7.6 Commissioning 44
7.6.1 Cleaning the pipe system 44
7.6.2 Filling the pump 44
7.6.3 Checking the direction of rotation 45
7.6.4 Taking the pump out of operation 47
7.6.5 Recommissioning the pump 48
8 Transportation, storage and

disposal 49
8.1 Unpacking and checking the state of
delivery 49
8.2 Lifting the pump/pump unit 50
8.2.1 Pump 51
8.2.2 Pump unit 51
8.3 Storage 51
8.3.1 Preservation 52
8.3.2 Preserving the internal surfaces of the pump 52
8.3.3 Preserving the external surfaces of the pump 52
8.3.4 Removing the preservation 53
8.4 Disposing of the pump 53
9 Spare parts 55
9.1 Spare parts kit 55
9.1.1 Tightening torques 57
9.1.2 Required tools for maintenance work 58
4

Not following the instructions can result

in serious accidents.
5
!
1 EC Declaration of Conformity
X027551A
The designating company
Alfa Laval Kolding A/S

Company name
Albuen 31, DK–6000 Kolding, Denmark

Address
+45 79 32 22 00
Phone No.
hereby declares that
Denomination: Three-Screw Pump

Type: ALP
Date: 2013–04–01
Is in conformity with
- Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
and furthermore declares that if motorised the following applicable directives have been used
- Directive 2006/95/EC on low voltage
- EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
The technical construction file for this machinery has been drawn up. The signer of this declaration
is authorized to compile the technical file.
Manager, Product Center Fluid Handling Bjarne Søndergaard

Title Name
Alfa Laval Kolding A/S X027541A
Company Signature
7
1 EC Declaration of Conformity
2 Warning signs in text
2.1 Warning signs

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three
grades of warning signs used in the text where
there is a risk for injury to personnel.
NGE R
! DA
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
NG
WARNI
!
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
9
2 Warning signs in text

The operating instructions form part of the pump

or of the pump unit and must be kept for future
reference. Furthermore please observe the
associated documents.
3.1 Application
Use the pump solely for transporting fuel or
lubricating oils that are chemically neutral and
that contain no gas or solid components.
Use the pump only within the performance
limitations specified on the machine plate and
in the "Technical data" section. In the case of
operating data that does not agree with the
specifications on the machine plate, please
contact the manufacturer.
The pump is specifically configured for the
operating pressure stated in chapter 5.
3.1.1 Safety information

The following general safety instructions must
be observed:
• No liability is accepted for damage arising

through non-observance of the operating
instructions.
- Read the operating instructions carefully

and observe them.
- The operator-owner is responsible for the
observance of the operating instructions.
- Installation, removal and installation work
may only be carried out by authorised
personnel.
• In order for the warranty to remain valid,

corrective maintenance carried out during
the warranty period requires the express
permission of the manufacturer.
• Observe the general regulations for the
prevention of accidents as well as the local
safety and operating instructions.
11
• Observe the valid national and international

standards and specifications of the
installation location.
• In case of systems with an increased
potential of danger to humans and/or
machines the failure of a pump may not
lead to injuries or damage to property.
- Always equip systems with an increased

potential of danger with alarm equipment.
- Maintain and check the protective/alarm
equipment regularly.
• The pumped liquids can be dangerous

(e.g. hot, dangerous to health, poisonous,
combustible). Observe the safety
regulations for handling dangerous
materials.
• Pumped liquid can be subject to high
pressure and can cause damage and/or
personal injury should leaks occur.
3.2 Design
Screw pumps are rotating displacement pumps
whose displacement effect results from the
meshing of three rotating screws and the
enclosing housing. The radial support of the
screws is effected by the sliding contact in
the housing which requires lubrication by the
pumped liquid. Screw pumps are therefore not
suitable for dry running and can only be used up
to specific pressure and viscosity limits. Due to
the narrow tolerances, pumping of suspended
solids is not possible. Axial support of the
main screw is carried out by a deep-groove
ball bearing. An internal pressure relief valve
protects against excessive pressure that could
cause housing parts to burst.
3.2.1 Mechanical seal

The functionality of a mechanical seal is based
on the formation of a hydrodynamic film between
rotary seal ring and stationary seal ring of a
mechanical seal. The formation of this film
avoids solid body friction between both parts, the
stability of the film therefore is essential for the
functionality of the mechanical seal. However,
the formation of a fluid film also means that
12
the differential pressure on the seal will always

move some fluid through the gap which is filled
by the film. Therefore a properly designed
mechanical seal will always show a certain
amount of leakage. The amount of leakage is
depending on various factors, dominated by
size, rotation speed and differential pressure. In
any case, a leakage of less than 10 drops per
hour (approx. 0.5 cm3/h) is considered to be
normal and gives no reason for a replacement
of the seal.The integrated leakage vent hole
allows draining of this leakage. The drainage
through these hole has to be kept free, see 5.5
Cleaning the leakage vent hole on page 25.
Dry running must be avoided at all costs, as the
seal will overheat and be destroyed in a matter
of minutes.
3.2.2 Direction of Rotation

Standard direction of rotation: clockwise, viewed
from the drive; marked on the housing by two
arrows, see 7.6.3 Checking the direction of
rotation on page 45. Flow direction: marked on
the housing by two arrows, see 7.6.3 Checking
the direction of rotation on page 45.
3.2.3 Pressure relief valve

The integrated pressure relief valve prevents
very high pressures which can result in housing
parts bursting. The valve is purely there as
a safety element and should not be used
for control or regulation such as maintaining
pressure. Circulation through the pressure relief
valve for too long heats the pump to excess.
This reduces viscosity and can ultimately lead
to pump failure. Setting: The valve spring is
pretensioned to an opening pressure of 6 bar
±10 % for separator applications, or delta 10 bar
±10 % for fuel conditioning applications.
13
3.3 Parts
1 Pressure relief valve 10 Mechanical seal
2 Screw plug 11 Pump
3 Idle screw 12 adapter housing
4 End cover 13 Motor
5 Sealing sleeve 14 adapter housing foot
6 Ball bearing 15 Motor-side coupling half
7 Main screw 16 Coupling intermediate ring
8 Pump housing 17 Pump-side coupling half
9 Leakage vent hole
14
X027101A
Fig. 1.Structure of ALP pump
X027111A
Fig. 2.Structure of ALP pump with elastomer coupling and motor
15
Pos. no. Denomination Pos. no. Denomination

001 Pump 501 Spring
043 Sealing sleeve 526 Bracket
052 Coupling 529 Motor
056(*) Supporting ring 661** Screw set
058 L-ring 739.1 O-ring
070 End cover 817 Ball bearing
131 Pump housing 859 Adapter sleeve
165.1 Screw plug 866 Feather key
165.2 Screw plug 894 Hexagon nut
180 Adapter housing 914.1 Socket screw
222 Flat gasket 914.2 Socket screw
305 Valve body 914.3 Socket screw
457 Mechanical seal 914.4 Socket screw
471 Circlip
472 Circlip
* Only for sizes 15 – 20.

** In case of wear of the screw set it is recommended to replace the pump.
16
131
222
070
165.2
914.1 165.1
305 471
056*
501 859
866
056 472
8 817
043
457 739.1
661
X027151A
Fig. 1.ALP 15–85
X027161A
Fig. 2.Completion elastomer coupling ALP 15–85
17
4 Fault Finding
4.1 Possible faults

Faults can have different causes. The following
tables list the symptoms of a fault, the possible
causes and measures for elimination.
Fault Cause/Remedy
No pump suction 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 30
Delivery rate too low 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Pump runs noisily 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 18, 19, 20, 21
Motor overload 9, 10, 13, 21, 22, 25
Uneven delivery rate 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 15
Leaking shaft seal 17, 23, 24, 25
Pump has seized up 26, 27, 28, 29
4.2 Troubleshooting
No. Cause Remedy
1 Pump suction pipe closed Check shut-off devices in the suction pipe and
open them, if necessary.
2 Suction valve or pipe obstructed Check the suction valve and pipe for clear passage.
3 Suction pipe or shaft seal leaks Check suction pipe or shaft seal for leaks. Pay
particular attention to leakage at valves and
connection points. If necessary, replace parts.
4 Suction head too high Reinstall the pump at lower suctiion head level.
- or -
Reduce pipe length
- or -
Increase pipe diameter
- or -
Heat the liquid to reduce viscosity
- or -
Check that the strainer is not clogged, see 7.4
Strainer on page 43.
5 Level of liquid in the intake container
too low Top up the pumped liquid.
6 Dirty filter/strainer Clean the filter/strainer.
7 Pump suction capacity reduced by
inadequate wetting Fill pump with liquid.
19
4 Fault Finding
No. Cause Remedy

8 Incorrect pump direction of rotation Carry out the electrical connection so that the
direction of pump rotation matches that of the
arrow on the flange cover, see 7.6.3 Checking the
direction of rotation on page 45
9 Differential pressure too high Check the system and reduce the differential
pressure.
10 Viscosity of the pumped liquid too Increase the temperature of the liquid
high
- or -
Reduce the rotation speed.
11 Viscosity of the pumped liquid too Decrease the temperature of the liquid
low
- or -
12 Airlock or gas in the liquid Increase the rotation speed.
Test the pipe system for ingress of air and replace
parts if necessary.
Reduce the suction head
- or -
Increase the inlet pressure.
13 Motor running at wrong voltage or Ensure that the motor voltage and frequency match
frequency the operating voltage.
Compare the speed of the motor with the pump
communication plate. If the data does not match,
adjust the speed of the motor.
14 Pressure relief valve opens during
normal operation Reduce operating pressure.
15 Pressure relief valve leaks Clean the pressure relief valve and reseat if
necessary.
16 Advanced wear of rotating pump Check screw set and housing and replace the
components pump if necessary.
Replace the seal and check the pumped liquid for
abrasive content.
17 Advanced wear of sealing surfaces Support the weight of the pipe system.
18 Pump distorted Loosen pipework connections and mount
stress-free, see 7.3 Piping on page 43.
19 Resonance in the system Provide a flexible bearing arrangement for the
pump unit
- or -
Make the connections with hoses.
20 Speed of flow in suction or pressure Set the flow speed in the suction pipe so that it
pipe too high does not exceed 1 m/s.
Set the flow speed in the pressure pipe so that it
does not exceed 3 m/s.
21 Ball bearing damaged Replace the ball bearing, see 5.7 Replacing the
mechanical seal and ball bearing on page 29.
22 Lack of lubrication or foreign bodies
have caused superficial damage to Check the screw set and the housing. If necessary
rotating pump components replace the pump with free shaft end.
23 Dry running has damaged the shaft Replace the shaft seal, see 5.7 Replacing the
seal mechanical seal and ball bearing on page 29.
When starting up the pump, pay attention to
venting.
20
4 Fault Finding
No. Cause Remedy

24 Thermal or chemical loading of Check the maximum operating temperature.
elastomer seals exceeded Check the resistance of the elastomers with regard
to the pumped liquid.
25 Cold start when delivering
high-viscosity liquids Preheat the pumped liquid.
26 Foreign bodies in the pump Dismantle the pump and clean it.
Smooth the superficial damage to the housing and
the rotating parts with an oilstone. If necessary,
replace the pump.
27 Differential pressure is too high and Dismantle the pump and clean it.
has overloaded the screws Smooth the superficial damage to the housing and
replace the pump.
Reduce the differential pressure.
28 Viscosity is too low and has Dismantle the pump and clean it.
overloaded the screws Smooth the superficial damage to the housing and
replace the pump.
Increase the viscosity, for example by reducing the
operating temperature.
29 Dry running has damaged the pump Dismantle the pump and clean it.
equipment Smooth the superficial damage to the housing and
replace the pump.
When resuming operation, take action to prevent
dry running, see 7.6.5 Recommissioning the pump
on page 48.
30 Pump does not vent Vent the pressure pipe at the highest point.
21
4 Fault Finding
5 Maintenance
5.1 Safety instructions on maintenance and repairs

The following safety instructions must be
observed during all the repair work:
All the work may only be carried out by

authorized qualified personnel.
Wear protective clothing during all the work.
Switch off the motor and secure it against being
switched back on.
Before beginning the work let the pump/the
pump unit cool down to the ambient temperature
and remove it from the pipe system.
Ensure that the pump is depressurized.
Collect the emitted pumped liquid safely and
dispose of it in an environmentally compatible
manner.
Also observe the general drawings during all the
work, see Parts on page 14.
23
5 Maintenance
5.2 Required maintenance

The service life of the pump depends to a
great extent on the operating conditions. If the
operating limits are observed, see 6 Technical
Data on page 33, the pump has a service life
of many years. Signs of progressive wear of
individual pump elements:
Finding Cause Elimination

Incipient damage to
Increased running noises bearing Replace the bearing.
Increased leaking Incipient damage to seal Replace the shaft seal.
Deposits on the seal Non-volatile liquids Clean the seal.
Advanced wear of the
Increased play in the shaft coupling spider Replace the spider.
Reduction in the flow rate or pressure Advanced wear of screws
under constant operating conditions and housing Replace the pump.
Tab. 1 Check table for required maintenance
1. Check the pump visually and acoustically

every four weeks.
2. Check for signs of wear as listed in the

table above and eliminate the cause.
5.3 Mechanical seal

Mechanical seals are subject to a natural
wear that depends strongly on the respective
conditions of use. General statements about the
durability can therefore not be given. In case
of heavy pollution with solidified and/or sticky
leakage residues disassemble the mechanical
seal completely and carefully clean it, together
with the inner surfaces of the sealing sleeve,
see 5.7 Replacing the mechanical seal and
ball bearing on page 29. It is recommended
to replace the o-rings when reassembling the
mechanical seal.
5.4 Ball bearing

The ball bearings used are lifetime lubricated.
Maintenance is therefore not required. We
recommend renewing the ball bearings every
two years.
24
5 Maintenance
5.5 Cleaning the leakage vent hole

The regular small amounts of leakage can result
in deposits that can prevent free draining of
further leakage liquids after a longer operating
period. The leakage vent hole must therefore
be checked monthly and if necessary cleaned.
X027171A
Fig. 1 Cleaning the leakage vent hole
ON
CAUTI
!
Bearing damage due to insufficient drainage
of shaft seal leakage
Check permeability of leakage vent hole
regularly.
1. Remove any drainage line that is

connected.
2. Check the permeability of the drainage line:

Observe whether a small amount of added
liquid drains, or
Check visually, or
Insert an arbor made of a soft material
(wood, plastic, etc.), see Fig. 1.
3. Clean the line or leakage vent hole, if it is
not free.
4. Reconnect any drainage line that is

connected.
25
5 Maintenance
5.6 Replacing the elastomer coupling

Removing the coupling
001
180
525
052.2
180
529 052.1
914.2
914.3
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
X027181c
001 Pump 180 adapter housing 914.2 Socket screws

052.1 Pump-side coupling half 525 Coupling intermediate 914.3 Socket screws
ring
052.2 Motor-side coupling half 529 Motor
NG
WARNI
!
Risk of injury and/or damage to equipment
should the pump/pump unit fall
Lift large pumps/pump units using the crane.
Do not stand under raised loads.
1. Before dismantling close the suction and

pressure connection of the pump with
protective covers.
2. Loosen the connecting screws 914.3
between the motor 529 and adapter
housing 180 and lift the pump with adapter
housing from the motor, see Fig. 2
3. Loosen the fixing screw on the motor-side
coupling half 052.2.
4. Remove the coupling intermediate ring 525
and pull off the coupling half 052.2 using a
suitable device.
26
5 Maintenance
5. Loosen the connecting screws 914.2

between the pump 001 and adapter
housing 180 and remove the adapter
housing, see Fig. 3.
6. Loosen the fixing screw on the pump-side
coupling half 052.1 and remove the
coupling half using suitable mounting
levers.
Installing the coupling
1. Slide the pump-side coupling half 052.1

onto the shaft until it stops. Heating the
coupling to 80–100 °C facilitates mounting.
Tighten the fixing screw of the coupling half.
2. Place the adapter housing 180 on the pump
and tighten the connecting screws 914.2,
see Fig. 4.
X027201A
3. Measure and write down the distance X

between the face of the coupling and the
connecting surface of the adapter housing,
see Fig. 5.
X027211A
27
5 Maintenance
4. Mount the motor-side coupling half 052.2

on the shaft end of the motor, see Fig.
6. Heating the coupling to 80–100 °C
facilitates mounting.
001
180
525
052.2
529
914.3
Fig. 6
X027221b
5. Check the distance between the face of the

coupling teeth and the connecting surface
of motor flange. The distance has to be
adjusted to the value X - c, see table below.
6. Insert the coupling intermediate ring
525 and tighten the fixation screw at the
coupling half 052.2.
7. Place the pump with the adapter housing
on the motor.
8. Turn the pump slightly until the teeth of
the pump-side coupling half 052.1 mesh
correctly into the spaces of the coupling
intermediate ring 525.
9. Tighten the connecting screws 914.3
between the motor and adapter housing
with torque, see 9.1.1 Tightening torques
on page 57.
Coupling diameter Linear offset c

[mm] min. [mm] max. [mm]
56 2.0 3.5
66 2.5 4.0
28
5 Maintenance
5.7 Replacing the mechanical seal and ball bearing
5.7.1 Dismantling
Aids:
Disassembly tool, see 9.1.2 Required tools for

maintenance work on page 58.
- Open-end wrench
- Extractor
1. Remove the circlip 472, screw plug 165.1

and feather key 866, see Fig. 7.
X027231A
2. Screw in the disassembly tool A by using

the open-end wrench B, see Fig. 8. The
main screw will be pressed out of the pump
housing. Remove the main screw from the
pump housing.
X027241A
3. Remove the circlip 471 and supporting ring

056, see Fig. 9.
X027251A
29
5 Maintenance
4. Pull the ball bearing 817 from the main

screw using a suitable extractor C, see Fig.
10.
X027261A
5. Remove L-ring 058, supporting ring 056*,

sealing sleeve 043 along with o-ring 739.1
and stationary seal ring of the mechanical
seal along with o-ring, see Fig. 11.
043 056* 8
457
739.1
Fig. 11
X027271A
6. Remove the remaining parts of the

mechanical seal 457 from the main screw,
see Fig. 11.
30
5 Maintenance
5.7.2 Assembly
Aids:
1. Clean the fitting surfaces and the main

screw. Grease the main screw and o-rings
slightly.
2. Press the stationary seal ring of the
mechanical seal along with o-ring manually
into the sealing sleeve 043, see Fig. 12.
Take the position of the clearance for the
adapter sleeve 859 into account.
X027281A
3. Slide the remaining parts of the mechanical

seal 457 onto the main screw, see Fig. 13.
457
Fig. 13
X027561A
4. Slide the new o-ring 739.1 onto the sealing

sleeve 043 and slide the sealing sleeve
onto the main screw, see Fig. 14. Mount
the supporting ring 056* and the L-ring 058.
8
043 056*
739.1
Fig. 14
X027301A
5. Press the ball bearing 817 onto the main

screw, see Fig. 15.
X027311A
31
5 Maintenance
6. Mount the supporting ring 056 and circlip

471. Slide the main screw with premounted
sealing sleeve into the pump housing
until the main screw engages into the idle
screws, see Fig. 16. In doing so turn
the main screw and take the position of
the clearance for the adapter sleeve into
account.
X027321A
7. Mount the screw plug 165.1, circlip 472 and

feather key 866, see Fig. 17.
X027331A
32
6 Technical Data
6.1 Operating limits

Design pressure max. [bar] 16
Valve opening pressure [bar] 6 bar ± 10 %for separator systems
10 bar ± 10 % for fuel conditioning systems
Temperature max. [°C] 180
Temperature min. [°C] for pump materials -20
Viscosity min. – max. [mm2/s] 1.4 – 10 000

Rotation speed [min-1]
at 50 Hz 2 900
at 60 Hz 3 500
6.2 Required Net Positive Suction Height (NPSH)

values
The following table lists the required NPSH
values during operation with a low-volatile
liquid such as lubricating oil or hydraulic liquid.
When liquids have a readily volatile component
content, the required NPSH values increase
notably when the pumped liquid contains water
(e.g. heavy fuel oil), the values in the table have
to be increased by the vapor pressure of the
water at the specified operating temperature.
33
6 Technical Data
The required NPSH values also need to be

increased if there are gas contents, regardless
of whether it is dissolved or not. In case of any
doubt, please contact the manufacturer.
Size Viscosity NPSH value [mWC] at Size Viscosity NPSH value [mWC] at
[mm2/s] Rotation speed [min-1] [mm2/s] Rotation speed [min-1]
1 450 1 750 2 900 3 500 1 450 1 750 2 900 3 500
ALP 6 2.0 ALP 6 2.0
15 55
37 2.0 37 2.0 2.7
152 2.0 2.2 152 2.1 2.8 3.3
380 2.0 2.7 3.0 380 2.5 2.7 3.5 4.0
ALP 6 2.0 ALP 6 2.0 2.6 3.0
20 75
37 2.0 37 2.0 2.9 3.4
152 2.0 2.4 2.7 152 2.3 2.5 3.3 4.1
380 2.2 2.4 3.2 3.8 380 2.7 3.0 4.4 5.0
ALP 6 2.0 ALP 6 2.0 2.8 3.4
30 85
37 2.0 37 2.0 3.1 3.8
152 2.0 2.3 2.6 152 2.4 2.6 3.8 4.6
380 2.2 2.4 3.1 3.7 380 2.8 3.1 4.6 5.8
ALP 6 2.0 2.3
40
37 2.0 2.1 2.6
152 2.0 2.8 3.5
380 2.5 2.7 4.0 4.8
6.3 Weights
ALP weights with elastomer coupling
Motor size Size 15 20 Size 30 40 Size 55 75 85 Weight of

bracket with
screws [kg]
Weight of pump with free shaft end [kg]
6.3 8.7 12.6
Weight of adapter housing with spider coupling and screws [kg]
80 1.1 1.1 — 1.0
90 1.5 1.5 — 1.0
100 2.1 2.1 2.0 1.8
112 2.1 2.1 2.0 1.8
132 — — 3.2 2.7
34
6 Technical Data
6.4 Dimensions
Dimensions ALP pump
Size Pump Shaft end [mm]

[mm]
g B1 L1 L2 L3 L4 D1 D2 D3 S1 Z1 d l t u
15 – 20 73 15 50 12 60 60 128 103 80 9 4 14 30 16 5
30 – 40 73 12 50 12 68 75 135 103 80 9 4 14 30 16 5
55 – 85 83 15 50 15 75 85 160 125 100 11 4 19 35 21.5 6
Dimensions pump unit with elastomer coupling
Size Motor Pump unit [mm]

size
LP LL LM* LG* L5 L5.1 L6 L7 L8 L9 H1 H2 B2 B3 S4
*
15 –
20 80 157 110 * ** 60 — 90 21 — 89 12 112 210 180 Ø11
90 157 118 * ** 60 — 90 19 — 99 12 112 210 180 Ø11
100/112 157 128 * ** — 185 230 — 106 109 15 155 250 215 14x24
30 –
40 80 208 110 * ** 60 — 90 21 — 97 12 112 210 180 Ø11
90 208 118 * ** 60 — 90 19 — 107 12 112 210 180 Ø11
100/112 208 128 * ** — 185 230 — 106 117 15 155 250 215 14x24
55 –
85 90 226 118 * ** 60 — 90 19 — 114 12 112 210 180 Ø11
100/112 226 128 * ** — 185 230 — 106 124 15 155 250 215 14x24
132 226 150 * ** — 225 270 — 130 130 18 185 300 265 14x24
* Depends on motor model.
** LG=LP+LL+LM
35
6 Technical Data
6.4.1 Dimension drawing of ALP

pump and pump unit
X027341A
36
6 Technical Data
6.5 Capacity tables
6.5.1 Capacity at 50 Hz, delta = 4

bar
Q [l/hour] at viscosity [mm²/s] 50 Hz
Motor kW 13 30 40 60 100 180 380 460** 700**
ALP 15 0,75 1 625 1 678 1 693 1 712 1 731 1 747 1 762 1 765 1 771
0,55 727 780 796 814 833 850 865 868 873
0,37 407 459 475 494 513 529 544 547 553
ALP 20 1,1 2 138 2 208 2 228 2 253 2 278 2 299 2 319 2 323 2 330
0,55 957 1 026 1 047 1 072 1 096 1 118 1 138 1 142 1 149
0,37 535 604 625 650 674 696 716 720 727
ALP 30 1,5 3 456 3 537 3 561 3 590 3 619 3 644 3 667 3 672 3 680
1,1 1 597 1 678 1 702 1 731 1 760 1 785 1 808 1 813 1 821
0,75 934 1 014 1 038 1 067 1 096 1 121 1 144 1 149 1 158
ALP 40 2,2 4 606 4 713 4 746 4 784 4 822 4 856 4 887 4 893 4 905
1,1 2 129 2 236 2 268 2 307 2 345 2 379 2 409 2 416 2 427
0,75 1 244 1 351 1 384 1 422 1 460 1 494 1 525 1 531 1 543
ALP 55 3 6 326 6 464 6 505 6 555 6 604 6 647 6 687 6 695 6 710
2,2 2 939 3 077 3 118 3 168 3 217 3 260 3 300 3 308 3 323
1,5 1 729 1 867 1 909 1 958 2 008 2 051 2 090 2 098 2 113
ALP 75 3 8 184 8 346 8 394 8 452 8 510 8 561 8 607 8 616 8 634
2,2 3 829 3 991 4 040 4 098 4 156 4 206 4 252 4 262 4 279
1,5 2 274 2 436 2 485 2 542 2 600 2 651 2 697 2 707 2 724
ALP 85 4 9 135 9 302 9 352 9 412 9 471 9 524 9 571 9 581 9 599
2,2 4 296 4 463 4 514 4 573 4 633 4 685 4 733 4 743 4 761
1,5 2 568 2 735 2 786 2 845 2 905 2 957 3 005 3 015 3 033
37
6 Technical Data
6.5.2 Capacity at 60 Hz, delta = 4

bar
Q [l/hour] at viscosity [mm²/s] 60 Hz
Motor kW 13 30 40 60 100 180 380 460** 700**
ALP 15 0,75 2 010 2 062 2 078 2 097 2 116 2 132 2 147 2 150 2 156
0,55 920 972 988 1 007 1 026 1 042 1 057 1 060 1 066
0,37 535 588 603 622 641 657 672 675 681
ALP 20 1,1 2 645 2 714 2 735 2 759 2 784 2 805 2 825 2 829 2 837
0,55 1 210 1 279 1 300 1 325 1 349 1 371 1 391 1 395 1 402
0,37 704 773 794 819 843 865 885 889 896
ALP 30 1,5 4 253 4 334 4 358 4 387 4 415 4 441 4 464 4 468 4 477
1,1 1 996 2 076 2 101 2 129 2 158 2 183 2 206 2 211 2 220
0,75 1 199 1 280 1 304 1 333 1 362 1 387 1 410 1 414 1 423
ALP 40 2,2 5 668 5 775 5 807 5 846 5 884 5 918 5 948 5 955 5 966
1,1 2 659 2 767 2 799 2 838 2 876 2 910 2 940 2 947 2 958
0,75 1 598 1 705 1 738 1 776 1 814 1 848 1 879 1 885 1 896
ALP 55 3 7 777 7 915 7 957 8 006 8 056 8 099 8 138 8 146 8 161
2,2 3 665 3 803 3 844 3 893 3 943 3 986 4 026 4 033 4 048
1,5 2 213 2 351 2 393 2 442 2 491 2 535 2 574 2 582 2 597
ALP 75 3 10 050 10 212 10 261 10 318 10 376 10 427 10 473 10 483 10 500
2,2 4 762 4 924 4 973 5 031 5 089 5 139 5 186 5 195 5 212
1,5 2 896 3 058 3 107 3 164 3 222 3 273 3 319 3 329 3 346
ALP 85 4 11 208 11 375 11 426 11 485 11 545 11 597 11 645 11 655 11 673
2,2 5 333 5 500 5 550 5 610 5 670 5 722 5 770 5 779 5 798
1,5 3 260 3 427 3 477 3 536 3 596 3 648 3 696 3 706 3 724
* Max. possible viscosity without cavitation with

a suction head of -4 mWC at sea level.
** Re-sizing of motor required.
38
6 Technical Data
6.5.3 Noise levels

Guide values at 1 m distance, 1450 min-1, 10
bar
Sound pressure level max. ± 3 [dB(A)]

Size 15 – 20 30 – 40 55 – 85
Pump 56 59 65
6.5.4 Labelling
6.5.4.1 Type code

2 4 6
ALP-0020-BAC090
1 3 5
X027421A
Pos. Designation Type

1 Model ALP
2 Size Corresponds to flow rate in [l/min] at 1 450 min-1
3 Shaft seal B: Mechanical seal of hard material
D: Magnetic coupling
4 Pressure stage A: 6 bar
overflow valve B: 10 bar
5 Completion A: Pump with free shaft end
B: With adaptor housing and coupling (flange mounted)
C: With adaptor housing, coupling and foot (foot mounted)
D: B with motor
E: C with Motor
6 Frame size 080
090
100
112
132
160
180
39
6 Technical Data
7 Installation
Observe the following instructions:
• When selecting the location take the

operating limits, Net Positive Suction Head
(NPSH) values and ambient conditions into
account, see 6 Technical Data on page 33.
• The function, safety and service life may
not be impaired by humidity, temperature
influences or explosive atmospheres.
• During the installation ensure that all the
parts of the pump can be accessed easily
and that the maintenance work can be
carried out easily.
7.1 Installing the pump

The pump must be installed to meet the
following demands:
• The pump must be mounted on a solid

foundation and on a drip tray or in a
cofferdam.
• The pump can be operated vertically or
horizontally. However, if vertically mounted
the pump should not be mounted above
the motor since pumped liquid could enter
the motor should a leak occur.
• The pump must be easily accessed for
inspection and service.
• The pump must be installed so that the oil
is kept in the pump casing when the oil flow
is stopped.
• The pump must be installed as close as
possible to the feed tank in order to avoid
suction losses.
41
7 Installation
X027351A
Model ALP vertical mounting Model ALP horizontal mounting
7.2 Protect the pump against contamination
ON
CAUTI
!
Avoid damage through impurities in the pipe
system.
1. During welding work attach protective
covers in front of the connecting flanges.
2. Ensure when welding that welding beads
and abrasive dust cannot get into the pipe
system and the pump.
3. After the connecting work clean the pipe
system thoroughly, see 7.6.1 Cleaning the
pipe system on page 44
42
7 Installation
7.3 Piping
The pipe installation must meet the following
demands:
• The pipes must be installed and supported

with no support from the pump casing.
• The pipe flanges must fit the pump flanges
so that they can be connected without using
any force. Check the clearance and the
angular, vertical and linear offset, adjusting
where necessary.
• Before the pipes are connected to the
pump they must be cleaned from particles
resulting from, for example, welding and
cutting.
X027361A
• Tighten the connecting screws crosswise

with torque, see 9.1.1 Tightening torques
on page 57.
• In installations where the pump does not

retain the oil at stand still, the suction pipe
should be arranged so it forms a liquid trap
together with the pump. The liquid trap
should secure that the pump is kept at least
half filled with oil at stand still.
• Shut-off valves must be installed on both
sides of the pump.
• The suction line should be dimensioned for
an oil flow speed between 0.5 and 1.2 m/s,
and the pressure line for 1 to 3 m/s.
• The suction line must be equipped with a X027513A
port near the pump, that allows filling the

pump with oil before the initial start.
• The manometric suction head must not
exceed the NPSH values in 6.2 Required
Net Positive Suction Height (NPSH) values
on page 33
7.4 Strainer
An oil strainer of suitable size should be installed
to protect the pump against damage and wear
from coarse particles.
The pressure drop across the strainer should

not exceed 10 kPa (0.1 bar) at maximum flow
rate and normal viscosity.
43
7 Installation
7.5 Gauges
Pressure gauges on both the suction and
the pressure side must be connected by 1/2”
sockets and ball valves.
7.6 Commissioning
7.6.1 Cleaning the pipe system

To protect the pump against soiling the complete
pipe system has to be cleaned carefully before
initial commissioning of the pump.
7.6.2 Filling the pump

The filling procedure must be followed when the
pump is taken into operation after installation
and whenever the pump casing has been
emptied of oil, for example, when the pump has
been dismantled.
NG
WARNI
!
Entrapment hazard
Do not start filling the pump unless the power is
switched off.
1. Remove the fan cover from the electric

motor.
2. Turn the pump shaft or the fan impeller of
the motor. This tests that the pump runs
smoothly. If the pump cannot be turned by
hand, remedy the fault before installing the
pump, see 4.2 Troubleshooting on page 19.
3. Open the port on the suction pipe near the
pump.
44
7 Installation
4. Open the shut-off valve on the pressure

side of the pump.
5. Vent the shaft seal compartment (3).
In installations with positive suction pressure:

After opening the inlet and outlet valves, simply
open the deaeration plug (3) a few turns until oil
sips out. Tighten the plug.
In installation with negative suction pressure:

After opening the inlet and outlet valves, remove
the deaeration plug (3) and fill the shaft seal
compartment with oil. Fit and tighten the plug. X027514A
8. Fill the pump with oil while rotating the

pump manually. The pump is rotated
by turning the motor fan in the direction
indicated by the rotation arrow on the motor
or connection flange. (There are arrows for
inlet and outlet directions on the pump. Do
not mix them up with the rotation arrow.)
9. When the pump is filled, close the filling port

and refit the fan cover.
10. Check that all valves necessary for

operation are open.
X027371A
1. Suction connection
2. Pressure connection
3. Vent hole
7.6.3 Checking the direction of

rotation
The direction of rotation and the flow direction
are indicated by arrows on the pump. The
direction of rotation of the motor gives the
direction of rotation of the pump. That is to say,
the fan impeller of the motor must rotate in the
direction in which the arrows on the pump are
pointing to indicate direction of rotation.
45
7 Installation
Standard direction of rotation: clockwise

(viewed from the drive)
X027381A
1. Arrow for flow direction

2. Arrow for direction of rotation
ON
CAUTI
!
Dry running can damage pump equipment.
Ensure that the pump is filled properly.
Switch the pump on for a maximum of 1 second and

then off again immediately.
ON
CAUTI
!
Dry running can damage pump equipment.
Ensure that the pump is filled properly.
If the pump does not deliver after 10–15 seconds,

abort commissioning.
1. Ensure that the pump is filled. In case

of doubt prelubricate the pump and
mechanical seal by pouring in liquid via the
vent hole, see 5.5 Cleaning the leakage
vent hole on page 25.
2. Switch on the pump.

The pump will deliver when the pressure
on the pressure side of the pump rises or a
system-side flow indicator triggers.
46
7 Installation
3. If the pump does not deliver after

10–15 seconds of operation, abort initial
commissioning, establish the cause of
the fault and only then continue the
commissioning procedure. Follow the
instructions in the fault table, see 4.2
Troubleshooting on page 19.
4. Run the pump for a few minutes to allow the

pipe system to vent fully. The pipe system
is fully vented when there is a smooth
operating noise and a pressure gauge on
the pressure side of the pump shows no
more fluctuations.
7.6.4 Taking the pump out of

operation
NG
WARNI
!
Risk of injury or poisoning through emitted
pumped liquid.
Collect the emitted pumped liquid safely and dispose

of it in an environmentally compatible manner.
Carry out the following measures during shutdowns:
Pump is Measure
shut down for longer period Depending on pumped liquid, see below..
Close the pressure-side and suction-side shut-off
drained devices.
Disconnect the motor from the power supply and secure
dismantled it against being switched back on.
Observe measures for storing and preservation, see
stored page 51.
Measures for operation interruption
Behavior of the pumped

liquid Duration of the shut down
Short Long
sediment solids Rinse the pump. Rinse the pump.
congealed/frozen Heat or drain the pump. Drain the pump.
no corrosive burden
congealed/frozen Heat or drain the pump. Drain the pump.
corrosive burden Preserve the pump.
remains liquid — —
47
7 Installation
no corrosive burden
remains liquid — Drain the pump.
corrosive burden Preserve the pump.
Measures depending on behavior of the pumped

liquid
• Drain the pump via the pressure and

suction line and vent screw.
7.6.5 Recommissioning the

pump
Carry out all the steps as for the commissioning
process, see 7.6 Commissioning on page 44.
48
8 Transportation, storage and

disposal
8.1 Unpacking and checking the state of delivery

1. Upon delivery unpack the pump/pump unit
and check for transport damage.
2. Report any transport damage immediately

to the manufacturer.
3. Dispose of packing materials in accordance

with the locally applicable regulations.
49
8 Transportation, storage and disposal
8.2 Lifting the pump/pump unit
X027411A
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Prerequisites:
• Sufficiently dimensioned hoisting

equipment
• The used hoisting equipment conforms to

the local regulations and health and safety
regulations
NGE R
! DA
Risk of injury and/or damage to equipment
should the pump/pump unit fall.
Use intact and correctly dimensioned hoisting
equipment suitable for the weight to be lifted.
50
Fasten the hoisting equipment in accordance

with figures 1 or 2.
Secure motors additionally against tilting.
Do not stand under raised loads.
8.2.1 Pump
• Depending on the locally applicable
regulations, the pump can be transported
either manually or by using suitable hoisting
equipment.
8.2.2 Pump unit

1. Vertical mounting: Fasten the slings around
the adapter housing, see Fig. 1.
Horizontal mounting: Fasten the slings to

the pump unit at an appropriate angle, see
Fig. 2.
Ensure that the center of gravity of the

pump unit lies between and below the
attachment points. If this is not possible,
take other suitable measures to prevent the
pump unit from tilting.
2. Secure the slings against slipping, for

example with screwed-in eye bolts.
3. Attach the slings onto the crane hook and

lift the pump unit.
8.3 Storage
During the test run, the internal components of
the pump are wetted with test oil, which has
a preservative effect. The pipe connections
are fitted with protective covers. The external
components of the pump are preserved with
a single-coat PU-based two-component paint.
The preservative applied at the factory will
protect the pump for about six weeks, if it
is stored in a dry and clean location. The
manufacturer offers a long-term preservation for
storage times of up to 60 months. With longterm
conservation the pump is additionally packed in
hermetically sealing anti-corrosion paper.
51
8.3.1 Preservation
Preservation has to be carried out in the
following cases:
• For standard delivery: For storage periods

exceeding six weeks and in case of adverse
storage conditions such as high humidity,
salty air, etc.
• For delivery with long-term preservation:
If the packaging has been opened or
damaged.
8.3.2 Preserving the internal

surfaces of the pump
1. Close the suction connection of the pump
with a blind flange.
2. Pour non-corrosive, resin-free oil into the

pressure connection until it reaches approx.
2 cm under the pressure flange, while
slowly turning the main screw against the
direction of rotation.
3. Close the pressure connection of the pump

with a blind flange.
After about 6 months storage check the oil

level in the pump and top up if necessary.
8.3.3 Preserving the external

surfaces of the pump
Aids:
- Preservative (e.g. Castrol Rustilo DWX 33)
Paint or spray the preservative onto all plain and

unpainted parts.
At intervals of about six months, check the

preservative effect and if necessary repeat
preservation.
NOTE
Store the preserved pump in a cool and dry place and

do not expose it to direct sunlight.
52
8.3.4 Removing the preservation

Aids:
- Solvent
- Steam-jet cleaning device with

wax-dissolving additives
NG
WARNI
!
Risk of injury through emitted preservative
oil.
Remove the blind flange with caution to relieve any

pressure inside the pump.
Collect the emitted oil safely and dispose of it in an

environmentally compatible manner.
1. Clean the outside of the pump with

solvents, if necessary using a steam-jet
cleaning device.
2. Remove the blind flange on the pressure

side.
3. Drain the pump, collecting the preservative

oil in a suitable vessel.
4. Remove the blind flange on the suction

side.
5. To remove the residual oil, rinse the pump

with the pumped liquid.
8.4 Disposing of the pump

Aids:
- Solvents or industrial cleaners suitable for

the pumped liquid
53
NG
WARNI
!
Danger of poisoning and damage to the
environment from the pumped liquid.
Collect the discharging pumped liquid and oil and

dispose of it in accordance with the locally applicable
regulations.
Neutralize any residues of the pumped liquid.
1. Disassemble the pump.
2. Clean residues of the pumped liquid from

the individual parts.
3. Separate sealing elements made of

elastomers and ceramics (SiC) from the
pump and dispose of them in the residual
waste.
4. Recycle metal parts.
54
9 Spare parts
9.1 Spare parts kits

Pump size Kit type Part. no
Commissioning Kit 9007162-80
ALP 15-20
Overhaul Kit 9007162-81

ALP 30-40

ALP 55-85
Coupling kits
Pump size Motor size Part. no

80 9024734–01
ALP 15-40 90 9024734–02
100/112 9024734–03
90 9024734–04
ALP 55-85 100/112 9024734–05
132 9024734–06
55
9 Spare parts
Spare part kit Qty. Pos.no. Denomination

A: Commissioning kit
1 457 Mechanical seal
1 472 Circlip
1 471 Circlip
1 056 Supporting ring
1* 056* Supporting ring
1 058 L-ring
X027122A
1 Disassembly tool
* Only for sizes
15–20.
B: Overhaul kit
222 1 457 Mechanical seal
471 1 222 Flat gasket
056*
1 817 Ball bearing
1 739.1 O-ring
056 472 1 472 Circlip
8 817
1 471 Circlip
457 739.1
1 056 Supporting ring
X027516A
1* 056* Supporting ring
1 058 L-ring
1 Disassembly tool
* Only for sizes
15–20.
C: Coupling kit
052 1 052 Coupling
X027181b
56
9 Spare parts
9.1.1 Tightening torques

Tightening torque [Nm] for screws with metric threads + head contact With thread
surfaces measured in
inches
+ wedge lock Stainless steel Screw plugs
washers screws A2 and A4 with elastomer
seal
Thread 8.8 10.9 8.8 + 8.8 Rust-proof Property Property Thread Galva-
Alu* A4-70 class 70 class 80 nized +
stain-
less
steel
M3 1.5 — 1.2 1.5 1.1 — — G1/8" 13
M4 2.9 4.1 2.3 3 2 — — G1/4" 30
M5 6.0 8.0 4.8 6.0 3.9 3.5 4.7 G3/8" 60
M6 9.5 14 7.6 10.3 6.9 6 8 G1/2" 80
M8 23.1 34 18.,4 25 17 16 22 G3/4" 120
M10 46 68 36.8 47 33 32 43 G1" 200
M12 80 117 64 84 56 56 75 G1 1/4" 400
M14 127 186 101 133 89 — — G1 1/2" 450
M16 194 285 155 204 136 135 180 * reduced
M18 280 390 224 284 191 — — tightening
torque when
M20 392 558 313 399 267 280 370
screwing into
M24 675 960 540 687 460 455 605 aluminum
57
9 Spare parts
9.1.2 Required tools for

maintenance work
Disassembly tool
X027391A
Dimensions disassembly tool [mm]

Size d1 d2 l1 l2 s
G
15 – 85 1/4" Ø 3 80 12 10
58
Ancillary Components 

Installation Instructions
Printed May 2016

Book No. 9016953-02 V 9
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2016.
ANCILLARY COMPONENTS ANCILLARY COMPONENTS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Read this first

This manual is intended for all customers and entities that build modules. The manual includes
minimum installation requirements for system components.
Complementary information for additional system components may be supplied depending

on order configuration.
Requirements
Only Skilled or Instructed persons should install the separator and separator system components.
 Skilled person: A person with technical knowledge or sufficient experience to enable him or
her to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics can create.
 Instructed person: A person adequately advised or supervised by a Skilled person to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may need to be hired, like electricians and others. In some
of these cases the personnel has to be certified according to local regulations with experience of
similar types of work.
Safeguard the quality and function by always using genuine Alfa Laval recommended components.
Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the failure and or functionality of the separator system
equipped with non-original spare components.
Disclaimer
Alfa Laval disclaims any and all responsibility or liability whatsoever for injury, loss or damage that
may result from failure to comply with the installation requirements set forth in this manual and/or in
any other complementary information that may be supplied by the company. If, for example, non-
Alfa Laval components are used in the system, installation is not performed by a sufficiently
qualified Skilled or Instructed person or the Ancillary Components Installation Instructions are
not followed, Alfa Laval will thus not accept responsibility for any claims that are a result thereof.
If unsure as how to interpret or follow these instructions, always consult your closest Alfa Laval
representative.
The above disclaimer is without prejudice to any further limitations or exclusions of liability
which may follow from the terms and conditions applicable to Alfa Laval's supply of the
relevant modules and system components.
9016953-02
ANCILLARY COMPONENTS ANCILLARY COMPONENTS INSTALLATION
French
Préambule
Ce manuel est destiné à l'ensemble des clients et entités qui conçoivent des modules. Le manuel
comprend les exigences d'installation minimales relatives aux composants du système.
Des informations complémentaires peuvent être fournies pour d'autres composants du système en
fonction de la configuration de la commande.
Conditions requises
Seules des personnes compétentes et formées doivent installer le séparateur et les composants
du système de séparateur.
 Personne compétente : personne possédant des connaissances techniques ou une
expérience suffisante(s) lui permettant de discerner les risques et d'éviter les dangers
potentiels dus à l'électricité/aux pièces mécaniques.
 Personne formée : personne ayant reçu des conseils ou une supervision adéquats de la part
d'une personne compétente, ce qui lui permet de discerner les risques et d'éviter les dangers
potentiels dus à l'électricité/aux pièces mécaniques.
Dans certains cas, il convient de faire appel à un personnel spécialisé, tel que des électriciens.
Dans certaines de ces situations, le personnel doit être certifié conformément à la réglementation
locale et avoir l'expérience de ce type de travaux.
Préservez la qualité et le fonctionnement en utilisant systématiquement des composants

recommandés Alfa Laval authentiques. Alfa Laval ne pourra en aucun cas être responsable de la
panne et/du fonctionnement du système de séparateur équipé de composants non d'origine.
Clause de non-responsabilité
Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité ou obligation en ce qui concerne tout préjudice, perte ou
dommage résultant du non-respect des exigences d'installation stipulées dans le présent manuel
et/ou dans d'autres informations complémentaires fournies par l'entreprise. Si, par exemple, des
composants non Alfa Laval sont utilisés dans le système, si l'installation n'est pas réalisée par une
personne compétente ou formée suffisamment qualifiée ou si les Instructions d'installation des
composants auxiliaires ne sont pas respectées, Alfa Laval se dégage de toute responsabilité
concernant les réclamations qui pourront en découler.
Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de la façon d'interpréter ou de suivre ces instructions, contactez toujours
votre représentant Alfa Laval local.
La clause de non-responsabilité ci-dessus est sans préjudice des autres limitations ou

exclusions de responsabilité pouvant découler des conditions générales applicables à la
fourniture par Alfa Laval des modules et composants de système appropriés.
9016953-02
Spanish
Prólogo
Este manual está dirigido a todos los clientes y las organizaciones que construyan módulos. El
manual incluye los requisitos mínimos de instalación para los componentes del sistema.
En función de la configuración del pedido, podría suministrarse información adicional para otros
componentes del sistema
Requisitos
Únicamente las personas con la cualificación o la formación correspondiente deben instalar la
separadora y los componentes del sistema de la separadora.
 Persona cualificada: persona con conocimientos técnicos o con experiencia suficiente para
percatarse de los riesgos inherentes a los sistemas mecánicos y eléctricos, y para ser capaz
de evitarlos.
 Persona instruida: persona que ha recibido asesoramiento de una persona cualificada o está
bajo su supervisión y es capaz de percatarse de los riesgos inherentes a los sistemas
mecánicos y eléctricos, y que es capaz de evitar dichos riesgos.
En algunos casos, puede ser necesario contratar a personal cualificado, como por ejemplo,
electricistas. En algunos de estos casos, el personal deberá estar debidamente acreditado de
acuerdo con la normativa local y tener experiencia en trabajos similares.
Proteja la calidad y la función utilizando siempre componentes recomendados originales de Alfa

Laval. Alfa Laval no puede hacerse responsable del fallo o el funcionamiento de un sistema de
separadora equipado con piezas de recambio no originales.
Renuncia de responsabilidad
Alfa Laval renuncia a toda y cualquier responsabilidad que surja de daños personales, pérdidas o
daños materiales como resultado de no haber cumplido con los requisitos de instalación
determinados en este manual y/o en cualquier otra información adicional que la compañía pueda
haber proporcionado. Si, por ejemplo, se usan componentes que no son de Alfa Laval en el
sistema, la instalación no se realiza por una persona lo suficientemente cualificada o con la
formación adecuada, o no se siguen las Instrucciones de instalación de los componentes
auxiliares, Alfa Laval no aceptará ninguna responsabilidad por ninguna reclamación consecuente
de lo anterior.
Si no está seguro de cómo debe interpretar o seguir estas instrucciones, consulte en cualquier
caso a su representante de Alfa Laval más cercano.
La renuncia de responsabilidad anterior se entiende sin perjuicio de las limitaciones y

exclusiones de responsabilidad que puedan derivarse de los términos y condiciones
aplicables al suministro de Alfa Laval de los módulos y componentes del sistema
relevantes.
9016953-02
Chinese
请首先阅读本手册
本手册面向所有制造模块的客户与实体。本手册介绍了系统组件的最低配置。
根据订购的配置，可能还会提供附加系统组件的补充信息。
要求
分离机以及分离机系统组件的安装只能由熟练或经过培训的人员来进行。
 技术熟练的人员：这类人具备相应的技术知识或丰富的经验，使自己能够意识到风险并可避免
电力 / 机械可能造成的危险。
 受过指导的人员：这类人受到技术熟练人员的充分指导或督导，使自己能够意识到风险并可避
免电力 / 机械可能造成的危险。
在某些情况下，可能需要聘用具有特殊技能的人员，如电工及其他人员。在这些情况中的某些情况
下，须根据当地法规对具有类似工种工作经验的人员进行认证。
请始终使用阿法拉伐推荐的原装组件以保障质量和功能。请注意，阿法拉伐对使用非原装组件的分
离机系统的故障和 / 或功能异常不承担责任。
免责声明
对于因未能遵守本手册或公司可能提供的任何其他补充信息中规定的安装要求而导致的伤害、损失
或损害，阿法拉伐不承担任何责任。例如，如果在系统中使用了非阿法拉伐组件、未使用足够合格
的熟练人员或经过培训的人员来进行安装，或为遵循辅助组件安装说明，阿法拉伐对于因而产生的
任何索赔将不承担任何责任。
如果不确定如何理解或遵循这些说明，请务必就近咨询阿法拉伐代表。
以上免责声明不影响任何适用于阿法拉伐提供的相关模块和系统组件的条款与条件的其他责任限制
或排除。
9016953-02
Korean
사전 참고사항
본 사용 설명서는 모듈을 구축하는 모든 고객과 단체를 대상으로 작성되었습니다 . 본 사용
설명서에는 시스템 구성품의 최소 설치 요구사항이 포함되어 있습니다 .
추가적인 시스템 구성품에 대한 보충 정보는 주문 구성에 따라 제공됩니다 .
요구사항
분리기 및 분리기 시스템 구성품의 설치는 숙련되거나 관련 교육을 받은 작업자만 할 수 있습니다 .
 숙련된 작업자 : 충분한 기술적 지식이나 경험을 보유하고 있어 전기 / 기계에서 발생할 수 있는
위험을 인지하고 이에 대처할 수 있는 작업자를 의미합니다 .
 교육을 받은 작업자: 숙련된 작업자로부터 충분한 조언과 훈련을 받아 전기/기계에서 발생할 수
있는 위험을 인지하고 이에 대처할 수 있는 작업자를 의미합니다 .
전기 기술자 등 특수한 전문 기술자를 고용해야 하는 경우도 있습니다 . 이러한 경우에는 유사한
유형의 작업 경험이 있으며 해당 지역 규정에 따른 인증을 받은 작업자여야 할 수도 있습니다 .
항상 Alfa Laval 에서 권장하는 정품 구성품을 사용하여 품질과 기능을 보호하십시오 . Alfa Laval 은
정품이 아닌 예비 구성품을 장착한 분리기 시스템에서 발생하는 고장 및 / 또는 기능 저하에 대한
책임을 지지 않습니다 .
면책사항
Alfa Laval 은 본 사용 설명서 및 / 또는 회사에서 제공한 기타 보충 정보에 명시된 설치 요구사항을
준수하지 않아 발생하는 부상, 손실 또는 손상에 대해 어떠한 책임 또는 법적 책임도 지지 않습니다.
예를 들어 Alfa Laval 정품이 아닌 구성품이 시스템에 사용되었거나 충분한 자격을 갖춘 숙련된
작업자 또는 교육을 받은 작업자가 설치를 수행하지 않았거나 보조 구성품 설치 지침을 준수하지
않은 경우 , Alfa Laval 은 그로 인해 발생한 어떤 결과에도 책임을 지지 않습니다 .
이 지침의 해석 방법이나 준수 방법을 알 수 없을 경우에는 반드시 가까운 Alfa Laval 담당자에게

문의하십시오 .
상기 면책사항은 Alfa Laval에서 제공하며 관련 모듈 및 시스템 구성품에 적용되는 이용 약관에 따른

추가적인 법적 책임 제한 또는 제외사항을 침해하지 않습니다 .
9016953-02
Russian
Сначала прочитайте это

Данное руководство по эксплуатации предназначено для всех клиентов и организаций,
конструирующих модули. В руководстве содержатся минимальные требования к установке
компонентов системы.
Дополнительная информация для отдельных компонентов системы поставляется в
зависимости от структуры заказа.
Требования
Установка сепаратора и компонентов системы должна производиться только
квалифицированными или проинструктированными лицами.
 Квалифицированное лицо: лицо, обладающее техническими знаниями или достаточным
опытом, благодаря чему может заметить опасности, создаваемые электрическими или
механическими системами, и избежать их.
 Проинструктированное лицо: лицо, прошедшее необходимый инструктаж у
квалифицированного лица или контролируемое им, благодаря чему может заметить
создаваемые электрическими или механическими системами опасности и избежать их.
Проинструктированное лицо: лицо, прошедшее необходимый инструктаж у
квалифицированного лица или контролируемое им, благодаря чему может заметить
создаваемые электрическими или механическими системами опасности и избежать их.
Для обеспечения качества и предотвращения сбоев обязательно используйте оригинальные

компоненты, рекомендуемые Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval не несет ответственности за сбой и/или
функционирование системы сепаратора с неоригинальными запчастями.
Отказ от ответственности
Alfa Laval не признает любые виды ответственности или обязательств, связанные с
получением увечий, износом либо ущербом, которые могут стать результатом
несоблюдения требований к установке, изложенным в этом руководстве по эксплуатации и/
или любой другой дополнительной информации, которая может предоставляться
компанией. Например, достаточно подготовленное квалифицированное или
проинструктированное лицо не будет производить установку, если в системе используются
неоригинальные компоненты Alfa Laval. Также, Alfa Laval не будет нести ответственности за
любые претензии, причиной которых будет несоблюдение Инструкций по установке
вспомогательных компонентов.
Если у вас есть сомнения по поводу толкования и соблюдения этих инструкций, обязательно
обратитесь в ближайшее представительство Alfa Laval.
Отказ от ответственности, о котором шла речь выше, может включать в себя дальнейшие
ограничения или исключения ответственности, которые могут следовать из сроков и
условий, имеющих отношение к поставке соответствующих модулей и компонентов системы
Alfa Laval.
9016953-02
Portuguese
Leia as seguintes informações em primeiro lugar
Este manual destina-se a todos os clientes e entidades que criam módulos. Este manual inclui is
requisitos de instalação mínimos para os componentes do sistema.
Podem ser fornecidas informações complementares para os componentes adicionais do sistema,

dependendo da da configuração da encomenda.
Requisitos
A instalação da separadora e dos respectivos componentes só deve ser efectuada por pessoas
com experiência ou habilitadas.
 Pessoa com experiência: Uma pessoa que tenha conhecimentos técnicos ou experiência
suficiente que lhe permitam reconhecer os riscos e evitar perigos de origem eléctrica/
mecânica.
 Pessoa habilitada: Uma pessoa que tenha recebido formação adequada ou seja
devidamente supervisionada por uma pessoa qualificada, de tal forma que seja capaz de
reconhecer riscos e evitar perigos de origem eléctrica/mecânica.
Nalguns casos, poderá ser necessário contratar pessoal com qualificações especiais, como
electricistas e outros profissionais. Nalguns desses casos, o pessoal deverá ser certificado em
conformidade com os regulamentos locais e possuir experiência em trabalhos de tipo semelhante.
Salvaguarde a qualidade e o funcionamento utilizando sempre componentes recomendados

genuínos da Alfa Laval. A Alfa Laval não se responsabiliza por qualquer falha e/ou funcionalidade
do sistema da separadora equipado com componentes sobressalentes não originais.
Limitação de responsabilidade
A Alfa Laval não assume qualquer responsabilidade por lesões, perdas ou danos que possam
resultar de falha em cumprir os requisitos de instalação definidos neste manual e/ou quaisquer
outras informações complementares que possam ser fornecidas pela empresa. Se, por exemplo,
forem utilizados no sistema componentes que não da Alfa Laval, a instalação não for efectuada por
uma pessoa devidamente qualificada ou se as Instruções de instalação dos componentes
auxiliares não forem seguidos, a Alfa Laval não assumirá qualquer responsabilidade por
reclamações daí resultantes.
Se houver incerteza sobre como interpretar ou seguir estas instruções, consulte sempre um
representante mais próximo da Alfa Laval.
A limitação de responsabilidade acima indicada é sem prejuízo de outras limitações ou

exclusões de responsabilidade, que possam resultar dos termos e condições aplicáveis ao
fornecimento pela Alfa Laval dos componentes do sistema e módulos relevantes.
9016953-02
Japanese
最初に読んでください
本書は、モジュールを製造するお客様、組織を対象にしています。本書の内容は、システム構成
部品を取り付ける最小限の要件です。
他のシステム構成部品についての情報はオーダー構成によって異なることがあります。
要件
分離機、分離機システム構成部品を取り付けるのは、有資格者またはトレーニングを受けた技術
者に限られます。
 有資格者 : リスクを認識し、電気的または機械的に発生する危険を回避できる技術的な知識
または十分な経験を有する者。
 トレーニングを受けた技術者 : リスクを認識し、電気的または機械的に発生する危険を回避
できるように、熟練担当者による適切な助言または監督を受けた者。
場合によっては、電気技術者などの特殊技術を有する作業員を雇用することが必要な場合もあり
ます。このようなケースでは、作業員が同種の作業経験に関して地域の法規制による認定を受け
ることが必要な場合もあります。
常にアルファ・ラバル推奨品を使用して品質、機能を守ってください。アルファ・ラバルは、純
正品以外の部品を使用した分離機システムの故障や機能については責任を負いません。
免責事項
アルファ・ラバルは、本書記載の取付け要件、あるいはアルファ・ラバルが提供する他の情報を
守らないことによる傷害、損失、破損について責任を負いません。たとえば、アルファ・ラバル
以外の部品をシステムに使用した場合、十分な資格があるかトレーニングを受けた技術者による
取付けは行われないか、付属品取付け指示は守られません。アルファ・ラバルはしたがってその
結果生じるクレームについて責任を負いません。
これらの指示の解釈、順守の方法が不明な場合は、アルファ・ラバル担当者にお問い合わせくだ
さい。
前記免責事項は、アルファ・ラバルによる関連モジュール、システム構成部品の供給に適用され
る条件に関わる他の制限や免責事項を無効にするものではありません。
9016953-02
Contents
1 Drawings ................................................. 13
1.1 CBM Steam System 
Installation Drawing .....................14
1.2 CBM TO and HW System
Installation Drawing ......................15
1.3 Flexible Hoses Installation
Drawing, P Separators..................16
1.4 Flexible Hoses Installation
Drawing, S Separators..................17
1.5 Heat Tracing Steam 
Installation Instruction ................18
1.6 Pressure Gauge Installation
Instruction ........................................19
1.7 Pressure Transmitter 
Installation Instruction ................20
1.8 Pump Installation Instruction,
ACP025-ACP038, 
ALP015-ALP085 ..............................21
1.9 Pump Installation Instruction,
ACP045-ACP070, 
ALP100-ALP280, KF370/450 .......22
1.10 Sludge Pipe Installation 
Drawing .............................................23
1.11 Sludge Pipe Installation 
Drawing, cont. .................................24
1.12 Temperature Sensor 
1.13 Temperature Transmitter
1.14 Water Block Installation 
Drawing .............................................27
1.15 Cable Gland Installation
Instruction ........................................28
1.16 Installation instructions for
Interface relay retrofit kit
applicable for Flex Range ...........29
9016953-02
9016953-02
Ancillary Components Installation Instructions 1 Drawings
1 Drawings
9016953-02 13
1 Drawings Ancillary Components Installation Instructions
1.1 CBM Steam System Installation Drawing
G1098511
14 9016953-02
1.2 CBM TO and HW System Installation Drawing
G1098611
9016953-02 15
1.3 Flexible Hoses Installation Drawing, P Separators
G1098711
16 9016953-02
1.4 Flexible Hoses Installation Drawing, S Separators
G1111111
9016953-02 17
1.5 Heat Tracing Steam Installation Instruction
G1098911
18 9016953-02
1.6 Pressure Gauge Installation Instruction
G1099011
9016953-02 19
1.7 Pressure Transmitter Installation Instruction
G1099111
20 9016953-02
1.8 Pump Installation Instruction, ACP025-ACP038,

ALP015-ALP085
G1099211
9016953-02 21
1.9 Pump Installation Instruction, ACP045-ACP070,

ALP100-ALP280, KF370/450
G1099311
22 9016953-02
1.10 Sludge Pipe Installation Drawing
G1099411
9016953-02 23
1.11 Sludge Pipe Installation Drawing, cont.
G1099511
24 9016953-02
1.12 Temperature Sensor Installation Drawing
G1099611
9016953-02 25
1.13 Temperature Transmitter Installation Drawing
G1099611
26 9016953-02
1.14 Water Block Installation Drawing
G1099711
9016953-02 27
1.15 Cable Gland Installation Instruction
G1099811
28 9016953-02
Ancillary Components Ancillary Components Installation Instructions 1 Drawings
1.16 Installation instructions for Interface relay retrofit

kit applicable for Flex Range
9016953-02 29
1 Drawings Ancillary Components Ancillary Components Installation
30 9016953-02
Installation instruction Document No 9014718

Version No 2
Pages 1 (54)
Installation instructions for Interface relay retrofit kit applicable for

FlexRange.
Background:
We have problems with malfunctioning relay cards controlling solenoid valves. Heat from an arc melts the
contacts of the relay and they get stuck (melted together) and the relay is then unable to switch.
To protect the relays in the relay cards, we have created this interface relay retrofit kit. These interface
relays can handle higher power than the relay cards. The kit doesn’t replace the function of the relay card
so when a relay card is broken you have to exchange the broken relay card as well as installing this kit.
The Interface relay kit (art.no. 9014598 80) consists of:
1 pc DIN rail.
2 pc end stops.
6 pc relays (Spare part art.no.: 591480 32).
2 pc bus bar (Spare part art.no.: 591480 34 (cut into 6 pol)).
Markings for the relays.
2 pc DIN rail standoff bracket 45° angle.

Cable markings.
8 pc of prefabricated cables.
Example of tools and components you may need to install the kit:
Self-tapping screws, pop rivets or similar.
Screw and washer M6.
End ferrules.
Wire, red, Ø 1,0 (AWG 18 red UL1569 HAR, Tri-rated UL-CSA-HAR or equivalent).
Cable ties.
Small slotted screwdriver.
Torque screwdriver or drill and interchangeable bits.
Cutting, stripping and crimping tools.
Note: Installation must be performed by personnel with adequate electrical expertise.

Version2 0
9XXXXXXVersion
Template ID: 9004871
Dept: Issued by: Approved by: Approve date:
CAT MATHIAS WALLEN NICKLAS LUNDIN 2015-01-30

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval AB (publ.) and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights. Without This document may
limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, constitute a contractual
mechanical, recording or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval. obligation on the part of Alfa
Alfa Laval will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution. Laval AB only to the extent
expressly agreed upon.

Version No 2
Pages 2 (54)
Contents
1. Installation instructions Page 3
1.1 Installation in a control cabinet incl. starter using the DIN rail of the cabinet. Page 4
1.2 Installation in a control cabinet incl. starter using the DIN rail of the kit. Page 7
1.3 Installation in a control cabinet excl. starter using the DIN rail of the cabinet. Page 10
1.4 Installation in a control cabinet excl. starter using the DIN rail of the kit. Page 13
2. Circuit diagrams Page 16
2.1 Circuit diagram 580879 sheet 6 Page 17
3. Interconnection diagrams Page 33
3.1 Interconnection diagram 580880 without SV10A installed Page 34
3.2 Interconnection diagram 580880 with SV10A installed Page 35
4. Assembly Drawings Page 50
4.1 Assembly drawing 580878, Installation using the DIN rail of the cabinet. Page 51
4.2 Assembly drawing 580878, Installation using the DIN rail of the kit. Page 52
4.3 Assembly drawing 580904, Installation using the DIN rail of the cabinet. Page 53
4.4 Assembly drawing 580904, Installation using the DIN rail of the kit. Page 54
Version2 0
9XXXXXXVersion
Template ID: 9004871
Dept: Issued by: Approved by: Approve date:
CAT MATHIAS WALLEN NICKLAS LUNDIN 2015-01-30

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval AB (publ.) and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights. Without This document may
limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, constitute a contractual
mechanical, recording or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval. obligation on the part of Alfa
Alfa Laval will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution. Laval AB only to the extent
expressly agreed upon.

Version No 2
Pages 3 (54)
1. Installation instructions
The following is instructions on how to install the Interface relay retrofit kit in control cabinet including
starter and control cabinet excluding starter. The best way is to mount the relays on the existing DIN rail for
terminals in the cabinet but since we have seen that in some cases there isn’t enough space on it due to
customer adaptations, you can also mount it using the DIN rail of the kit or wherever it is space enough and
close enough for the cables to reach.
To know which instructions to follow you need to know the following:

1. If your cabinet is incl. or excl. starter.
2. If there is space enough to mount the interface relay kit on the existing DIN rail for terminals or not.
You can see if it is incl. Starter or excl. Starter just by comparing your Control Cabinet with the Front views
of the different Control Cabinet types below.
Excl. Starter. Incl. Starter.
If your cabinet is incl. starter and there is space enough to mount the interface relay kit on the existing DIN
rail for terminals you follow the instruction in chapter 1.1 on page 4.
If your cabinet is incl. starter and there is not space enough to mount the interface relay kit on the existing
DIN rail for terminals you follow the instruction in chapter 1.2 on page 7.
If your cabinet is excl. starter and there is space enough to mount the interface relay kit on the existing DIN
Template ID: 9004871 Version 2
rail for terminals you follow the instruction in chapter 1.3 on page 10.
If your cabinet is excl. starter and there is not space enough to mount the interface relay kit on the existing
DIN rail for terminals you follow the instruction in chapter 1.4 on page 13.
This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval AB (publ.) and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related This document may constitute a contractual
rights. Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or obligation on the part of Alfa Laval AB only
by any means (electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval. to the extent expressly agreed upon.
Alfa Laval will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.

Version No 2
Pages 4 (54)
1.1 Installation in a control cabinet incl. starter using the

DIN rail of the cabinet.
Step 1:
Make sure that the power of the control cabinet is turned off!
Remove the relays from the DIN rail of the kit and mount them on the DIN rail for terminals in the control
cabinet. In case some of the relays are not to be used, do not mount them and cut the bus bars into the
right number of poles (which relays to use are shown in the connection diagrams (chapter 1)).

Version No 2
Pages 5 (54)
Step 2:
Disconnect conductor 1 of the (external) cable of each solenoid valve from the terminal and connect it to
the relay according to the list below (mark the conductor with the supplied markers, K22:14 and so on).
Solenoid Cable Disconnect Connect to relay Note

valve (cable- from (relay:connection)
conductor) terminal
SV1 11-1 X2:101 K22:14
SV4 12-1 X2:102 K23:14 Not used on S805, S815,
P605, P615, P626 or P636.
SV5 13-1 X2:103 K24:14 Not used on S805, S815,
P605, P615, P626 or P636.
SV10 14-1 X2:104 K27:14 Not to be changed when
both SV10 and SV10A is
installed!
SV15 15-1 X2:105 K25:14
SV16 16-1 X2:106 K26:14

Version No 2
Pages 6 (54)
Step 3:
Use the prefabricated cables and wire markers to connect the relays to the terminals according to the list
below.
Connect to terminal Connect to relay Wire marking Note

X2:101 K22:A1 X2:101
X2:102 K23:A1 X2:102 Not used on S805,
S815 or P-separators.
X2:103 K24:A1 X2:103 Not used on S805,
X2:104 K27:A1 X2:104 Not to be connected
when both SV10 and
SV10A is installed!
X2:105 K25:A1 X2:105
X2:106 K26:A1 X2:106
X500 K22:A2 500
X501 K22:11 501
Step 4:
Turn on the power and check the function of the relays and the solenoid valves by using the I/O test of the
EPC 60(see chapter 1.16 in the Operating instructions of the manual).

If the function is OK you are ready to run the separator.

Version No 2
Pages 7 (54)
1.2 Installation in a control cabinet incl. starter using the

DIN rail of the kit.
Step 1:
Mount the relay kit in the empty space below the DIN rail for terminals in the control cabinet using self-
tapping screws or similar. Make sure that you mount it far enough from the wall of the cabinet that you are
able to use a small screwdriver to connect the cables to the relay. In case some of the relays are not to be
used, do not mount them and cut the bus bars into the right number of poles (which relays to use are
shown in the connection diagrams (chapter 1)).

Version No 2
Pages 8 (54)
Step 2:

conductor) terminal
SV1 11-1 X2:101 K22:14
SV4 12-1 X2:102 K23:14 Not used on S805, S815 or P-
separators.
separators.
installed!
SV15 15-1 X2:105 K25:14
SV16 16-1 X2:106 K26:14

Version No 2
Pages 9 (54)
Step 3:
below.

X2:101 K22:A1 X2:101
X2:102 K23:A1 X2:102 Not used on S805,
S815, P605, P615,
P626 or P636.
X2:103 K24:A1 X2:103 Not used on S805,
S815, P605, P615,
P626 or P636.
when both SV10 and
SV10A is installed!
X2:105 K25:A1 X2:105
X2:106 K26:A1 X2:106
X500 K22:A2 500
X501 K22:11 501
Step 4:

Version No 2
Pages 10 (54)
1.3 Installation in a control cabinet excl. starter using the

DIN rail of the cabinet.
Step 1:
Remove the relays from the DIN rail of the kit and mount them on the DIN rail for terminals in the control
cabinet. You may have to move Q1 a little bit and remove the end brackets between Q1 and the terminals.
In case some of the relays are not to be used, do not mount them and cut the bus bars into the right
number of poles (which relays to use are shown in the connection diagrams (chapter 1)).

Version No 2
Pages 11 (54)
Step 2:

conductor) terminal
SV1 11-1 X2:101 K22:14
separators.
separators.
installed!
SV15 15-1 X2:105 K25:14
SV16 16-1 X2:106 K26:14

Version No 2
Pages 12 (54)
Step 3:
below.

X2:101 K22:A1 X2:101
X2:102 K23:A1 X2:102 Not used on S805,
X2:103 K24:A1 X2:103 Not used on S805,
when both SV10 and
SV10A is installed!
X2:105 K25:A1 X2:105
X2:106 K26:A1 X2:106
X500 K22:A2 500
X501 K22:11 501
Step 4:

Version No 2
Pages 13 (54)
1.4 Installation in a control cabinet excl. starter using the

DIN rail of the kit.
Step 1:
Mount the relay kit in the empty space between Q1 and TR1, just below the DIN rail for terminals in the
control cabinet using self-tapping screws or similar, M6 screws, M6 washers and DIN rail standoff brackets.
Make sure that you mount it far enough from the bottom of the cabinet that you are able to use a small
screwdriver to connect the cables to the relay. In case some of the relays are not to be used, do not mount
them and cut the bus bars into the right number of poles (which relays to use are shown in the connection
diagrams (chapter 1)).

Version No 2
Pages 14 (54)
Step 2:

conductor) terminal
SV1 11-1 X2:101 K22:14
separators.
separators.
installed!
SV15 15-1 X2:105 K25:14
SV16 16-1 X2:106 K26:14

Version No 2
Pages 15 (54)
Step 3:
below.

X2:101 K22:A1 X2:101
X2:102 K23:A1 X2:102 Not used on S805,
S815, P605, P615,
P626 or P636.
X2:103 K24:A1 X2:103 Not used on S805,
S815, P605, P615,
P626 or P636.
when both SV10 and
SV10A is installed!
X2:105 K25:A1 X2:105
X2:106 K26:A1 X2:106
X500 K22:A2 500
X501 K22:11 501
Step 4:

Version No 2
Pages 16 (54)
2. Circuit diagrams
The following drawings are replacements for the affected sheets in each Circuit diagram drawing.
Check in the manual (Installation System Reference) which Circuit diagram drawing is valid for your
separator.

Version No 2
Pages 17 (54)
2.1 Circuit diagram that replaces Sheet 6 of Drawing 580879.


Version No 2
Pages 18 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 19 (54)
2.3 Circuit diagram that replaces Sheets 5 of Drawing 580905.


Version No 2
Pages 20 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 21 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 22 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 23 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 24 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 25 (54)
2.9 Circuit diagram that replaces Sheet 5 Drawing 581066.


Version No 2
Pages 26 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 27 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 28 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 29 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 30 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 31 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 32 (54)


Version No 2
Pages 33 (54)
3. Interconnection diagrams
The following drawings are replacements for the affected sheets in each Interconection diagram
drawing.
Check in the manual (Installation System Reference) which Interconection diagram drawing is valid
for your separator.

Version No 2
Pages 34 (54)
3.1 Interconection diagram that replaces Sheet 2 of Drawing 580880 where SV10A is not installed.

Version No 2
Pages 35 (54)
3.2 Interconection diagram that replaces Sheet 2 of Drawing 580880 where SV10A is installed.

Version No 2
Pages 36 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 37 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 38 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 39 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 40 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 41 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 42 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 43 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 44 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 45 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 46 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 47 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 48 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 49 (54)

Version No 2
Pages 50 (54)
4. Assembly drawings
The following drawings are replacements for the affected sheets in each Assembly drawing.
Check in the manual (Installation System Reference) which Assembly drawing is valid for your
separator.

Version No 2
Pages 51 (54)
4.1 Assembly drawing that replaces Sheet 2 of Drawing 580878, Installation using the DIN rail of
the cabinet.

Version No 2
Pages 52 (54)
the kit.

Version No 2
Pages 53 (54)
the cabinet.

Version No 2
Pages 54 (54)
the kit.

LO Separator Manual Madhumati P646

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LO Separator Manual Madhumati P646

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Status: Approved Confidential Document id: DBAE891207 - Page 1 (818)

S and P Flex Separation System Description 2

Only foreseeable conditions have been taken into

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB Jun 2008

S and P Flex Separation

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Important – read this!

The centrifugal separator includes parts

1.1 Key Factors for Safe

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

The following is compulsory for safe

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.2 Warning Sign

Danger – serious injury or death Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction

Warning – serious injury or death Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

Caution – minor or moderate injury Example:

This type of safety sign or instruction indicates

‘CAUTION’ used without the safety alert Burn hazard

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

1.3 Summary of Safety

Check that the power frequency is in agreement with

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Use the separation system for the purpose, and within

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the

Check the oil level before start. Top up when

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

If speed or starting power is not correct:

Stop and change the belt transmission to suit the

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

After emergency stop

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

Burn and Corrode Hazards

The nut must not be removed before the separator

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

The number of discs may have to be increased to

Separator parts that are either missing, worn

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

Use only Alfa Laval recommended CIP liquids.

S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.4 Optional Heaters

1.4.1 CBM heaters

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS S AND P FLEX SEPARATION SAFETY

1.4.2 Electric heaters

It is very important that the correct heater element is

Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 06-2016

This publication or any part there of may not

The Purifier System is designed for cleaning of

In the process, heated oil is fed through the

The basic separation unit comprises:

The separating systems can be operated as

During the process, the cleaned oil leaves the